Home

Verde Staff User's Guide - University of Calgary Libraries

1. Chapter 47 Search Display and Navigation in a Shared Consortium Environment In addition to the pop up alert the Verde banner changes so that both the name of the default instance and the record s instance display Figure 171 Name of Default Instance and Record s Instance If a user has write permission for records in instances other than the default instance when changes are submitted a pop up will inform the user that changes are being made to records that are not in the user s default instance This message can be disabled 467 Verde Staff User s Guide 468 48 Merged View This section includes e Product Brief Summary on page 469 e Product Summary Tab on page 470 Viewing Merged Data in the e Package and e Interface Lists on page 471 Within a shared consortia environment there are e product attributes such as acquisitions and license that are managed centrally for all members However there are e product attributes such as usage and access that are managed locally In order to facilitate this it is important to enable users to view data from the e product in the center while working on the local attributes The merged data is shown in two areas in the e product brief summary and in the Summary tab In addition merged data can be viewed in the e product and e interface lists e Product Brief Summary The e product brief summary is available to you in member instances at all
2. university of Chicago HEET Vn 5 University of Chicago Pre Aw Animal genetics 0268 9146 1365 Dr New 7 2052 ne MEMB2 C Implementation 1 rx 1998 12 m ago gt EBSCOHOST MegaFILE MEMB1 C Implementation 1 OE EBSCOhost b y Annals of human genetics 0003 wy New Y 4800 1469 1809 MEMB2 C Implementation 1 2003 12 m ago gt EBSCOHOST MegaFILE MEMB1 C Implementation 1 z EBSCOhost 6 Fy Annual review of i genetics 0066 oO New v 4197 1545 2948 Las 75 MEMA2EE Tmnlementation 11 zl gt sl Ex Libris 2006 a CEE Mioara Figure 165 Display Member Instances 463 Verde Staff User s Guide Search Locally Created e Product Records e Products that were created in one of the member instances of the consortium can be retrieved by searching in another instance if one of the following two conditions is met m The instance in which the e product was created is included in the search m The Search KB check box is selected Z Yerde Popup Microsoft Internet Explorer E E iol xi Instances to search gt Member IV Instance 3 P instance 2 D search KB 7 Managed Locally Find Cancel Figure 166 Search Locally Created e Products in Member Instance If a user from the central instance would like to retrieve an e product that was locally created in one of the member instances the same conditions apply Z verde Popup Microsoft Int
3. Figure 15 e Interface List The following options are available from this screen Jump to another alphabetical point in the list New Search 7 View Basket Display Local Display All Selection Status r Final Approved A7 Final Approved Ar Approved Dr Evaluation Fer id r r r r Xr m Display the local or display all the e products linked to the e interface m Access an e package list by clicking the icon in the relevant line in the first column m Access the e product and its attribute records by clicking the underlined title in the second column m Add an e product or the interface itself to your basket Chapter 5 e Product Lists e Package List When you click one of the e package buttons a screen opens displaying an alphabetical list of the titles that are linked to the e package Managing e Products New Search W View Basket o Q EBSCOHOST Academic Search Alumni Edition 0 EBSCOhost A Q Status Implementation 1 Package type Selective CB Status Production Active 20 Dec 2006 Jump to Go 1 15 of 2 255 records Filter by e Product status A B Filter by Selection stus a J Display Local Display Al Update Title Identifier e Product Selection Coverage Status Status AANA journal 0094 6354 Productio 2001 Updater py he ABNF journa 1046 7041 Production Updater ay About campu 1 Updater py Academe 0190 2946 oduction Updater py
4. 384 37 Introducing the Admin Module One of the fundamental aspects of Verde is that it allows libraries to create and manage their own workflows within the scope of the Verde ERM product Library workflows particularly within the ERM area are unique in that each library has its own set of routines and procedures As a result a workflow management system has been developed that is flexible enough to deal with many variations but at the same time is simple and straightforward enough to support as a single non customized product The Verde authorization system provides three managerial roles m Super user m Administrator m Staff user A super user is a cross instance administrator who can perform the following tasks m Manage all users m Manage the code tables m Create instances An administrator is a staff user with administrative rights to the specific instance to which the staff user belongs An administrator performs the following m Manages all users in this instance Translates labels in the code table Sets default values for new Verde entities and objects Initial administrative work such as activating e products from SFX Staff user s work Modifies the configuration of the Summary screen Verde Staff User s Guide 386 Configures parameters for external applications with which Verde communicates as well as the services used for this communication A staff user is a staff member who carr
5. e Product type e Product type value of work record Interface Name of interface name to which e product belongs Consortial purchase Relevant only for shared multi instance environments There are three possible values managed for all managed for some for central instance and managed locally for local instance Free Free or subscription Other work data The following fields will be included in the summary if they exist issn isbn time span coverage note update frequency 52 Chapter 6 e Product Attribute Records Section e Product More Information Table 3 Summary Tab Fields Availability Comments Availability start and end date if availability is down e Product status Selection status Sponsoring library Selector Library contact Note Public note Interface provider Relevant only for e interface Organization responsible for the interface View access setting Link to access list Link is available for users with view access permissions Link to resource Open URL activated Verde provides access to an SFX menu displaying the electronic full text service for e constituents or e standalones It is available for active e products only Open URL activation status value in e product admin record Libraries Active for List of libraries that have access to the e product 53 Verde Staff User
6. perpetualAccessTo perpetualHoldingsNote Perpetual access to Perpetual holdings note Chapter 21 View Report Output Table 19 License Fields Internal Name archivingRightsCode Display Name Archiving rights code archivingFormatCode Archiving format code archivingNote accessabilityCompliance Archiving note Accessibility compliance completenessOfContentCode Completeness of content Code concurrency WithPrintCode Concurrency with print code intellectualProp Warrenty Intellectual prop warranty confidentialityOf User Confidentiality of user UCITAOverride UCITA override clickwrapModification Click wrap modification indemnificationCode Indemnification code Indemnification confdtyOfAgreement Indemnification Confidentiality of agreement confdtyOfA greementNote Confidentiality of agreement note governingLaw governingJurisdiction Governing law Governing jurisdiction applicableCopyrightLaw Applicable Copyright law curePeriodForBreach curePeriodForBreachUOMCode Cure period for breach Cure period for breach UOM code contentWarrenty Content warranty performanceWarrentyInd Performance warranty indicator performanceWarrenty Performance warranty updatimeGuarantee Update time guarantee maintenaceWindow Maintenance window renewalTypeCode Renewal type
7. e Product status Implementation status of the e product Values are E Trial E Implementation 1 2 and 3 E Production E Withdrawn Activation from date Expiration date Date from which the e product is active Date until which the e product is active When this date is reached Verde will change the e product status to Withdrawn Availability status Availability status default for an active e product is available If the e product is unavailable then set the value of this field to down Availability status start date Start of the period when the e product is unavailable Availability status end date End of the period when the e product is unavailable Availability note Note to accompany availability status Concurrent number of users Sponsoring library Concurrent number of users for this e product Library responsible for the e product 69 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 5 List of e Product Fields Field Name Library contact Description Library contact name Interface provider Organization responsible for the interface Public note Internal note This note can display in external applications such as the OPAC A Z lists and SFX This note is displayed to Verde staff only Global coverage from Year Vol Issue Coverage available from the vendor These fields cannot be updated Global coverage to
8. perpetualAccessRights perpetualAccessFrom Perpetual Access rights Perpetual access from perpetualAccessTo Perpetual access to perpetualHoldingsNote Perpetual holdings note archivingRightsCode Archiving rights code archivingFormatCode Archiving format code archivingNote Archiving note accessabilityCompliance Accessibility compliance completenessOfContentCode Completeness of content Code concurrency WithPrintCode intellectualPropWarrenty Concurrency with print code Intellectual prop warranty confidentialityOfUser Confidentiality of user UCITAOverride clickwrapModification UCITA override Click wrap modification indemnificationCode Indemnification code Indemnification confdtyOfAgreement Indemnification Confidentiality of agreement confdtyOfA greementNote Confidentiality of agreement note governingLaw Governing law governingJurisdiction Governing jurisdiction applicableCopyrightLaw Applicable Copyright law curePeriodForBreach Cure period for breach curePeriodForBreachUOMCode Cure period for breach UOM code contentWarrenty Content warranty performanceWarrentyInd Performance warranty indicator Chapter 21 View Report Output Table 26 Report of Active e Products Without Licenses Internal Name Display name performanceWarrenty Performance warranty
9. A multi instance report can be generated profile with permissions to run reports in only by a user that is assigned a another instance In the example below the administrator of Instance 2 created a profile that enables users in Instance 3 Instance 4 and INST1 that are a part of the consortium to generate a general e product report based on data from Languages Logout Help Instance 2 Verde Tasks KB Manage KB Tools BCI pean caller ic z zz Verde en Edit profile details Profile name Run general report Profile description Availabe for Instances Current Insthnce C Other Instances All Instancfs Cc Select Instance s from the fist List of Igstances z Instance 3 Instance 4 INST1 rme mn een j t Instance 2 Back to profiles list Profile privileges 2 Run general report of e products Figure 160 Multi Instance General Report Profile Note All Verde report outputs can be customized by an instance For more information see Customized Report Outputs on page 371 451 Verde Staff User s Guide 452 4 Working ina Shared Consortium Environment This section includes m Managing Resources Centrally on page 453 m Managing Resources Locally on page 455 m Propagating Locally Created Records on page 456 Resources in a shared consortium environment fall into one of two categories managed centrally or managed locally Resources that ar
10. Ac 8750 7730 Productio 2004 Updster ar Academic questions 0895 4852 roduction 1987 6 m ag Updater py 6 Accent on living 0001 4508 Productio 1990 2001 Updater r Ag 1999 12 m age Updster Fy Ac 01 12 m age Updater pyr Ac Section D Biological crystallography 1399 004 Productio 2002 12 m aac Updste py GO Figure 16 e Package List The following data is displayed for each title m Title Identifier ISSN eISSN or ISBN eISBN e Product status Selection status Coverage The coverage data that is displayed in the e package list is taken from the local holdings if available and if not from the global coverage m Actions m Update m Add to basket m Link to resource via SFX The e package list can be sorted alphabetically by title or by identifier The blue arrow in the Title or Identifier header indicates the current sort option In addition the following options are available from this screen Jump to another alphabetical point in the list m Filter the list by an e product status m Filter the list by a selection status 43 Verde Staff User s Guide m Display all or only the local titles linked to the e package This option is available only if there are local records m Access the e product and its attribute records by clicking the underlined title in the first column m Global update available only for selective e package lists When you click the Update button to the
11. Applicable License A clause that specifies copyright the national copyright law law agreed to in the contract Cure period for License The cure period for an breach alleged material breach 309 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Type of Cure period for breach value Field Table 53 License Input File Fields Record Field Length Type License Description The time interval that measures the Cure Period for Breach The possible values are E Days E Weeks E Months These fields can be customized in the code table Mandatory Field Performance warranty Boolean License License A clause that guarantees a remedy to the licensee if the quantity or quality of material contained within the resource is materially diminished Indicates whether a clause that requires a satisfactory level of online availability and or response time is present Uptime guarantee License Uptime guarantee notes Maintenance window License The recurring period of time reserved by the product provider for technical maintenance activities during which online access may be unavailable Licensee termination rights 310 Boolean License The ability of the licensee to terminate an acquisition during a contract period Chapter 28 License Input Files Field Name Licensee termination condition Table 53 Licens
12. Approve update selection status to Approved Standalone Interface Constituent 79 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 6 e Product Selection Status Updates Action Is e IsThere Results Product an Acq Active Final Approval Package Updates all e constituents to update package aggregator Final Approval to Final Approval Package Updates all e constituents selective with a selection status Approved to Final Approval and selection statuses Evaluation and Review to Null Other selection statuses remain unchanged Package Approved selective Updates selection status to Final Approval If not yet active activate using the Subscription start date Rejected Assign an Activation to date using Subscription end date Evaluation and Review Null All others No update Package Approved selective Update selection status to Final Approval If not active activate using current date Rejected Assign an activation to date use current date All others No change 80 Chapter 8 Selection Workflows Action Activate make an e product active by assigning an e product status and an Activation from date Table 6 e Product Selection Status Updates Standalone Is e Product Active Is There an Acq Results Take the Activation from date from the Subscription start date of the active acquisition reco
13. Citation requirement details 205 Verde Staff User s Guide 206 Table 19 License Fields Internal Name digitalCopyCode Display Name Digital copy code digitalCopyTermNote Digital copy term note printCopy printCopy TermNote Print copy Print copy term note scholarySharing Scholarly sharing scholarySharingNote Scholarly sharing note distanceEducation Distance education or fax code distanceEducationTermNote Distance education term note intrLibPrintOrFaxCode Intr lib print intrLibSecureTransCode Intr lib secure trans code intrLibElectronicCode Intr lib electronic code intrLibKeepingRequiredCode intrLibTermNote Intr lib keeping required code Intr lib term note courseReservePrintCode Course reserve print code courseReserveElcORCashCode courseReserveTermNote Course reserve Electronic or cash code Course reserve term note electronicLinkCode Electronic link code electronicLinkTermNote coursePackPrintCode Electronic link term note Course pack print code coursePackElectronicCode Course pack electronic code coursePackTermNote Course pack term note remoteAccessCode Remote access code workinTermUseNote Work in term use note localUsePermission Local use permission perpetualAccessRights Perpetual Access rights perpetualAccessFrom Perpetual access from
14. Note The Summary tab is configurable For more information see Configuring the e Product Summary on page 436 Inheritance of e Product Attribute Records Active e products inherit attribute records from a higher level e product An e constituent inherits attribute recordss from the e package to which it belongs and an e package or e standalone inherits attribute records from the e interface to which it is linked The down arrow indicates that the attribute record is part of the e product s parent record If the e product is active the parent s attribute records are inherited If the e product is not active the attribute records are not inherited and are displayed for informational purposes only Summary e Product Acquisition eS License Access Admin En EE nr a FGG Trial Cost Usage Workflow Figure 27 Inheritance of e Product Attribute Records 55 Verde Staff User s Guide 56 Note It is possible to configure Verde so that parent attributes are not displayed for inactive e constituents To enable this feature contact your Implementation or Support representative The following e product attribute records can be inherited Admin records Access records Trial records Acquisition records Local acquisition record via the acquisition record License records and prevailing terms Cost and usage records are not inherited If an attribute record is inherited it is inherited in its
15. 239 50 use attributes F g Send to provider z IP address registration Le z Figure 57 Access Details General Access Information In the Data tab there are a number of URI fields that contain links These fields are m For the WWW access type Primary access URI Alternate URI Local Persistent URI m For the SRW SRU access type Base URL After you click the Submit button these fields became editable Click the Edit button to edit these fields WWW Data WWW Access Authorization Access status Active z Access information note F Primary access URI i exlibri wd Edit Primary access URI type URL Alternate URI http www google com Edit Alternate access URI type URL v Local persistent URI http www loc gov mar Edit Local persistent URI type URL X Persistent name Figure 58 Access Details Editing Links 121 Verde Staff User s Guide 122 List of Data Tab Fields The following table describes the fields in the access record s Data tab Access status Table 11 Data Tab Fields ACCESS STATUS Relevant Access Type Description Access status The possible values are Active Inactive and Test These fields can be customized by modifying the code table Access information note ACCESSINFO NOTE Additional information pertaining to access issues and unusual situations suc
16. Chapter 9 Acquisition Records Deleting Invoice Records To delete an invoice record click the Delete button in the invoice summary line of the acquisition record s Invoice tab You must have delete privileges to delete invoice records Invoice Tab Fields The following table describes the fields in the Invoice tab Invoice date Table 9 Invoice Tab Fields Description A mandatory field If no date is defined it is not be possible to submit update the record Invoice status Possible options are E Unpaid E Ready to be paid E Paid Payment date Vendor Invoice number Enables you to browse to the list of organizations A mandatory field If not defined it is not possible to submit the record Line number A mandatory field If not defined the default 0 is used ILS invoice ID The invoice ID number in the external ILS This field is used to match and upload by the Verde loaders Budgets Object code Object codes in the external ILS related to the budget From and to dates The period that is being invoiced Credit or debit amount Credit or debit amount List price Net amount Total amount 99 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 9 Invoice Tab Fields Description Currency VAT code VAT amount Number of units Note Note field Acquisition Workflows The acquisition workflow includes processes th
17. Display title Display title Update Frequency The current stated publication frequency of either an item or an update to an item Dates are included when the beginning date of the current frequency is not the same as the beginning date of publication Information on the type of report and the period covered by the report Coverage note Description 266 Coverage note Unformatted information that describes the scope and general contents of the materials This could be a summary abstract annotation review or only a phrase describing the material Chapter 26 e Standalone Input Files Table 49 e Standalone Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Description Mandatory Field Type Length Field Terms governing use and reproduction Usually the text of a legal or official statement of restrictions Textual information on the language of the described materials Continues Information concerning the immediate predecessor of the target item chronological relationship Continues By Information concerning the immediate successor to the target item chronological relationship 267 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name e Product status 268 Field Type of Record Type e Product Table 49 e Standalone Input File Fields Field Length Description The implementation status o
18. Leave this field blank when loading e constituents to an aggregator package Activation e Product The date from from date which the e product is active If this field contains a value the e Product status field must contain a value 251 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 43 e Constituent Input File Fields Field Length Mandatory Field Description Record Type Field Name Type of Field Expiration date e Product The date until which the e product is active If this field contains a value the e Product status and Activation from date fields must contain values Concurrent number of users Integer e Product Concurrent number of users for e constituent Sponsoring library e Product The library name of the library responsible for the e product Library contact e Product The library contact name of the contact in the library responsible for the e product Public note Internal note e Product e Product A note displayed in external applications such as the OPAC A Z lists and SFX Currently not functional A note displayed to Verde staff only SFX ID 252 e Product Pointer to a matching record in SFX For records that are part of the Global Knowledge Base this value is set and cannot be updated manually Chapter 25 e Constituent Input Files Field Name MetaLib ID
19. The Trial Records List displays the following information for each record E whether the record is the parent record l or the inherited record if the record is currently active the date on which the trial starts the date on which the trial ends the trial status the decision regarding the e product that is on trial a button in the Actions column that enables you to edit the record if you have editing privileges and the record is not inherited Trial Records List New Trial Start date y End date Status Decision Actions 01 Dec 2006 31 Dec 2006 Approved Purchase zw Figure 68 Trial Records List Trial Details 144 The trial record contains two tabs Details Contains data related to the trial Chapter 13 Trial Records m Participants Enables you to add the trial participants Note that trial participants cannot be added until the trial record is submitted and saved on the server Letans Participants Back to list Start date End date Status Status note Action Date Advance notification period 3 m a i b Days z a Cost Cost Note i le Decision date LE Purchase decision z Lt Purchase decision note a Figure 69 Trial Details List of Details Tab Fields The following table describes the fields in the trial record s Details tab Field Name Start date Table 13 Details T
20. The possible values are E URL E URI E Undetermined These fields can be customized in the code table Alternate URI Alternate URI Alternate access URI type The possible values are E URL E URI E Undetermined These fields can be customized in the code table Local persistent URI Local persistent URI Local persistent URI type 354 The possible values are E URL URI E Undetermined These fields can be customized in the code table Chapter 32 Access and Access Authorization Input Files Field Name Persistent name Z39 50 address mandatory field for Z39 access type Type of Ae Text Table 69 Access Input File Fields Field Length 50 Description Persistent name Z39 50 address Related Access Type Www Z39 50 port mandatory field for Z39 access type Integer Z39 50 port Z39 50 version supported Z39 50 use attributes Z39 50 version supported Z39 50 use attributes Z39 50 information from vendor Z39 50 information from vendor Z39 50 database name long Z39 50 database name short Z39 50 database name long Z39 50 database name short Z39 50 note Z39 50 note XML Base URL XML port mandatory field for XML access type Integer XML Base URL Link to DTD Link to DTD XML SRW SRU XML SRW SRU 355 Verde S
21. To create a new profile 1 Inthe Profiles List click Add The following screen is displayed Verde Tasks KB Manager KB Tools Admin Verde Edit profile details Profile name Profile description Availabe for Instances Current Instance Other Instances C NSTI univers Ry Figure 138 Profiile Details 2 Inthe Edit Profile Details section of the Profiles tab enter the name you want to assign the profile required field and a description of the profile that defines its function 3 Under Available for Instances m If you are working in a single instance environment select Current instance the default option m If you are working in a multi instance environment and want to make the profile you are creating available to other instances select Other 428 Chapter 42 The Profiles Tab instances The screen expands enabling you to select All instances or specific instances from the List of instances drop down list _ Verde Coe Privileges Edit profile details Profile name l Profile privileges Profile description Availabe for Instances Current Instance Other Instances All Instances Select Instance s G from the list List of Instances z NST1 university TST univer Mandatory field Figure 139 Profile Details for Multi Instance Installations 4 Click the Privileges tab and select the KB Manager for details see KB
22. 484 m The asymmetrical model In this model each local Verde instance has a corresponding SFX instance but there is no corresponding SFX instance for the Verde central instance The following diagram represents the asymmetrical consortium model Verde Local Instance 3 Kel 9 Figure 181 Asymmetrical Consortium Model In the above model the synchronization process includes e product analysis within both an individual Verde instance and the Verde central instance Results of the analysis are transferred from the Verde local instance to the SFX local instance with which the Verde local instance is associated In the asymmetrical model there are two possible levels of communication between the central and member instances m The central instance is connected to an entire member instance For this type of communication you define only one library in the central instance for each local instance You do not define any related institutes For details on defining libraries for this type of communication see Configuring Institutes on page 444 To enable the central instance to manage an e product for this member instance you select the library that represents this instance in e Product gt Libraries m The central instance is connected to specific institutes within a member instance For this type of communication a library can be defined in the central instance for each local institute to which the center is connected The Rela
23. s Guide 54 Section License Table 3 Summary Tab Fields View license settings Comments Link to license Link is available for users with view license permissions Licensor Licensee Start and end dates License start and end dates License status Renewal date Renewal type Link to attachment Link to license attachment Link is available for users with view license permissions Public note General terms note License public note License general terms note User restriction note License user restriction note Use restriction note ILL print of fax License use restriction note Perpetual rights Acquisitions Acquisition status Purchase order number Vendor Print cancellation restriction Latest invoice status Hardware requirements public Software requirements public View admin settings Link to admin record Link is available for users with view admin permission Chapter 6 e Product Attribute Records Table 3 Summary Tab Section Fields Comments Start date End date Status Decision date Purchase decision Workflow Title Title of active workflow The title is linkable and opens task list of workflow The Summary tab in a shared environment displays merged data from central and local instances For more information see the e Product Summary Tab on page 470
24. s library record Note that if the instance abbreviation field is blank the system will take the first five characters of the instance name KB Manager B Too ad ss Verde TST administra Test Libra Managing Libraries z New Test Library Back to list Contacts IPs lists Proxy server Library code TST SFX Instance code jl 3 Library name Test Library Library role Alternate name 1 California Digital library Instance Alternate name 2 Role note Role note Alternate name 3 5 a eet Subscription advance Street ul notification days cyi full time employees State Province County Figure 154 Instance Abbreviation Chapter 45 Setting Up a Shared Consortium Environment Working with Users A user s home instance is the instance in which the user was created and in which the user is displayed When a user logs in to Verde the user s home instance is displayed by default In addition a user is displayed only in its home instance so that only administrators in the user s home instance can edit and assign privileges and profiles to the user Privileges in the user s home instance can be assigned either via profiles which are sets of privileges or directly using the Privilege tab Privileges for all other instances can be assigned using profiles only Use the Add Profile function on the user record to assign profiles to a user Note the filter by instance option Users in a consort
25. updatimeGuarantee Update time guarantee maintenaceWindow Maintenance window renewalTypeCode Renewal type nonRenewalNoticePeriod Non renewal notice period nonRenewalNoticeCode Non renewal notice code licenseeTerminationRights Licensee termination rights LicenseeTrmnConditionCode Licensee trmn condition code LicenseeNoticePeriodOf Irmn Licensee notice period of trmn LicenseeNoticePeriodOfIrmnCode Licensee notice period of Trmn code LicensorTerminationRights Licensor termination rights Report of IP Ranges by Licensor The default output parameters of the Report of IP Ranges by Licensor are listed in the table below Note The output file can be customized For details see Customized Report Outputs on page 371 Table 27 Report of IP Ranges by Licensor Internal Name Display Name InstanceCode Instance OrganizationCode Institute OrganizationName Institute Name Address License Code LicenseCode License Code LicenseName License Name Licensor Licensor 217 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 27 Report of IP Ranges by Licensor Internal Name LicAddress Display Name Licensor Address LicensorName Licensor Name IPRangeBegining IPRangeEnding IP Range Beginning IP Range Ending Excluding Excluding IPRangeType IP Address Type 218 EproductTitle e Product Title Tasks This section inc
26. 168 18 Library Management This section includes About Library Management on page 169 m Viewing the Library List on page 170 m Library Details on page 170 About Library Management Verde libraries represent different administrative units within the Verde installation enabling Verde to support various organizational structures including a consortium In single instances there are two levels of libraries m Instance The instance is the highest level Every Verde instance has its own view of the Verde database and is independent in terms of e product management m Institution A single instance can support one or more institutions All institutions within one instance share the e products and key attributes such as acquisition license trial access and admin records Local acquisition cost and usage records can be created at the institution level In addition it is possible to record resource access authorization information at the institution level that is whether or not the institution may access specific resources Verde Staff User s Guide Viewing the Library List 170 From the Managing drop down list select Libraries A list of libraries is displayed The library list is sorted alphabetically by library name To access a particular library within a long list of organizations use the Jump to option that appears above the list Managing ubranes 99999 eres Figure 80
27. 405 Verde Staff User s Guide Organization Details of the functional fields in each of these tables are listed in the following sections e Product Table 75 e Product Table Functional Fields Values Activity status Changing the activity status triggers the Availability task This task updates the availability status of the parallel SFX item For more information see Verde SFX Interoperability on page 476 e Product status B Null Assigning an e product status makes the e product active or inactive according to the e product status as E Implementation 2 well as the activation start and end dates Activation and deactivation typically occur after the evaluation E Trial process is run E Implementation 1 B Implementation 3 Presha Haei For information about e product E Withdrawn activation see Activation on page 77 For information about e product deactivation see Rejection on page 76 Activation and deactivation of e products triggers the synchronization process that updates the parallel SFX item For more information see Synchronizing e Product Updates with SFX on page 481 406 Chapter 39 The Code Tables Tab Operation Table 75 e Product Table Functional Fields Values E Summary E e Product E Acquisition E License E Access E Admin E Trial E Cost E Usage E Workflow E Sync History These are e product attribute labels For more information about e product
28. 423 Verde Staff User s Guide 424 To run the localization process 1 Inthe Admin module s Initial tab click Localization The following window is displayed E Yerde Popup Microsoft Internet Explorer Localization Run SFX localization File C Location on server Localization file Browse File C Location on server Selective e Packages type f FD Browse file Browse Into instance e mail Do you want to create acquisitions records Subscription end date Load locally created e products for Locally created work records Work records that are already part of the KnowledgeBase Both l Submit Cancel Figure 136 Localization 2 Under Run SFX Localization choose one of the following options for the file s you want to localize m Ifthe file is on your PC select File and browse to locate the file on your machine m Ifthe file is on the Verde server select Location on server and enter the path and name of the input file 3 Inthe E mail text box enter the e mail address es to which you want Verde to send a notification e mail when the localization process is complete Use semicolons to separate between the e mail addresses you enter 4 Select Do you want to create acquisition records if you want to create an acquisition record for every e package activated by the localization process The acquisition record is assigned a status of In Proc
29. E Permitted explicit E Permitted interpreted E Prohibited explicit E Prohibited interpreted E Silent These values can be customized in the code table Distance License Information that education term qualifies a permissions note statement on distance education 299 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Length Course reserve print 300 Field Type License Description The right to make print copies of the licensed materials and place them in a controlled circulation area of the library for reserve reading in conjunction with specific courses of instruction The possible values are E Null Field left blank E Not applicable E Permitted explicit E Permitted interpreted E Prohibited explicit E Prohibited interpreted E Silent These values can be customized in the code table Mandatory Field Chapter 28 License Input Files Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Length Course reserve electronic cached Field Type License Description The right to make electronic copies of the licensed materials and store them on a secure network The possible values are E Null Field left blank E Not applicable E Permitted explicit E Permitted interpreted E Prohibited explicit E Prohibited interpr
30. E Sent for additional processing The Status field is a mandatory field whose default is New The field plays a significant role in Verde workflows Once an acquisition has been assigned a status of Active Approved Renewed or Cancelled it cannot be deleted Assigning the status Review initiates the Review e Product workflow The status may be assigned manually or by the Subscriptions for Review task For more information see Renew Acquisitions and Review e Product Workflows on page 161 The Subscriptions for Review task handles acquisitions with the statuses Active and Renewed if Auto renewal is set to No in the acquisition record The Subscription Renewal task handles acquisitions with the statuses Active Renewed and Review if Auto renewal is set to Yes in the acquisition record Chapter 39 The Code Tables Tab Trial Table 79 Trial Table Functional Fields Values Trial decision E Null The Trial decision status field is a status mandatory field that causes an update to the e product s selection status as E Do not purchase follows E Deferred E Purchase E If the value of this field is Purchase the selection status of the e product is updated to Approved E If the value of this field is Do not purchase the selection status of the e product is updated to Rejected E If the value of this field is Deferred the selection status of the e product is not updated Trial participants ar
31. Locally Created Work Records When a work record is copied from one instance to another all of the non local fields are copied Local fields are stored in the MARCXML record in fields that begin with a 9 for example 901 902 and so forth Local fields display in the user interface with Local as part of the field name Updates to any of the non local fields in the work record will be passed along to all copies of the record However updates to local fields are not Chapter 46 Working in a Shared Consortium Environment Locally Created e Product Records When an e product record is copied from one instance to another only the global fields are copied Any update to a global field in the source record will be distributed to e product records in other instances Neither the data contained in the non global fields nor updates to non global fields will be distributed across instances The following is a list of the global fields e product type m e package type e product code work code link to work record up code link to higher level record either package or interface creation date created by jkey Note Global fields are not editable in instances other than the instance in which the record was created 457 Verde Staff User s Guide 458 Search Display and Navigation in a Shared Consortium Environment This section includes Search and Display in the Center on page 459 Search and Display in
32. Material type Discount on price Start date End date Subscription open date r ves C No Ignore ves C No Ignore C ves C no Ignore 4 1 Database Article Database an Figure 94 Reports Defining Acquisition Parameters The available fields are Include all local acquisitions Include all invoices Filters on active records An acquisition record is active if it has a status that is Active or Renewed and if the current date falls between the start and end dates New In Process 1 In Process 2 In Process 3 Approved Denied Sent for Additional Processing On Hold Acquisitions status Possible default values are 185 Verde Staff User s Guide E Active E Renewed E Cancelled Vendor Clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the field activates a pop up window with a list of organizations vendors with filter option by role Final price E consortial final price of the subscription This can be defined as equal to gt less than lt more than Consortial agreement yes no ignore If the acquisition record is Auto renewal yes no ignore The flag that controls renewal Print cancellation restriction yes no ignore Contractual restrictions on canceling subscriptions for print versions of journals contained in the package Pooled concurrent users Can be defined as equal to less than or more than Th
33. Resources that are managed centrally are activated in the center for one or more member instances Resources that are managed locally are activated acquired and licensed by the member instance in the member instance For more information see Working in a Shared Consortium Environment on page 453 E Managed for some Update target E ILS Indicates the system for update The current functionality is related to the S Metalai Verde SFX pene aed process If E Null the value of the Update target field is E SEX SFX the parallel SFX item is updated with the value of the Verde e product E SFX and MetaLib If the value of the Update target field is not SEX the information is not sent to SFX e Package type E Aggregator These are two types of packages Selective E Aggregator packages are inclusive All related e constituents are automatically included when an aggregator package is selected in Verde Acquisitions and licensing are always performed at the level of the package E Selective packages are those containing multiple e constituents The library can select either all the e resources in the package or individual e resources that are part of the package Work MARC sub fields and MARC tags can be updated in the Work table These fields are indexed and used in searches They are described in the following table 408 Chapter 39 The Code Tables Tab Tag Valve Table 76 Work Table Functiona
34. SUBSCRIBERBRANDINGAC TIVSTATUS Indicates whether branding has been activated Possible values are Yes No Chapter 12 Admin Records Field Name Subscriber branding note Table 12 Admin Tab Fields SUBSCRIBERBRANDINGNO TE Description Subscriber branding note Personalization services available PERSONALIZATION SERVICES Indicates whether alerting and other personalization features are available Possible values are Yes No Z39 50 supported Indicates the ability of the interface of the resource to support z39 50 Possible values are Yes No Hook to holdings HOOKTOHOLDINGS A link to library holdings is available Possible values are Yes No Holdings activated HOLDINGSACTIVATED The activation of a link to library holdings Possible values are Yes No Provider reference linking available Inbound linking indicator PROVIDERREFERENCE LINKING INBOUNDLINKING INDICATOR The availability of links to external content created by the provider of the resource Possible values are Yes No The availability of a link to internal stable locations within a product Possible values are Yes No Inbound linking activation status INBOUNDLINKING ACTIVATIONSTATUS The activation of a link to internal stable locations within a product Possible values are Yes No OpenURL compliant OPENURLCOMPLIANT The ability of the electronic product
35. Table 65 Admin Input File Fields Type of Field Description Additional information regarding usage statistics Mandatory Fields Usage statistics locally stored Hardware requirements internal Information about and or links to locally stored data Internal information about hardware requirements and restrictions Hardware requirements public Public information about hardware requirements and restrictions Software requirements internal Software requirements public Internal information about software requirements Public information about software requirements Maintenance window value The provider s regularly scheduled downtime window for this product The recurring period of time reserved by the product provider for technical maintenance activities during which online access may be unavailable Provider system status URI The URI at which the provider posts system status information Provider system status URI type The URI type used to post system status information The possible values are URN and URL 343 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Local performance monitoring note Table 65 Admin Input File Fields Type of Field Description Information concerning Web sites or programs that carry out local performance monitoring Mandatory Fields Incident log A log of downtime and probl
36. The first constituent is identified by e product code the second by workexpression code Both constituents belong to the same package The input file columns can be rearranged and non mandatory columns can be removed from the input file The text of the column s header cannot be modified All of the e constituent record s fields can be updated with the following exceptions The Global coverage and JKEY fields can never be updated in an e constituent record m The SFX ID and Free Subscription fields cannot be updated for an e product that is from the Central KB For new records when a field is left blank or a column is removed from the input file the field is saved in the database as an empty field or as a default value For records being updated the existing values are left unchanged including blank fields You can clear the value of a non mandatory field by entering lt NULL gt in the appropriate column in the input file If a mandatory field s value is cleared the record is not loaded and an error is returned Chapter 25 e Constituent Input Files m To remove a local coverage record you must enter the value lt NULL gt in all the coverage fields From year From month From day and so forth If you enter lt NULL gt in only some of the coverage fields the local coverage record will not be removed m An input file row can contain a single continuous coverage range that can include time intervals and or ra
37. Verde provides a number of different tools for acquisition record tracking and reporting You can search and retrieve e products by acquisition status online 100 Chapter 9 Acquisition Records You can also run a Verde report of e products and acquisition records by acquisitions status Renewing and Reviewing Acquisition Records Once the acquisition record is active there are a number of processes that support automatic renewal and or review The processes work off the Advance notice date of the acquisition record This date is produced by subtracting the auto renew period from the acquisition end date Auto Renew If an acquisition record is marked Auto Renew the Verde task Subscription renewal automatically renews the acquisition record When renewal occurs a new acquisition record is opened with the status Active and the existing acquisition record is marked Renewed All fields except for the start and end dates are copied from the acquisition record that was renewed New local acquisition records are created A report of acquisition records that have been renewed is provided by the Subscription renewal task Manual Renewal If an acquisition record is not marked Auto Renew the Verde task Subscriptions for review produces a report of all acquisition records that need to be reviewed before they can be renewed This task also updates the acquisition record and all e product records acquired using this acquisition record and
38. View scheduled tasks Allows viewing details of all the jobs that have been scheduled Editing a User Record You can edit existing user records To edit an existing user record 1 Inthe Users List click the user s login name Users Code tables Default Values Initial Profiles Configuration Users List Add Login Name INST3 administrator Full Name Instance Administrator Instance 3 Joe Instance 3 Judy Instance 3 054 7 6874 32 Figure 127 Users List 399 Verde Staff User s Guide The following screen is displayed a Verde Welcome TST ader Test In i Privileges Back to users list m User details Login name licensor Department Password COTTET Telephone 1 Full name Licensor Telephone 2 Email licensor exlibnisgroup com Related Library Music Library e Verde system CG no Cyes Created by TST administrator administrator User s profiles m p Add profiles Target Instance Profile Profile description Delete Test Instance Licensor permissions for license all reports related to license run licenses data loader x Guest Search basket view e Products view WorkExpressions Figure 128 User Details 2 Edit the user s properties as required For details see Creating a New User on page 388 3 Click Submit Your modifications are saved in the Verde database Deleting a User You can remove a user fr
39. Year Vol Issue Year Global embargo operator Coverage available from the vendor These fields cannot be updated Type of embargo from X months or up to X months This cannot be updated Global embargo Number of months that are embargoed This cannot be updated Local holdings from Year Vol Issue Local holdings to Year Vol Issue Coverage available locally These three fields are repeated three times Coverage available locally These three fields are repeated three times Holdings note Local embargo Type of embargo from X months or up to X months Local embargo type Number of months that are embargoed locally ILS holdings ID Pointer to holdings record in ILS Interoperability 70 MetaLib ID Pointer to matching record in MetaLib SFX ID Pointer to matching record in SFX Chapter 7 e Product Records Table 5 List of e Product Fields Field Name Update target Description Should update information to be sent to E SFX E MetaLib E ILS Free Is the resource available free of charge Additional ID number Pointer to record in alternate system ID source ID of alternate system JKEY Used for linking This is a global field that cannot be changed Title key Cross ref enabled Locally defined abbreviated title that can be added to the URL for direct linking The check box can be select
40. attributes see the following sections E e Product Summary Tab on page 51 E Acquisition Records on page 85 E License Records on page 103 B Access Records on page 119 E Admin Records on page 129 E Trial Records on page 143 E Cost Records on page 151 E Usage Records on page 155 E Workflows on page 159 E Monitoring Synchronization History on page 499 Selection status E Null E Approved E Evaluation E Final Approval E Rejected E Withdrawn by publisher E Review The selection statuses are used in Verde workflows pertaining to e product records For more information about selection workflows see Selection Workflows on page 73 For more information about the Verde workflow engine see About Verde Workflows on page 159 Selection processes involve online and batch updates as well as Verde reports The processes rely on relationships between e product records as well as between e product and acquisition records The selection process is closely related to acquisition workflows For more information about acquisition workflows see Acquisition Workflows on page 100 407 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 75 e Product Table Functional Fields Values E Managed for all The tier level is relevant only if you are working in a shared consortium environment Resources in a shared E Managed locally consortium environment fall into one of two categories managed centrally or managed locally
41. each Verde instance level library must contain the corresponding SFX instance code In addition a Verde library record must be created for each institute that exists in the corresponding SFX instance The library record must contain the SFX institute code Both SFX and Verde must also have the same KnowlegeBase level To verify your Verde KnowlegeBase level click the Verde logo in the KB Manager module For details see Verde Modules on page 18 Note that this verification is performed automatically by the synchronization process Updates that Require Synchronization The following updates to an e package e standalone or e constituent require synchronization Adding a new e package or e constituent record to the Verde KnowledgeBase A change in activity status including m Setting the activation date when purchasing a new e package or e standalone If the activation date is in the future the synchronization is required on the activation date m Canceling an e package or e standalone subscription If the deactivation date is the current date the synchronization is required immediately If the deactivation date is in the future the synchronization is required on the deactivation date m Changing the activation from date or expiration date of an e package e standalone or e constituent in such a way that it affects the activity status of the e product m Changing the list of active e constituents of an e package A change to th
42. from this licensor Is this the first product from a Acquisitions epi EE Selector iv Tae The Journal of the Siam Society Decide if there are sufficient Selector v Beds ons The Journal of the Siam Society co s Renewal Workflow Start the workflow for wy Acquisitions Eeen reviewing e products Renewal Workflow Review the e product Selector v Review e Product 06 Jun JSTOR Mathematics and Statistics d Workflow 2006 Link the e product to the 3 PT gt 29 May z Lith tieren tothe Access Administrator License Workflow 22 May netLibrary Figure 122 Verde Tasks Admin Tab The task summary screen displays the following information m Task name m Role m Owner This is a pull down menu option that lists all the users defined in the instance that have appropriate roles for performing the task and are therefore potential owners of tasks The administrator can assign the task to one of these users by selecting the user s user name Workflow Start date End date e Product The Admin user can assign tasks to a user Part 5 Admin Module Part 5 contains the following Section 37 Section 38 Section 39 Section 40 Section 41 Section 42 Section 43 Introducing the Admin Module on page 385 The Users Tab on page 387 The Code Tables Tab on page 403 The Default Values Tab on page 417 The Initial Tab on page 419 The Profiles Tab on page 427 The Configuration Tab on page 433 Verde Staff User s Guide
43. interface Displays the full e product lt Interface name gt Displays the full e product interface Indicates that the e product is an e standalone Displays the full e product Indicates that the e product is an e print Displays the full e product Displays a list of the e constituents that belong to the selective e package For details on this list see e Package List on page 43 Displays a list of the e constituents that belong to the aggregator e package For details on this list see e Package List on page 43 Display a list of e packages and or e standalones that belong to the e interface For details on this list see e Interface List on page 41 Indicates that the e product is active in the local KnowledgeBase Search results are sorted alphabetically by the title of the work record If a work record has more than one linked e product record these records are sub sorted alphabetically by e package and e interface name 31 Verde Staff User s Guide If the e products associated with a single work record do not fit on the screen next appears in the last line of the search result table Capitalism nature socialism New Capitalism nature socialism New 2001 O inaentacon Aw 1998 Evaluation Ar 1998 Aw 1998 Oi Pro Production Approved wO v 15 2004 Oi sw r next hd Ex Libris Figure 8 Search Results Browse to Next Page U
44. libraries or coverage of an e package e standalone or e constituent that is managed in both SFX and Verde When you update an e constituent you synchronize the entire e package to which the e constituent belongs SFX synchronization eliminates the need to perform the same updates in SFX that you already performed in Verde Verde enables you to synchronize updates individually as well as in batches You can synchronize an individual update as you make the update or at a later time You can perform batch synchronization at any time and you can schedule batch synchronization to be carried out daily A Verde SFX synchronization task includes processing by Verde waiting for acknowledgement from SFX processing by SFX and receiving notification from SFX that the synchronization is processed Verde provides an easy to Verde Staff User s Guide 482 view history of synchronization events that shows you the status of each event The synchronization report shows you what if any update occurred what setup still needs to be performed and if any errors occurred Verde enables you to see which e products currently require SFX synchronization so that you can decide whether to perform individual synchronizations on selected e products perform batch synchronization or wait for the next scheduled batch synchronization Note Verde and SFX both require appropriate configurations for Verde SFX synchronization For the synchronization to work
45. lt NULL gt in the appropriate column in the input file If a mandatory field s value is cleared the record is not loaded and an error is returned Chapter 29 Library Library Contact and Library IP Input Files Library Input File Fields The following table describes the input file fields for the library loader Field Name Library code Table 57 Library Input File Fields Type of Field Description The library code If this field is blank the record will be rejected and an error will appear in the loader s log file Mandatory Fields Library name Text 100 The display name of the Yes library Alternate Text 100 An alternate name used namel for the library The library can have up to three different alternate names Alternate Text 100 An alternate name used name2 for the library Alternate Text 100 An alternate name used name 3 for the library Default library Boolean 1 Indicates whether by access default resources are active or inactive for this library The default values are 0 or 1 where E O Exclude E 1 Include If left blank the default Include value is saved Instance VarChar 10 The instance s abbreviation abbreviated title 317 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Guest member Table 57 Library Input File Fields Type of Field Field Description Length Boolean Relevant only for consortia Indicates whether the library s resources
46. record must be associated with a single e product which is identified by the value in the ID field The input file contains columns for the fields in the Verde database and rows for each record being loaded The acquisition input file s columns are described in Table 50 Acquisition Input File Rules Before loading your input file ensure that the first column in the acquisition input file contains the ID or title that associates the record with the appropriate e product Note The acquisition input file columns cannot be removed from the file or rearranged although fields can be left blank Verde Staff User s Guide Acquisition Input File Fields The following table describes the fields of the acquisition loader s input file Table 50 Acquisition Input File Fields Field Name Type of Field Field Length Description The ID field is used to link the Acquisition to its e product This must always be the first column in the input file Note When the input file is loaded the loader searches for the associated e product If more than one active e product is found the acquisition record is not loaded and an error is returned There can be more than one associated e product but only one which is active The ID can be any of the following E Verde product code E SFX ID of the e product matches portfolio or target SFX internal ID B Title of work The title of the work Note If you choose to use an SFX
47. rejected and an error will appear in the loader s log file The organization contact s name Mandatory Fields Job title The organization contact s job title Email Phone No The organization contact s e mail address The organization contact s phone number Alternate phone No The organization contact s secondary phone number Fax No The organization contact s fax number Street The name of the street in the organization contact s address City The city in the organization contact s address State Province 332 The province in the organization contact s address Chapter 30 Organization and Organization Contact Input Files Field Name Country Table 63 Organization Contact Input File Fields Type of Field Field Length Description The country in the organization contact s address Mandatory Fields Postal code Main contact Boolean The zip code in the organization contact s address The organization s main contact There are two possible values 1 Yes or 0 No If this field is left blank the default value 0 is saved Note that only one contact per organization can be defined as the main contact 333 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Contact role Table 63 Organization Contact Input File Fields Type of Field Field Length Descript
48. 06 Mar 2006 Figure 24 e Constituent Brief Summary In an e standalone brief summary you see information from the e standalone and its interface Managing e Products z New Search New Work W View Basket Quick Add El 8 High country news G High country news wy X7 Local Holdings embargo v 25 1 1993 ISSN 0191 5657 Figure 25 e Standalone Brief Summary e Package brief summaries include details about the package and its interface e Interface and e print records contain details of the single record The following fields are displayed in the brief summary of an e product record They are displayed only if they are populated E e Product status Selection status Active from date Active to date Holdings either local or global ISSN Format Availability Package type Acquisition status License status Chapter 6 e Product Attribute Records m Interface provider The brief summary area offers the following functions m Edit work record Click the Open Work button to view edit the e product s work record m Add to basket e Product Summary Tab The e product Summary tab is available for all e product types This tab is a useful display for non expert users It collects information from all of the relevant e product and e product attribute records The information is divided into the following sections e product and work information e product information libraries acquisitions a
49. 2 Click Go The synchronization history screen now displays only those synchronization tasks whose status is Done SFX setup required 501 Verde Staff User s Guide 3 Inthe Action column click the Task Log button gt The log for the task appears in a pop up window SFX Sync Report Microsoft Internet Explorer 218 xi Report of New records Summary Target Services updated none Object Portfolios updated 1 of 2 Errors none Target Service Change Public Name Metapress Canadian Journal of Neurological Sciences Internal Name METAPRESS_CANADIAN_JOURNAL_NEUROLOGICAL_ Service Type getFullTxt Target Type Selective No target service changes Object Portfolio Changes Main Title canadian title ISSN ISBN SFX Object Portfolio ID 1000000000680268 SFX Object ID 1000000000289325 Institute Value From To VERDE22 AVAILABILITY ACTIVE INACTIVE DEFAULT AVAILABILITY INACTIVE ACTIVE VERDE21 AVAILABILITY ACTIVE INACTIVE VERDE23 AVAILABILITY ACTIVE INACTIVE Close Bistart B7 internet w 4 microsoft O 6 microsoft E Econstituent I g ibverdeo2 de Cp 2022 sexint MOS 2 6 MBDO amp 1513 Figure 189 Synchronization Task Log 4 Click the Public Name link to navigate to SFX The SFX login screen appears SFX Admin userName Password Submit Figure 190 SFX Login Screen 5 Enter your user name and password 6 Click Submit You are
50. 50 database name short Z39_Z39DB SHORTNAME Short database name necessary to enable Z39 50 access Z39 50 note Z39 NOTE Additional information about Z39 5 access Base URL XML BASE URL Base URL 125 Verde Staff User s Guide 126 Table 11 Data Tab Fields Code Relevant Description Access Type XML_PORT XML XML port Link to DTD XML_SRW_ XML SRW Link to DTD LINKTODTD SRU DTD note XML_SRW_ XML SRW DTD note DTDNOTE SRU URL to XML XML_SRW_ XML SRW URL to XML information from information URLINFO SRU vendor from vendor XML gateway XML_NOTE XML XML gateway note note SRW SRU SRW_SRWSRU SRW SRU There are two possible values SRW and SRU Base URL SRW_BASE SRW SRU Base URL URL SRW SRU SRW_PORT SRW SRU SRW SRU port port SRW SRU SRW_ SRW SRU SRW SRU version supported version VERSION supported SUPPORTED SRW SRU SRW_ SRW SRU SRW SRU attributes attributes ATTRIBUTES SRW SRU SRW SRU Additional information about note SRW SRU access Access Authorization The Access Authorization tab allows the library to record information about the sub units to which the e resource has access If a sub unit s check box is selected the e resource is available for the sub unit The access authorization record lists the valid institutes for the instance When you select an institute an Edit button E is displayed for
51. About Verde Loaders sanar 231 L ader Vy i EOS os csssscasdiccedct sisevagevansnteanestntase setaqtoscaga desonpaenssteaomemeansas 234 Creating Input PUGS neerstorten nintendo ien 235 Loading Input Files to Verde cssscssacsacseocsncsoucenevesassorsossannsadierasnveuniosense 236 Defining Input File and Load Output Settings eee 238 Chapter 25 e Constituent Input Files neseerencorsnensenenvenesenneneoreneeessenvereeene 243 About e Constituent Input Files 243 e Constituent Input File RulSs ssd 243 e Constituent Input File Fields mennen deeeeeniden 246 e Constituent Loader WorkfloW ssesessesesesesessrrereserrrerrrerererrersreeee 255 Chapter 26 e Standalone Input FileS seesesessoeorosesessososeseseorosesosesrososososessosososesesee 257 About e Standalone Input Files sunssingensteeveteetnnsendedrs 257 e Standalone Input File Rules siemens 258 e Standalone Input File Beld azen thea 261 e Standalone Loader WorkfloW s ssssesssessssesesesesrrrsesrrrreereerererreesrseee 274 Verde Staff User s Guide Chapter 27 Chapter 28 Chapter 29 Chapter 30 Chapter 31 Acquisition Input Files seseseseoseseseseosesesesesresesesessososeseseosososesereeeososesee 275 About Acquisition Input Files cicecsiscscistiotoraliamsncictareastancensacattaateaaudscint 275 Acquisition Input File Rules x wms nen 275 Acquisition Input File PICS iistscsssasespondsessnevencesadshovanessovsniveosserecnssien 276 Acquisition Loader W
52. Admin The admin loader enables you to load new admin records to the Verde database When loading admin records each record must be associated with a single e product Therefore before loading admin records ensure that the e product associated with the admin record exists in the Verde database An additional loader is used to load the local admin data for each admin record Since local admin data is associated with a single admin record Chapter 24 Overview of Loaders ensure that this admin record exists in the Verde database before you create the local admin record Access The access loader enables you to create and update access records in the Verde database When loading access records each record must be associated with a single e product and with a specific access type Therefore before loading an access record ensure that the e product associated with the record exists in the Verde database An additional loader is used to load the access authorization data for each access record Since access authorization data is associated with a single access record ensure that this access record exists in the Verde database before you create the access authorization record Verde also supports the ALEPH Vendor Converter which enables Verde users who manage vendors in ALEPH to convert vendor and vendor contact data to Verde standard organization and organization contact files These files can then be loaded to the Verde database
53. Approved v 7 1 2001 Animal biology 1570 7563 Approved v 53 1 2003 Figure 168 Display Local Package List If the Display All option is selected the e constituent is shown Jump to Go 1 15 of 105 records Filter by e Product status All z Filter by Selection status All z Display Local 5 ie e Product Selection Title Y Identifier ene SES Coverage Advanced composite materials 1568 5519 Approved v 9 1 2000 Advanced powder technology Approved v 11 1 2000 Advanced robotics 14 1 2000 African and Asian studies Amphibia reptilia 1568 538 Figure 169 Display All Package List If the e constituent is localized in INST3 for example activated it is shown when the Display Local option is selected 465 Verde Staff User s Guide Navigation To view an e product or work record click or right click the appropriate button or e product name from the result screen Clicking a button or e product name opens the record in the active instance Right clicking the button or e product name displays a list of instances in which the e product exists If the e product is active in the instance the green active icon will display next to the instance abbreviation in the list To navigate to the e product in a different instance right click the instance abbreviation The e product opens in edit or read only mode according to the user s privileges for the instance All instance
54. Control number A unique number assigned toa MARC record by the Library of Congress Chapter 26 e Standalone Input Files Table 49 e Standalone Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Description Mandatory Field Type Length Field The CODEN designation for a bibliographic title The CODEN is assigned by the International CODEN Section of Chemical Abstracts Service Author name A personal name used as a main entry in a bibliographic record Author sub unit Numeration A Roman numeral or a Roman numeral and a subsequent part of a forename Author number of part Number of part section of a work Author name of part Corporate author name Name of part section of a work A corporate name used as a main entry in a bibliographic record Corporate author Numerator Corporate author number of part Number of part section meeting A number designation for a meeting entered under a corporate name or for a part or section of a work used with a title in a name title field 265 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Corporate author name of part Table 49 e Standalone Input File Fields Field Length Type of Field Record Type Description Name of part section of a work A name designation of a part or section of a work used with a title in a name title field Mandatory Field
55. ID as the unique identifier for each record and you want to edit the file in Excel format the ID column as text If the ID column is in general or number format Excel does not store any digits past the 15th digit and the data is lost acquisitionStatus The status of the acquisition record acquisitionStatusDate The date on which the acquisition status was assigned orderDate The date on which the acquisition was ordered vendorCode budgets 276 The vendor code The name of the budget or fund that is paying for the subscription Chapter 27 Acquisition Input Files Field Name subscriptionNotification Table 50 Acquisition Input File Fields Integer Description The number of days before the acquisition end date that an alert should be sent to acquisition staff to review the acquisition record autorenewal Boolean Indicates whether renewal is automatic or explicit Possible values are 1 Yes and 0 No advanceNoticeDate Calculated by the system based on the advance notification period and the acquisition end date renewCancDate The date on which the subscription expires if it is not renewed renew CancDecisionNote renew CancNotelLS The reason for canceling or renewing the subscription Additional information for ILS about renewing or canceling the subscription renewCancNoteVendor Additional information for the vendor about ren
56. Information Indicator Definition The requirement that user data should not be shared with third parties reused or resold without permission CONTENTWARRENTY Content Warranty A clause that guarantees a remedy to the licensee if the quantity or quality of material contained within the resource is materially diminished COURSEPACKELECTRONICCODE Course Pack Electronic The right to use licensed materials in collections or compilations of materials assembled in an electronic format by faculty members for use by students in a class for purposes of instruction COURSEPACKPRINTCODE Course Pack Print The right to use licensed materials in collections or compilations of materials assembled in a print format by faculty members for use by students in a class for purposes of instruction COURSEPACKTERMNOTE Course Pack Term Note Information which qualifies a permissions statement on Course Packs COURSERESERVEELCORCASHCODE Course Reserve Electronic Cached Copy The right to make electronic copies of the licensed materials and store them on a secure network 517 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 92 License Fields COURSERESERVEPRINTCODE Data Element Name Course Reserve Print Definition The right to make print copies of the licensed materials and place them in a controlled circulation area of the library for reserve reading in conjunction with specific c
57. LOT RIES sarci inaasa anana EEE G 455 Consortium Level sinisiin aAA AE A GAD 456 Propagating Locally Created Records csscissicsssssteissssdisossstntanssaserssaasive 456 Locally Created Work Records ssssssssesesssssesessssnsesrssessenrnsensnsesrsserneneeee 456 Locally Created e Product Records arne nnie 457 Search Display and Navigation in a Shared Consortium 459 Search and Display in the Center ntm 459 Display piinaa aa a aaa 460 Search and Display in Member Instances ensen eneen 461 Display vernederde das 462 Search Locally Created e Product Records eenen 464 EAA ON eenen eenheden sn teat racine 466 Merged VION nansineveneeniesede ne 469 e Product Brief Summary eeens dreke dee 469 e Product Summary Dabadie een 470 Viewing Merged Data in the e Package and e Interface Lists 471 Verde Staff User s Guide Part 7 Interoperability Chapter 49 Chapter 50 Introducing Verde Interoperability neven soonenenvenenverenenseneen 475 About Verde Interoperability mieteatennnenent 475 Verde SFX Interoperability coissaschappestvtbscaichigsecssaesazencssnsevacsoienbysuieonynniews 476 Synchronizing e Product Updates with SFX neen even venenven 481 Overview of Synchronization renee ahead 481 Updates that Require Synchronization asen 482 Synchronizing Updates in Consortlennm tusenin 483 EINE rset A ane tesa 484 Synchronization Rules lt ecisiaitids nsdsdinainssesadsinianishainsbinsamnsasinanmonaasasasith 485 SFX Tasks After
58. Library en on Library Contact rn ees Category EE Include Constituents Vv Figure 97 Report e Product by Selection Status Retrieval is based on the following parameters m Instances available in consortium environment only Only instances in which the user was granted permission to run the report are displayed in the report form m Selection status Values are Approved Evaluation Final Approval Rejected Review Withdrawn by publisher 190 Chapter 20 Reports m Selection status update start date The system retrieves e products whose selection status was updated starting from this date m Selection status update end date The system retrieves e products whose selection status was updated ending with this date m Vendor Clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the field activates a pop up window with a list of organizations vendors with filter option by role m Sponsoring library The library that sponsored the e product Clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the field activates a pop up window displaying a list of defined libraries with filter option by role m Library contact Note that clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the field activates a pop up window which displays a list of defined contacts with filter option by role m Category Include constituents Report on e Packages with Acquisitions This report retrieves e packages that have acquisition informat
59. Login Name Full Name Instance Telephone INST3 administrator Administrator Instance 3 02 555 333 666 Joe Joe Instance 3 03 657 958 22 Judy Judy Instance 3 054 7 6874 32 Figure 123 Users List The Users List displays the following information for each user m Login Name m Full Name m Instance m Telephone Verde Staff User s Guide Creating a New User When you create a new user you define the user s basic details the profile s to be associated with the user the user s role s and the user s privileges To create a new user 1 Inthe Users List click Add The following screen is displayed Admin ome TST ader Test In Verde Ls ee Privileges Back to users list m User details Login name licensor Department Password COTTET Telephone 1 Full name Licensor Telephone 2 Email heensor exlibnsgroup com Related Library Music Library see Verde system z piest ai lere eno yes Created by TST administrator User s profiles Add profiles Target Instance Profile Profile description Delete Test Instance Licensor permissions for license all reports related to license run licenses data loader x permission Guest Search basket view e Products view WorkExpressions Figure 124 User Details 2 Inthe User Details section of the Users tab complete the following fields Table 72 User Details Description Login name required The user name with which the user
60. Manager Module Privileges on page 392 and KB Tools for details see KB Tools Module Privileges on page 398 module permissions you want to assign to the profile you are creating 5 Click Submit The profile is created in the Verde database and you can view a summary of the profile permissions you defined in the Profiles tab under Profile Privileges s Ss Verde Welcome INST1 adrr NST1 uni Wi Ceerivileges Edit profile details Back to profiles list Profile name Access Profile privileges Search basket view Work view e Product Profile description All access permissions ate ae OEE N et View access Create edit access Delete access Availabe for Instances View access authorization Create edit access authorization Current Instance Other Instances C Delete access authorization View SFX U P NST1 university x Mandatory field Figure 140 Summary of Selected Permissions 429 Verde Staff User s Guide Editing a Profile Record You can edit existing profile records To edit an existing profile record 1 Inthe Profiles List click the name of the profile Manager KB Tools EDIT bengusges howe tele Verde Test Library J it L p AGA at Profiles List add Figure 141 Profiles List The following screen is displayed z Z Verde gt GLA Privileges Edit profite details Back to profiles list Profile name Access Profile priv
61. N Exlibris Verde Staff User s Guide Version 2 0 EN Exlibris The bridge to knowledge CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION The information herein is the property of Ex Libris Ltd or its affiliates and any misuse or abuse will result in economic loss DO NOT COPY UNLESS YOU HAVE BEEN GIVEN SPECIFIC WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM EX LIBRIS LTD This document is provided for limited and restricted purposes in accordance with a binding contract with Ex Libris Ltd or an affiliate The information herein includes trade secrets and is confidential DISCLAIMER The information in this document will be subject to periodic change and updating Please confirm that you have the most current documentation There are no warranties of any kind express or implied provided in this documentation other than those expressly agreed upon in the applicable Ex Libris contract This information is provided AS IS Unless otherwise agreed Ex Libris shall not be liable for any damages for use of this document including without limitation consequential punitive indirect or direct damages Any references in this document to third party material including third party Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of that third party material or those Web sites The third party materials are not part of the materials for this Ex Libris product and Ex Libris has no liability for such materials TRADEMARKS Ex Libris t
62. ODE Description Controls how the license is renewed Possible values are B Automatic E Explicit E Perpetual License URI LICENSEURI Link to electronic version of license License URI type LICENSEURI TYPE Link type Possible values are E URI E URN E URL Physical license location PHYSICAL LOCATION Note field Electronic file location FILELOCATION Pointer to file location Auto renewal cancellation period Add file NONRENEWALN OTICEPERIOD NONRENEWALN OTICECODE ATTACHMENTN AME The amount of advance notice required prior to license renewal if the licensee does not want to renew the subscription The time interval in which the Non renewal notice period is measured Default values are Days Weeks and Months Thes values can be customized using the code table Option to link to an electronic version of the license agreement License status STATUSCODE Status of the license License status note STATUSNOTE Note field 111 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Licensor Original licensor Table 10 Description Tab Fields LICENSOR ORIGINAL LICENSOR Description The organization granting the license Note To open the list of organizations click the Browse button Although you can select any organization from this list it is likely that you will want to select an organization with the role of Licensor To vie
63. Object portfolio Note Some but not all e standalones appear in both Verde and SFX As a general rule e standalones that are journals do belong in SFX while those that are databases do not Data from the e package e constituent and work records are sent to SFX Fields that do not appear in the table below are not being transferred automatically from Verde to SFX Note that in Verde bibliographic identifiers like ISSN eISSN ISBN and eISBN can be included in locally created work records as long as they do not duplicate existing identifiers When work data is transferred to SFX the identifiers are included Table 86 Entities in Verde and SFX Field Verde Entity Verde Field_SFX Entity SFX ISSN Work ISSN Object eISSN Work eISSN Object ISBN Work ISBN Object eISBN Work eISBN Object LCCN Work LCCN Object CODEN Work CODEN Object Main Title Work Title Object Type Work Object type Object Package Title Work Target name Target Target service Package type e package Status Target Interface Title Work Interface name Interface 490 Chapter 50 Synchronizing e Product Updates with SFX e Standalone Records e Standalone records in Verde can be journals that do not belong to a package or databases Standalones that are journals and are part of the KnowledgeBase are already in SFX and have an SFX ID these standalones are synchronized by the SFX Sync and do not need to be
64. Price Price OrderDate Order date SubscriptionStartDate Subscription start date Oo OLN WD OF A w N SubscriptionEndDate Subscription end date EproductTitle e Product title ji EproductIdentifier Identifier Trial Trial Participant Alerts The default output parameters for the Trial Participant Alerts task are listed in the table below Note The output file can be customized For details see Customized Report Outputs on page 371 Table 31 Trial Participant Alerts Internal Name Display Name EproductTitle e Product title Eproductldentifier e Product identifier StartDate Start date EndDate End date 5 AlertType Alert type 227 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 31 Trial Participant Alerts Internal Name Display Name TrialCode Trial code Name Trial participant name Trial Management Process The default output parameters for the Trial Management Process task are listed in the table below Note The output file can be customized For details see Customized Report Outputs on page 371 Table 32 Trial Management Process Internal Name Display Name EproductTitle e Product title Eproductldentifier Identifier StartDate Start date EndDate End date StatusCode Status DecisionDate Decision Due Date DecisionStatusCode Decision License License Renewal The default output para
65. Product Attribute Records You can link several attribute records to an e product enabling you to manage the e product In principle all attribute records can be linked to all e product types However note the following m e Print records can have only acquisition and cost records m e Interface e package e standalone and e constituent records can have acquisition license access admin cost usage and workflow records m Only e interface e package and e standalone records can have trial records Note All attribute record options are visible in the left menu even if some of the attribute record options are not relevant for the selected e product type The following attribute records are available Acquisitions local acquisitions and invoice records m License and prevailing terms records m Access records u Administrative records local admin statistics incidents breaches Verde Staff User s Guide Trial records Cost records Usage records Workflows The e product with its linked work record and attribute records is called the e product unit E Resources Management Verde Entity Relationship Model Figure 21 The e Product Unit To display a full e product record and its related attribute records click the e product button from the search results screen or the e product name from any other screen The e product screen that is displayed is divided into several areas On the left is a menu bar e
66. Sh Summary Adm Incidents Breaches t e Product Acquisition Admin Figure 63 Local Admin Incidents Tab In the Incidents tab you can view all incidents in which the e product did not performed as expected that were reported by the library to the e product supplier vendor Any number of incident records can be defined Once a record has been created the user can edit view update or delete the record New incident records can be created by clicking the New button in the Incidents tab Alternatively you can create a new incident record by copying and modifying another record Incident type Status and Organization are mandatory fields If you click the ellipsis to the right of the Organization field the List of Organizations window opens displaying a list of defined organizations that you can filter by role Jump to Role an z Go New o apr Consortial member rganization name Consortium oy INST1 Interface provider gt Licensee oF Institute 1 Art Licensing agent Or Institute 2 Music Licensor oF Institute 3 Phy INSTITUTES Institute 4 Sociology INSTITUTE4 oy testGuest testGuest 6p verde TST_i Figure 64 List of Organizations Chapter 12 Admin Records Note If an organization is missing from the List of Organizations window you can add the organization by clicking the New button entering the appropriate details in the Create New Organization pop up window
67. Synchronization zere deren 487 Synchronizing Locally Created e Products nennen 489 Adding New Records ananda iet ian 489 e Standalone Records viccecccccccecscccseessccseessscsecssscsecssssesesssecesssscesssseeessss 491 Assiomine the SPX ID aandeden 491 Performing Synchtonlza On mmm 491 Synchronizing per e Product aasde etend 492 Batch Synchronizing onser neren densa pai 494 Monitoring Synchronization History ns ccissaistsnsnscssinordassneisestvnesess 499 Using Synchronization History to Manage SFX Setup ROMPEN cinerea eres vernederde 501 Using Synchronization History to Handle Errors essees 503 Checking Which e Products Require Synchronization 504 Checking Which e Products Are Being Synchronized arn 505 Performing SFX Se annae dette 505 Part 8 Appendixes Appendix A Appendix B TRG voer snorrende deden a ei 509 Explanation of Fields nerede earned 511 Acguisition Fields sesin n r R RN 511 MMS Fil seer eenen a aa a Ea 515 Part 1 Introduction Part 1 contains the following m Section 1 Introducing Verde on page 17 Verde Staff User s Guide 1 Introducing Verde This section includes m The Verde KnowledgeBase Central Global and Local on page 17 m Verde Modules on page 18 m Additional Verde Features on page 20 Verde is an Electronic Resource Management system designed to facilitate a library s management of the information and workflows necessary to evaluate acquire and maintain e resou
68. Table 66 Local Admin Input File Rules Before loading your input file ensure that your input file follows these rules The input file includes mandatory columns When an input file does not contain mandatory columns it is not loaded to Verde and an error is logged in the summary The mandatory columns contain values When an input line does not contain a value for a mandatory field the input line is rejected and an error is logged in the output report The following fields are mandatory m Match m Library The input file columns can be rearranged and non mandatory columns can be removed from the input file The text of the column s header cannot be modified When a field is left blank or a column is removed from the input file the field is saved in the database as an empty field 345 Verde Staff User s Guide Local Admin Input File Fields The following table describes the input file fields for the local admin loader Table 66 Local Admin Input File Fields Field Name Type of Field Field Description Mandatory Length Fields Must be one of the following E Verde e product code E SFX ID of associated e product Note If you choose to use an SFX ID as the unique identifier for each record and you want to edit the file in Excel format the ID column as text If the ID column is in general or number format Excel does not store any digits past the 15th digit and the data is lost Library name
69. Type m Library m An access authorization record lists the valid libraries for the instance including related access authorization data for these libraries A library that 357 Verde Staff User s Guide is included in an input line is treated as active by the related access authorization record All other libraries that are not listed in the input line but exist in the instance are saved as inactive in the newly created access authorization record For example if there are 10 libraries in an instance in which a loading occurs two libraries 1 and 2 are included in the access authorization input file s Library field for e product X and access type Y In the access authorization record created via loading for e product X and access type Y libraries 1 and 2 will be active and the other libraries 3 10 will be inactive If each library has its own access authorization record you must create a separate input line for each library In this case the input file will contain lines with the same Match and Access type values but different Library values The input file columns can be rearranged and non mandatory columns can be removed from the input file The text of the column s header cannot be modified When a field is left blank or a column is removed from the input file the field is saved in the database as an empty field Access Authorization Input File Fields 358 The following table describes the input file fields
70. URI being used to locate the license agreement LICENSINGAGENT LICENSINGNOTE Licensing Agent Licensing Note An organization such as a subscription agent or an individual that facilitates a licensing transaction on behalf of one or more parties Additional information regarding the license the negotiation of the license the product and so on LICENSOR Licensor E One who grants a license to another E The party who formulates the terms and conditions of use for the product with whom the licensee purchaser is bound in contract by signing or otherwise assenting to a license agreement LICENSORNOTICEPERIODTRM 522 Licensor Notice Period for Termination The amount of advance notice required prior to contract termination by the licensor Appendix B Explanation of Fields Table 92 License Fields LICENSORNOTICEPERIODTRMCODE Data Element Name Licensor Notice Period for Termination Unit of Measure Definition The time interval in which the Licensor Notice Period for Termination is measured LICENSORTERMINATIONRIGHTS Licensor Termination Right Indicator The ability of a Licensor to terminate an acquisition during a contract period LICENSORTRMCONDITION Licensor Termination Condition The conditions that would allow a Licensor to terminate an acquisition during a contract period LINKEDLICENSENOTE Linking Note Additional informati
71. Verde Staff User s Guide E arange using the From column only 176 168 1 1 76 172 168 1 172 168 1 10 aT Arak oie errata IP ranges are sorted in ascending order A Note field can be added as in the following example Details Contacts mel am Proxy server Internal Add range Note From To Exclude Modified Delete Firewall restrictions must be a implemented 10 1 235 56 10 1 245 66 Yes C No 06 Sep 2007 x fiz 45 53 25 Yes C No 06 Sep 2007 x 22 25 46 89 90 Yes C No 06 Sep 2007 x IP for endor Add range_ From To Exclude Modified Delete fio 1 253 45 10 2 224 45 Yes C No 06 Sep 2007 x fio 2 235 54 69 Yes No 06 Sep 2007 x 51 54 55 4 Yes C No 06 Sep 2007 x Figure 85 IPs Lists Proxy Server Tab The Proxy Server tab includes fields related to proxy server definitions 174 Part 3 KB Tools Module Part 3 contains the following Section 19 Section 20 Section 21 Section 22 Section 23 Section 24 Section 25 Section 26 Section 27 Section 28 Section 29 page 315 Section 30 page 327 Section 31 Section 32 Section 33 Section 34 Section 35 Introducing the KB Tools Module on page 177 Reports on page 181 View Report Output on page 197 Tasks on page 219 View Task Output on page 225 Overview of Loaders on page 231 e Constituent Input Files on page 243 e Standalone Input Files on page 257 Acquisition Input Files on p
72. Verde indexes all workexpressions and e products that were updated locally 425 Verde Staff User s Guide 426 42 The Profiles Tab This section includes m About the Profiles Tab on page 427 Creating a New Profile on page 428 o m Editing a Profile Record on page 430 7 Deleting a Profile on page 431 About the Profiles Tab Profile definitions include specific granular authorizations or permissions as well as restrictions A staff user associated with a particular profile is able to activate only those functions allowed by this profile Note In a shared consortium users within any one of the local instances must have a guest profile for the central instance For more information see Setting Up Guest Profiles on page 449 The Profiles tab in the Admin module displays a list of predefined profiles Logon Mele Verde Test Library Users Code tables Default Values Intal Cee Configuration Profiles List Add Profile Profile descnption Target Instance Search basket All Instances Figure 137 Predefined Profiles List Verde Staff User s Guide The Profiles List displays the following information for each profile Profile m Profile Description m Target Instance Creating a New Profile When you create a new profile you must define the profile s details the instance s for which the profile is available and the privileges applicable to the profile
73. Workflow Figure 74 License and Acquisitions Workflows If you access the e product s License or Acquisitions tab a Workflow icon is displayed This icon indicates that there is a workflow linked to the e product record _ License Records List New License Link License sia Figure 75 Workflow Icon Displayed In the Workflow tab click the workflow you want to use Work through the defined tasks for the selected workflow For more information on these workflows refer to the Workflows Configuration Guide 160 Chapter 16 Workflows Renew Acquisitions and Review e Product Workflows The Renew Acquisitions workflow is initiated by the Subscription Renewal Verde acquisition task in the KB Tools module For more information on this task see Subscription Renewal on page 220 Select a tool Task z Di ooro E Acquisition endor aas gt Subscription Renewal P E Days before advance notice date 7 Subscriptions for Review Days after advance notice date Fr gt Trial Participant Alerts Update database Vv gt Trial Management Pr Figure 81 Renew Acquisitions Workflow When the Subscriptions for Review task runs acquisition records that are not defined as Automatic Renewal are assigned a status of Review This initiates the Review e Product workflow For more information on this task see Subscriptions for Review on page 221 161 Ver
74. You can modify this title or leave it as is Step 4 of 5 Select Interface Work Information Create new e Interface Select e Interface Title Green data Description A Figure 38 Add New Record Step 4 Select e Interface 5 InStep 5 select one of the following options m Exit Closes the wizard and takes you back to your original screen m Add another record Takes you back to Step 1 to add another record using the wizard m Edit the new e product Takes you to the edit screen for the e product Creating an e Product Set Manually If you want to create an e product set and do not want to use the Quick Add wizard you can create an e product set manually by following the steps below To create an e product set manually 1 Create an e interface 2 Create an e package or e standalone 65 Verde Staff User s Guide 66 3 Open the e product that you created in the previous step and click Belong to e Interface The Choose e Product window opens displaying a list of e interfaces 4 Inthe Jump to box enter the title of the e interface that was created in step 1 above 5 Select the e interface from the list and submit the e product The e product set is created with a hierarchical relationship Editing e Product Records To edit an e product record you must have write privileges for the instance as well as edit e product permissions This section describes how to edit e constituent r
75. admin module C yes C No Usage statistics ves C No License available available Access Session timeout C Yes C No Statistics standard Counter z compliance Admin Logout URI C ves C no Usage statistics x delivery method Trial Figure 101 Usage Statistics Available 193 Verde Staff User s Guide You can define the following parameters for this report m Instances available in consortium environment only Note that only instances in which the user was granted permission to run the report are displayed in the report form Sort by e product title m Report only active e products An e product is active if it has an e product status other than Withdrawn and when the current date is greater than the activation from date and less than the expiration date E e product type Include constituents Report of Active e Products without Licenses This report retrieves active e products without licenses An e product is active if it has an e product status other than Withdrawn and when the current date is greater than the activation from date and less than the expiration date Task properties INST2 Run on instances e Product type Trial Implementation 1 Sponsoring library Library contact on Activation from date Include constituents 7 e Product status Figure 102 Report of Active e Products Without Licenses You can define the following parameters for this report m In
76. agreement or terms of use residing on the provider s server that might otherwise function as a contract of adhesion Indemnification License A clause by which the by licensor licensor agrees to indemnify the licensee against a legal claim The possible values are E Null Field left blank E General E Intellectual property only E Other These values can be customized in the code table Indemnification Boolean License A clause by which the by licensor licensee agrees to indicator indemnify the licensor against a legal claim usually for a breach of agreement by the licensee 308 Chapter 28 License Input Files Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Description Mandatory Field Type Length Field Confidentiality License The presence or of agreement absence of clauses that specify or detail restrictions on the sharing of the terms of the license agreement The possible values are E Null Field left blank E All E All but user terms E Financial only E No These values can be customized in the code table Confidentiality License Specific details about what aspects of the license are private License A clause specifying the governing law to be used in the event of an alleged breach of the agreement Governing License The venue or jurisdiction jurisdiction to be used in the event of an alleged breach of the agreement
77. are managed by the center without the library having its own Verde instances Values are 0 or 1 where 0 is No and 1 is Yes The default is No Mandatory Fields Related instance Street VarChar Relevant only for consortia Maps the library to a certain Verde instance This is used only ina multi shared instance system The street name in the library s address City The city in which the library is located State Province Country The state or province in which the library is located The country in which the library is located Postal code The zip code in the library s address SFX institute code The institute code used to identify the library in SFX Role note Additional information regarding the library role Full time employees 318 Integer The number of full time employees on staff at the library Chapter 29 Library Library Contact and Library IP Input Files Field Name Faculty Table 57 Library Input File Fields Type of Field Integer Field Length Description The number of full time faculty members at the library Mandatory Fields Graduate students Undergraduate students Integer Integer The number of graduate students that belong to the library The number of undergraduate students that belong to the library Note Additional information about the library Proxy server
78. available To year e Product The year until which the electronic version is available To month To day e Product e Product The month until which the electronic version is available The day until which the electronic version is available Libraries names 254 e Product The names of the libraries for which the e product is active Enter the library code multiple library codes should have a comma between them A library is registered only if the library settings of the e constituent are different from its e package Update of a library s record will remove the existing library record For more information on inheritance see Inheritance of e Product Attribute Records on page 55 Chapter 25 e Constituent Input Files Table 43 e Constituent Input File Fields Field Name Type of Record Field Description Mandatory Field Type Length Field Embargo operator e Product The type of embargo E From X months E Up to X months This is relevant to e constituents and e standalones Embargo months Integer e Product The number of months that are embargoed locally Holdings note e Product A note regarding the holdings ILS holdings ID e Product Link to MARC record in ILS e Constituent Loader Workflow After Verde verifies that the e constituent input file is in the correct format and that each of the ro
79. basket button 7 After you have added the record to your basket the Added to basket button W is displayed 33 Verde Staff User s Guide 34 To view the items that you placed in your basket during the current session click the View Basket button The Basket Content window is displayed yx Ex Libris Yerde Microsoft Internet Explorer Basket Content e Product Selection Status Status Title e Package e Interface ACQID License ID Addressing the human capital crisis in the Federal Government a Books24x7 knowledge BusinessPro management perspective Anglo French Relations i eBrary eBrary eee ua Academic Acadmic Review Crisis Complete Complete Anglo French Relations Before World War II Appeasement and Crisis netLibrary netLibrary Figure 11 Basket Content You can do the following in this window Remove a record from the basket by clicking the Remove from Basket button 7 to the left of the record Remove all the records from the basket by clicking the Remove all items from the basket button W in the column heading Send an e mail related to all the items in your basket by clicking theSend e mail button at the top of the window 4 Work Records This section includes About Work Records on page 35 Adding New Work Records on page 36 o m Editing a Work Record on page 38 E Deleting Work Records on page 39 About Work Records A work record contai
80. be E license code Note If you choose to use an SFX ID as the unique identifier for each record and you want to edit the file in Excel format the ID column as text If the ID column is ina general or number format Excel does not store any digits past the 15th digit and the data is lost 283 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Type of Record Field Length Field Type License Description The type of license The possible values are E Regular E Trial E Supplemental E Prevailing These fields can be customized by modfying the code table If left blank a license of type Regular will be created Mandatory Field Yes For a new license License name License method License License The locally assigned name of the license agreement License method The possible values are E Click through E Manifest assent E Negotiated B Online B Shrinkwrap These fields can be customized in the code table If left blank the default value is saved Yes For a new license License start date License The start date of the license Yes For several license statuses License end date 284 License The end date of the license Yes For several license statuses Chapter 28 License Input Files Field Name Renewal date Type of Field Table 53 Licens
81. can be used for organization code a z A Z 1 10 _ underscore The organization code is unique across organizations and libraries within an instance Thus if organization A with organization code X exists in a certain instance another organization with organization code X or library with library code X cannot be created in this instance External code This field is displayed as read only for organizations that are vendors and have a different code in an external system that interacts with Verde All characters are legal in the external code field Organization name Active Yes or No You may choose whether you want to complete the other fields or leave them blank The following organization roles can be defined Consortial member Consortium Interface provider Licensing agent Licensor Vendor More than one role can be assigned If you leave this section blank the system assigns a default role of Vendor to the organization Contacts Tab Any number of contacts can be defined for each organization Each contact can have one or more roles Alternatively there can be one or more contacts with the same role The following organization roles are available Technical support Account manager Sales representative License contact Trial contact Chapter 17 Organization Management E Consortial contact E Other To add anew contact click the Add Contact button The contact name and e mail address are mandat
82. change the sequence number For example E 1 eproductIdentifier means that this field would appear first E 4 eproductIdentifier means that this field would appear fourth Note The default file contains a list of all possible fields You can remove and change the order of fields but you cannot add fields 373 Verde Staff User s Guide 374 Column Names In this section called Keys Headers in the properties file the names of columns are assigned Note the following E The number of columns should match the number of fields m The first word is the field name as it appears in section 1 The second phrase is the column name that appears in the report For example E eproductType e product type E localLicenseNegotiator Local license negotiator If a field does not appear the system uses the Verde default field name Header Parameters In this section you configure the contents and order of the report header Note that spaces and a return line break can be added between fields The report header appears as the first line in the CSV and PRN files and as the first section in the XML output If this section does not exist the default header file defaultHeaderFormat properties is used If this default header file does not exist there is no header in the report When defining the header options note that the number linked to each element defines its order in the header In the example below the report name appear
83. created For more information on work records see About Work Records on page 35 2 Click the New button that is displayed beside or above the work record A drop down list is displayed 3 Select the appropriate e product type from the drop down list Available types are e package e constituent e standalone e interface and e print The system creates a new e product record of the type selected The new e product record is automatically linked to the designated work record Note that the system allows you to create e product records only of the same e product type that was assigned to the work record Table 4 Work Record e Product Types Work Record e Product Type Allowable Verde e Products BOOK e constituent e standalone e print CITATION e constituent e standalone e print CONFERENCE e constituent e standalone e print DATABASE e constituent e standalone e print DISSERTATION e constituent e standalone e print DOCUMENT e constituent e standalone e print Verde Interface e interface JOURNAL e constituent e standalone e print Verde package e package PROCEEDINGS e constituent e standalone e print REPORT e constituent e standalone e print SERIES e constituent e standalone e print After the e product record is created enter the appropriate information in the General Information Interoperability and Libraries tabs and click Submit In the General Information tab ensure that
84. date DECISIONDATE The date on which the trial decision is made Purchase decision DECISIONSTATUS CODE The possible values are E Deferred E Do not purchase E Null E Purchase These fields can be customized by modifying the code table Purchase decision note DECISIONNOTE The notes about the purchase decision Trial note NOTE Notes about the trial Trial code Creation date TRIALCODE CREATEDDATE The trial code The date on which the trial was created Chapter 13 Trial Records Table 13 Details Tab Fields Field Name Description By CREATEDBY Verde user Contains the ID of the staff person who created the trial record Latest update UPDATEDATE The date on which the trial was updated By UPDATEDBY Verde user Contains the ID of the staff person who updated the trial record Creating a New Trial Record You can create new trial records for e packages e standalones and e interfaces only Note Only users with edit privileges can create new trial records To create a new trial record 1 2 3 4 5 Select an e package e standalone or e interface In the left menu select Trial In the Trial Records List click the New Trial button Complete the fields displayed in the Details tab Note the following m Ifyou select the status Requested there are no mandatory fields m Ifyou select the status Approved or Trial Over the follo
85. defined libraries with a filter by role option Jump to Role all co All Library name Code LU INST INST1 LD Institute 1 Art INSTITUTE1 Institute 2 Music INSTITUTE2 Institute 3 Physics INSTITUTES Institute 4 Sociology INSTITUTE4 LJ testGuest testGuest Verde me nl Figure 32 List of Libraries m Library contact Note that clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the field activates a pop up window which displays a list of defined contacts with a filter by role option List of Contacts Jump to Role an z Go r Account manager Setena Consortial contact R Jon Brice License contact Sales representative R Miss Brown Technical support gt Mss Noir Trial contact Figure 33 List of Contacts m Interface provider for e interface Interoperability This tab contains fields relating to SFX ID MetaLib ID Update target e Product code Additional IDs Creation date automatically generated by Verde 60 Chapter 7 e Product Records m Update date automatically generated by Verde Generalinformation WR Cait CHA ubranes SFX ID 100000000000125 er f enabled MS MetaLib ID Update target Ti Creation date Latest update Center B rr Latest update Local 18 Apr 200 e Product code CEP_1141646585663_24 Additional ID ID number ID source Submit Cancel Figure 34 Interoperability Libraries a amp a This tab is available for all types of e product reco
86. e product title of a new or updated e constituent e standalone m e Package Title E License loader m e Product Title the e product title of an e product associated with a new license m e Product Code the e product code of an e product associated with a new license m License Name the license name of a new or updated license m License Code the license code of a new or updated license m Acquisition loader m Sequence the number of lines in the acquisition input file m Match Field the match type in the acquisition input file e product code SFX ID or title E e Product Code m Acquisition Number 367 Verde Staff User s Guide 368 34 View KB Reports and View Scheduled Tasks This section includes m Viewing KB Reports on page 369 m Viewing Scheduled Tasks on page 370 Viewing KB Reports The Verde task Update the Local KnowledgeBase activated from the Admin module produces a number of reports that can be viewed in the KB Tools module erNew Ss gt workexpression gt e Interface gt e Package gt e Standalone gt e Constituent E Update gt workexpression gt e Interface gt e Package e Standalone gt e Constituent gt workexpression e Interface gt e Parkane z Figure 115 Viewing KB Manager Reports Verde Staff User s Guide Fifteen reports can be generated per
87. either approved and the acquisition records renewed or they are rejected and the acquisition records are cancelled For more information on renewing acquisition records see Acquisition Workflows on page 100 Both the acquisition and selection status Review can be assigned manually or automatically using the Verde task Subscriptions for Review The automatic process retrieves the e products of acquisition records that are not marked Auto renew and updates both the acquisition record and the e product that is being acquired by assigning them an acquisition status and selection status of Review During the review process e products are reviewed and approved or rejected For aggregator packages because the packages must be purchased in their entirety the review process is conducted on the level of the package and not its e constituents Thus when aggregator e packages are updated to Review their e constituents are updated as well Similarly the e constituents cannot be individually approved or rejected In contrast when selective packages are updated to Review their e constituents must be manually updated to Review using the Update buttons in the package list The approval rejection process for e constituents in selective packages must be performed in the same way To approve an e package e interface or e standalone assign a selection status of Final Approval To approve e constituents of selective packages assign a selection status of A
88. electronic titles covered by the license 93 Verde Staff User s Guide Section Subscription Table 7 Acquisitions Tab Fields Field Name Acquisition number ACQUISITION NUMBER Description Unique number assigned by the system The acquisition number can be shared by multiple acquisition records Purchase order number PURCHASE ORDERNO Pointer to an acquisition record in another system If the purchase order number is an ALEPH order number the ALEPH order can be displayed online Vendor subscription ID VENDOR SUBSCRIPTION CODE Unique ID provided by the vendor Material type MATERIALTYPE Available types are B Journal E A I database E Article database E Database E e Book Subscription type SUBSCRIPTION TYPE Available types are E Electronic E Print E Electronic amp Print E Electronic amp Print Surcharge E Print amp Electronic Surcharge The display names can be modified in the Admin module Subscription type note SUBSCRIPTION TYPENOTE Note field Note for ILS NOTEFORILS Note for ILS system Note for vendor NOTEFOR VENDOR Note to be included in correspondence with vendor Price and Payment 94 Final price PRICE Annual price of the subscription Chapter 9 Acquisition Records Section Field Name Method of acquisition ACQUISITION METHOD Table 7 Acquisitions Tab Fields
89. entirety There is no partial inheritance Attribute records are inherited only when the e product does not have an attribute record of its own For example m Ane constituent can have its own acquisition record If it does it is not subject to the related e package s acquisition record m Ifthe e constituent does not have an acquisition record it inherits the acquisition record from the e package e Packages and e constituents cannot inherit acquisition records from an e interface License and prevailing terms have a special rule Unlike other attribute records licenses and prevailing terms are always inherited The child always inherits the parent s license and prevailing terms unless the child has a license of its own If the child has a license of its own only the license is inherited and the child needs to create a prevailing terms record to reconcile the two licenses the explicit and the inherited In other words licenses and prevailing terms are cumulative For more information on prevailing terms see Prevailing Term Records on page 116 Chapter 6 e Product Attribute Records Copying and Pasting e Product Data Attribute record details from one e product can be copied to another e product Note This function is relevant for license access and admin records only Copying Attribute Record Details On the details screen of the record that you want to copy click the Copy button Summary Descripti
90. fields in the mandatory columns contain values When an input line does not contain all of the mandatory fields the input line is rejected and an error is logged in the output report m For new records the following fields are mandatory m Organization code m Organization name For example the following sample input file creates two new organization records Table 60 Two New Organization Records Organization Code Organization Name 111 Organization 1 222 Organization 2 m For updated records the Organization code is a mandatory field identifies the organization to be updated For example the following sample input file updates two previously created organizations with alternate names Table 61 Updating Organizations with Alternate Names Organization Code Organization Name First Second m The input file columns can be rearranged and columns can be removed from the input file The text of the column s header cannot be modified E For new records when a field is left blank or a column is removed from the input file the field is saved in the database as an empty field m For records being updated the existing values are left unchanged including blank fields You can clear the value of a non mandatory field by entering lt NULL gt in the appropriate column in the input file If a mandatory field s value is cleared the record is not loaded and an error is returned m An organization cod
91. from date Creation to date Figure 99 Report on Locally Created e Products You can define the following parameters for this report m Instances available in consortium environment only Note that only instances in which the user was granted permission to run the report are displayed in the report form Chapter 20 Reports m Sort by Options are E e Product title E Creation date Report only active e products An e product is active if it has an e product status that is not Withdrawn and if the current date is greater than the activation from date and smaller than the expiration date E e Product type e Interface e Package e Standalone e Constituent e Print m Creation to and from dates Report on e Product with Usage Statistics This report provides information on e products that contain usage statistics Task properties Run on instances rsitat Frankfurt a x Libris Universit Zl Sort by e Product title Cr Report only active e Products e Interface e Package e Standalone e Constituent gt Include constituents r e Product type Figure 100 Report on e Product with Usage Statistics These are e products in which Yes is selected in the admin record s Usage statistics available field Summary Configuration Local Admin statistics Incidents Breaches Back to list x 5 amp e Product Reenen Configuration Usage statistics Online
92. gt SFX Sync Report name Locally defined output Run JI Run Schedule Figure 182 Delivery Properties Dialog Box 4 From the File format drop down list select a file format for the task output report 5 Inthe E mail field enter any e mail address es to which a notification should be sent when the tasks ends The notification provides a link to the task output report To enter more than one address separate the addresses with semicolons 6 Optional From the Locally defined output drop down list select a custom format for the task output report 7 Inthe Report name field enter a name for the task output report 495 Verde Staff User s Guide 8 If you want to run the batch synchronization immediately a Click Run A Request was submitted successfully message appears b Click OK The batch synchronization is triggered immediately Note While a batch synchronization task runs users cannot simultaneously synchronize any single updates online 9 Ifyou want to run the batch synchronization on a schedule a Click Run Schedule The Scheduling properties dialog box opens below the Delivery Properties dialog box Scheduling properties Run Time Start hh mm Recurrence pattern G Daily C weekly C Monthly Range of recurrence Start date End date SOI I include weekends Figure 183 Scheduling Properties Dialog Box b Inthe Start field enter the time at which you want t
93. in non consortium installations The Holdings column the fourth from the left displays the instance abbreviations of instances that were included in the search and in which the e product has an e status or selection status The status displays next to the instance name in parentheses For e products that are active in the center the consortium level displays next to the instance abbreviation F for managed for all and P for managed for some Search and Display in Member Instances When searching in member instances you can filter searches by the following m active instance m member instances m include KnowledgeBase B managed locally By selecting the appropriate combination of fields you can retrieve the following m alle products that are available to managed for or managed by one or more member instances 461 Verde Staff User s Guide 462 m all e products that are managed by one or more member instances m all e products that are managed for or by an instance or part of the KnowledgeBase Note To enable the search and navigation functionality you must set your browser to allow pop ups To open the Search window right click the Find button If you do not right click Find the search will be performed using the same filters as the previous search If this is the first search in the current session it will be performed in an active instance only If you select the check box Include KB KnowledgeBase
94. information for creating a new library record is supplied in the input file When a library code is added or updated more than once in an input file the values specified in the last update are saved in the database 320 Chapter 29 Library Library Contact and Library IP Input Files Library Contact Input Files Verde s library contact loader loads the library contact input file This input file contains a list of library contact records for an existing library that need to be added to or updated in the Verde database The input file contains columns for the fields in the Verde database and rows for each record being loaded Since library contacts are associated with a specific library ensure that the library record exists in the Verde database before you load library contacts for the library The library contact input file s columns are described in Table 58 The library contact input file has the same rules as the library input file For a description of these rules see Library Input File Rules on page 315 Library Contact Input File Fields The following table describes the input file fields for the library contact loader Table 58 Library Contact Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Field Description Mandatory Field Length Fields Library code The code of the library in Verde with which the library contact record is associated If this field is blank the record will be rejected and an error will appear in the loa
95. is positive defined as 1 Yes or True Session timeout Boolean Indicates whether there is a configurable inactivity timeout Session timeout value Integer The inactivity timeout used for the resource You can insert the value only if the Session timeout value is positive defined as 1 Yes or True Logout URI Logout URI value Boolean Indicates whether a logout URI can be specified The logout URI used with the resource You can insert the value only if the Logout URI value is positive defined as 1 Yes or True User e Interface configuration Boolean Indicates the ability to control user interface features Subscriber branding available Boolean Indicates whether a branding feature is available Subscriber branding activated Boolean Indicates whether branding has been activated 339 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Subscriber branding note Table 65 Admin Input File Fields Type of Field Text Field Length Description Subscriber branding note Mandatory Fields Personalization services available Z39 50 supported Boolean Boolean Indicates whether alerting and other personalization features are available Indicates the ability of the resource s interface to support 239 50 Hook to holdings Boolean Indicates the availability of a link to library holdings Holdings activated P
96. is located The country in which the organization is located 329 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Postal code Table 62 Organization Input File Fields Field Length Type of Field Description The zip code in the organization s address Mandatory Fields Organization role The role of the organization The possible values are E Consortial member E Consortium E Interface provider E Licensing agent E Licensor B Vendor These fields can be customized in the code table Multiple roles can be entered separated by a semicolon If this field is left blank or set to lt NULL gt the system assigns a default role of Vendor for the new organization If the input file includes anew role for the updated organization a new organization role will be added to the list of already existing roles Role note 330 Organization role notes Chapter 30 Organization and Organization Contact Input Files Organization Loader Workflow After Verde verifies that the organization input file is in the correct format and that each of the rows contains the mandatory information Verde searches for a record in the database that matches the Organization code field If the organization is found Verde updates the organization record If no organization record is found Verde creates a new organization record provided the input file contains all the information neede
97. logged into SFX 502 Chapter 50 Synchronizing e Product Updates with SFX 7 Setup a user name and password for the e product For information about using SPX refer to the SFX 3 0 User Guide In the Verde SFX Sync History screen select the Reviewed check box for the 8 entry to mark the entry as reviewed Using Synchronization History to Handle Errors The Synchronization History screen enables you to easily view the synchronization tasks that resulted in errors investigate these errors and rerun the synchronizations if necessary To handle task errors From the Sync status drop down list select Error 2 Click Go The synchronization history now displays only those synchronization tasks whose status is Error 3 For each task click the Task Log button gt in the Action column The log for the task appears in a pop up window 4 View the errors in the log The following table describes errors that may appear in the log and recommended actions to take in order to resolve these errors Koe fe Ye Mine Description Table 89 Synchronization Task Errors Recommended Action Sync task failed at status Verde processing Waiting for SFX SFX processing Adding new records The sync process failed when it was at the specified status The e product has been flagged sync required and will be synchronized when the next scheduled batch synchronization task is run No action required Fai
98. nonRenewalNoticePeriod Non renewal notice period nonRenewalNoticeCode licenseeTerminationRights Non renewal notice code Licensee termination rights 207 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 19 License Fields Internal Name licenseeTrmnConditionCode Display Name Licensee trmn condition code licenseeNoticePeriodOfTrmn Licensee notice period of trmn licenseeNoticePeriodOf TrmnCode licensorTerminationRights Licensee notice period of Trmn code Licensor termination rights Table 20 Local Acquisition Fields Internal Name Display Name instituteCode Institute code local ACQ localAcquisition budgets Local ACQ budgets costShare Cost share costSharePresentage Cost share percentage costShareDate Cost share date Table 21 Invoice Fields Internal Name Display Name invoiceCode Invoice code invoiceNumber Invoice number paymentStatus Payment status invoiceDate Invoice date Payment date paymentDate Report e Products by Selection Status The default output parameters of the Report e Products by Selection Status are listed in the table below Note The output file can be customized For details see Customized Report Outputs on page 371 208 Chapter 21 View Report Output Table 22 Report e Products by Selection Status Internal Name Display Name eproductType e Product type eproduct instanceCode in
99. of Loaders Creating Input Files Before loading records into Verde you must create an input file containing the data that needs to be loaded Your input file can be an Excel file containing one worksheet or any comma delimited file CSV An input file can be created based on one of Verde s input file templates The input file contains columns for all of the available input file fields with a header row for each column The input file fields are in one of the following formats m Date All dates in the input files should be in the following format dd mm yyyy m Code For input file fields that accept a code value enter the display name of the code Verde automatically translates the display name into the relevant code Note The display name can be modified from the Code Tables tab in the Admin module For details see The Code Tables Tab on page 403 m Boolean For fields that accept a Boolean value enter True or False 1 or 0 Yes or No Text Free text limited to the field length Integer A number Float A number with two digits after the decimal point VarChar Text of an indeterminate length The template input files are located at exlibris verde lt v2_1 gt verde examples and templates where v2 is Verde s current version number and 1 is the slot where the system is installed on a specific port For more information consult your system administrator The input file fields and value
100. only the fields for which default values can be defined Logout Help z Verde je TET administrator Test Library Users Code tables J falues Initial Profiles Configuration Default Values Terms a License License method Online z New z Access Admin Standard duration weeks z Vendor advance days 5 notice Renewal type Automatic z Licensee ove License URI a Licensing agent ove Local licensing TTE License URI type URI negotiator Physical license location License delivery requirements Figure 134 Default Valves 2 Define default values for the displayed fields For an explanation of each of these fields see License Record Tabs on page 109 3 Click Submit A staff user can now view the default values you defined when creating a new license record in the KB Manager module 418 41 The Initial Tab This section includes m About the Initial Tab on page 419 Converting Acquisitions on page 420 Loading Acquisitions on page 420 Localizing Records on page 423 Re indexing on page 425 About the Initial Tab The Initial tab in the Admin module enables you to perform certain actions during the initial setup phase of a Verde installation The following options are available in this tab and described in this section m Convert acquisitions m Load acquisitions m Localization E Re index Note The conversion and loading of acquisition and vendor records from ALEP
101. page 257 e Standalone Input File Rules on page 258 u m e Standalone Input File Fields on page 261 u e Standalone Loader Workflow on page 274 About e Standalone Input Files Verde s e standalone loader loads the e standalone input file This file loads e standalone records that need to be added to or updated in the Verde database The input file contains columns for the fields in the e standalone e product as well as work records and rows for each record being loaded A new e standalone record can have its own e interface record or it can be linked to an e interface record that is already in the database or a record that was created in previous rows of the same input file The input file thus includes several fields for the e interface record The e standalone input file s columns are described in Table 49 Note The e standalone loader loads a single coverage per row To load multiple coverage ranges include a row per e standalone level coverage The e standalone loader does not load institution level coverage Verde Staff User s Guide e Standalone Input File Rules Before loading your input file ensure that the file follows these rules m All of the fields in the mandatory columns contain values When an input line does not contain a value in a mandatory field the line is rejected and an error is logged in the output report m If you are creating new e standalone and e interface records and want to create wor
102. possible values are Debit and Credit Amount Payment period from AMOUNTVALUE PAYMENTPERIOD FROM Cost amount The date on which the payment period begins Payment period to PAYMENTPERIOD TO The date on which the payment period finishes Payment date Payment made by PAYMENTDATE PAYMENTMADEBY The date of payment The name of person by whom the payment was made Consortial purchase CONSORTIAL PURCHASE Indicates a consortia purchase Possible value are Yes or No Percentage of total Cost code PERCENTAGEOF TOTAL COSTCODE If there is a consortia purchase indicates the percentage of participation for your instance System generated identifier Acquisitions No ORDERNO Acquisitions number of related acquisition record 153 Verde Staff User s Guide 154 Field Name Invoice No Table 14 Details Tab Fields INVOICENO Description Invoice number of related invoice record Subscription No SUBSCRIPTIONNO Subscription number of related subscription Cost note Cost ID COSTNOTE ID Additional information about cost Cost ID Unique identifier By CREATEDBY Verde user Contains the ID of the staff person who created the cost record Creation date CREATEDDATE The date on which the cost record was created Latest update UPDATEDATE The date on which the cost record was
103. product can be linked to one or more licenses If the e product is linked to more than one license it is necessary to create a prevailing terms record that stores the license terms that are in effect and governs the access of a particular e product Typically licenses are created for e package and e standalone resources However they may also be required for e interfaces where the interface is licensed separately there may be a technology fee and e constituents where the license would typically be a license rider for an individual journal that is part of a package Verde Staff User s Guide 104 License Records List The License Records List displays a list of license and prevailing term records associated with a particular e product The License Records List includes records for the e product itself as well as any license and prevailing term records that are inherited from parent records Licenses and prevailing terms can be inherited on three levels m e Constituents inherit licenses from their e packages and e interfaces m e Standalones inherit licenses from their e interfaces m e Packages inherit licenses from their e interfaces Managing e Products z New Search New Work W View Basket Quick Add El gt arp Scitation American Institute of Physics O arp Scitation Wo A c Package type Selective Acquisitions Nev License Approved Summary License Records List New License Link License Add Prevailing Ter
104. products and between instances The Copy button is displayed above the Access Records List Once there is an access record on the clipboard the Paste button is displayed Summary Access Records List e Product Access type Access status Allowed access Actions Acquisition Active License A Active Access Active Admin SRW SRU j Figure 56 Access Records List The Access Records List displays the following information for each record P m whether the record is the parent record or the inherited record if the record is currently active the record s type the record s status whether or not the record is applicable to the entire instance buttons to perform the following actions m create anew record m edit an existing record m duplicate a record Chapter 11 Access Records Access Details The access record has two tabs one containing general access information and the second containing access authorization details EL D ee 239 Access Authorization Back to list x ccess status i z omain names a A tat Active D Aj Access information note a laz Y Implemented authorization IP address password z d 239 50 address method Alternate authorization method Certificate x Authorization method note pppp a 239 50 port 0 v 239 50 version supported IP address registration method Send to provider
105. range that can include time intervals and or ranges of volumes and or issues For example for specifying a coverage range for a title with a volume number and month you can enter the volume number range and month range in the same row in the input file For e standalones that have non continuous coverage ranges include a row for each additional range For example when an e standalone has coverage ranges from Volume 1 to Volume 15 and Volume 18 to Volume 20 the e standalone s record contains the first coverage range in the input file record The second coverage range is added in an additional record which includes only the Match field and the coverage range fields 260 Chapter 26 e Standalone Input Files Table 48 e Standalone with Non Continuous Coverage Range Input File Match Fields Coverage from ete fo e 0 Rows Volume Volume 0110 0990 0110 0990 m Ifyou add new local coverage records the existing coverage records will be removed e Standalone Input File Fields The following table describes the fields of the e standalone loader s input file Table 49 e Standalone Input File Fields Field Name Record Field Description Mandatory Type Length Field Match e Product Verde e product Yes For standalone code of e standalone updated e standalone records Match interface e Product Verde e product Yes For new e code of e interface standalone records linked to existing e interface
106. record for a full member 6 If you selected No in the previous step from the Related instance drop down list select the member instance with which you want to associate the library you are creating 7 Optional If you selected No in step 5 and are working with the asymmetrical synchronization model for details see Synchronizing Updates in Consortia on page 483 from the Related institute drop down list select the local institute with which you want the center to communicate o Details Contacts IPs lists Proxy server Library code INsT2_I SFX Institute code Library name Institute 2 Library role Alternate name 1 Institute Alternate name 2 Alternate name 3 g note a Guest member No C Yes i nnn Related Instance INST2 z full time employees o Related Institute Faculty Default library access C Exch Graduate students lo i Submit Cancel Figure 153 Related Institute Note The system does not allow you create two library records with the same related instance and related institute value If you attempt to create such a record you will receive an error message 8 Complete the rest of the library record as described in Library Details on page 170 9 Repeat steps 1 8 for each member instance in your shared consortium environment In addition if there are multiple local institutes within your system s member
107. records as well as the acquisition record Invoice records are not copied but display from all acquisition records that share the same acquisition number If a local acquisition record or invoice record does not already exist one can be added from the Local Acquisitions or Invoice tab For a full list of fields in each of these tabs see Acquisitions Tab on page 91 Adding New Acquisition Records To create new acquisition records click New ACQ in the Acquisition Records List Note that only users with editing privileges are able to create new acquisition records To renew an acquisition record click Renew The following year s acquisition record opens The Renew button is displayed in the Acquisitions tab when appropriate Note that there are separate permissions for renewing an acquisition record and assigning the status Active to an acquisition record Editing Acquisition Records To edit an acquisition record click the Open Acquisition E button in the Actions column of the Acquisition Records List The Open Acquisition button is displayed in the list only if you have editing privileges Package level acquisition records can be edited only from the Acquisition Records List of the e package record In an e constituent record the e package acquisition record can be viewed only You can access the acquisition record of an e package by clicking the Edit Inherited Record button that is displayed in the first column of the
108. right of the filter selection boxes the Activation pop up window opens enabling you to update the following four fields e Product status Selection status Activation from date Activation to date In addition you can select whether you want to update the e package in addition to each of the e constituents within the e package Note If you filter the e package list the update is performed only for e constituents that match the filter criteria After you click Submit in the Activation pop up window and the update is executed a message containing information about the number of updated e products is displayed below the filter section of the e package list Managing e Products z New Search W view Basket E Ap scitation american Institute of Physics D arp Scitation had EP Status Trial e Package type Selective Acquisitions New License Approved EP Status Production Active 25 Dec 2006 Jump to 1 6 of 6 records Filter by e Product status All z Filter by Selection status Approved z Display Local Display All Update BD Message The set of e constituents include 6 e products 6 e Constituents were updated hysics letters 10 118 F Producti Biointerphase 1559 410 Producti App Product P t P ti v Identifier poma Selection e Coverage tus Status 9 190 1 20 Updater yer 1 1 1962 Update py ed ed Updater Syp proved 1 1 1991 Updater Ay Approved 11 1 97 v 1 1998 Updater p
109. status Active to acquisitions Renew acquisitions Allows renewing acquisitions Note Only acquisitions with the status Active can be renewed View local acquisitions Allows viewing local acquisitions Create edit local acquisitions Allows creating and editing local acquisitions Delete local acquisitions View invoice Allows deleting local acquisitions Allows viewing invoices 395 Verde Staff User s Guide 396 Attribute Privilege Creat edit invoice Table 73 KB Manager Module Privileges Description Allows creating and editing invoices Delete invoice Allows deleting invoices Note Invoices with the status Paid cannot be deleted License View license Allows viewing licenses Create edit license Allows creating editing duplicating linking and pasting licenses as well as adding prevailing terms Delete license Allows deleting licenses A license record cannot be deleted if E The license status is Approved or Retired E The license record is related to workflow Approve license Extend license Allows assigning the status Approved to a license Allows renewing licenses Note Only licenses with the status Approved can be renewed View license attachment Allows a user to view a license attachment if the user has View license permissions Add license attachment Allows a user to add a
110. that are managed by the member instance the consortium level is automatically set to Managed locally The consortium level field is managed on the same level as the e product libraries so if an e constituent inherits libraries from its package it will also inherit the consortium level from its package Propagating Locally Created Records Any e product or work record that is part of the Verde KnowledgeBase will be included in the center as well as in all member instances These records have e product and work record codes that are common to the record wherever it is found These codes facilitate navigation and linking between instances Records especially e product records that are not part of the KnowledgeBase will not necessarily have common identifiers To facilitate navigation between records in a multi instance environment and to allow the management of the e product and its attributes to be distributed across multiple instances Verde automatically propagates locally created e product and work records from the instance in which they are created to all other member instances This means that if a work record and e package is created in the center it will be copied to each of the member instances The same is true for the member instances if a work or e product record is created in the member instance it is copied to all other member instances and to the center The source record triggers creation and update to records in other instances
111. the General Information Interoperability and Libraries tabs Delete e product Allows deleting locally created e products e Products cannot be deleted if they are part of the KnowledgeBase Locally created e products cannot be deleted if they have attributes In a consortium environment locally created e products are automatically propagated to other instances These e products can be deleted only if they can be deleted in all instances if they have no associated attributes e product statuses or selection statuses in any instances 394 Chapter 38 The Users Tab Attribute Acquisitions Privilege Update ALEPH Table 73 KB Manager Module Privileges Description Allows opening a new order in ALEPH and canceling the current ALEPH order This permission is available only if your Verde instance is configured correctly to communicate with the ALEPH instance View acquisitions Allows viewing acquisitions Create edit acquisitions Allows creating editing and linking acquisitions Delete acquisitions Allows deleting acquisitions An acquisition record cannot be deleted if E The acquisition status is Approved Active Cancelled Renewed or Send for additional processing E The acquisition record has local acquisition and or invoice records attached to it E The acquisition record is related to a workflow Activate acquisitions Allows assigning the
112. the date click the Calendar button El A calendar appears in a pop up window On the calendar select the date you want to enter g Click Run Schedule A Request was submitted successfully message appears h Click OK The batch synchronization is scheduled Viewing Batch Synchronization Reports When a batch synchronization task is complete a task output report tells you which e products were processed during the task If there were any errors a summary of the errors is available If you configured e mail addresses as part of the batch synchronization process an e mail is sent to the e mail addresses notifying the recipients that the task is complete and providing a link to the output report You can also access the report from Verde 497 Verde Staff User s Guide To view a batch synchronization task output report from Verde 1 From the Select a tool drop down list select View Task Output 2 From the e Product section of the Task menu select SFX Sync The following window appears Select a tool View Task Output Report date Reportname Report summary Report file Report status ne pe ECCA K RbvadestictbcatlonT ash 20050112002 FErndachkedtenkannsk LEET 133002 mss K EProductActivationTask 2 VET 119002 EProductActivationTask 2 VET 119002 Lo E Produa SFX Sync Figure 185 SFX Sync View Task Output 3 Identify the report you want to view by the Report date which specifies the date and t
113. the e resource is licensed A check box indicates whether the e resource is licensed for the sub unit Location data is made available to external systems via Verde SOAP The location record lists the valid institutions for the instance When you click a line an Edit button is automatically added to the line This button opens the Allowed Location Note window in which you can create and edit allowed location records if you have editing privileges When new licenses are created the system uses the Allowed locations from the library record as the default allowed institutions However these values can be overwritten when the license is edited Description Terms Notes License review a DEIS wor Related Back to list G Gea Wl L A JEKANES m Allowed location note E insT1 ART Music Library IS S S K DIKS New Obrary IP for Vendor 10 2 235 54 69 10 1 253 45 10 2 224 45 51 54 55 4 Internal 12 45 53 25 22 25 46 89 90 10 1 235 56 10 1 245 66 Add range From To Exclude Modifie 23 125 45 22 Yes C No 11 Sepi Figure 52 Locations The IP for the library s vendor and internal IP are displayed in the Allowed location note box in read only mode Additional IPs can be added to the license using the Add Range button These ranges can either be added to or excluded from the default IP ranges that are set in the library record using the Yes No buttons in the Exclude column The form
114. the instance you want the selected user to be able to search and navigate This drop down list contains a list of all the instances that exist in your Verde installation and have profiles defined for your instance 6 Select Guest profile and click Submit In the example above the administrator of Instance 2 assigned the selected user a guest profile for Instance 3 After this guest profile is assigned to the selected user Instance 3 will appear in the list of instances available for this user to search In addition this user will be able to navigate to Instance 3 from Instance 2 Copy Paste Attribute Profiles It is possible to copy and paste license access or admin attributes from one instance to another within a multi instance environment To enable this functionality the administrator must create a profile that includes the create edit privilege for the appropriate attribute For information about creating such a profile Setting Up Guest Profiles on page 449 For information about the copy paste functionality see Copying and Pasting e Product Data on page 57 Chapter 45 Setting Up a Shared Consortium Environment Multi Instance Report Profiles Verde enables you to generate multi instance reports for all existing reports in a consortium environment Multi instance reports include data from all selected instances although the report summary and output are available only in the instance in which the report is generated
115. the institute Clicking this button opens the access authorization pop up window in which you can create and edit access authorization records if you have editing privileges When new access records are created the system uses the access authorization values from the library record as the default access authorization values These Chapter 11 Access Records default values can be overwritten when the access authorization record is edited WWW Data e ACCESS Aut ee Back to list ix E All libraries i OO p TE k REE 5 J E instance 2 roxy server decision yes no Institute1 m Pi a Proxy registration status Registered z Institute2 v ee Proxy Note Proxy Not L1 v 2 Mathematics Electronic resource verde new vl user identifier new m 2 Electronic resource verde10 user password new v E Electronic resource test local user identifier Test Library v i Electronic resource Electronic resource user password note user password note X 5 p x 2 Submit Cancel Figure 59 Access Authorization 127 Verde Staff User s Guide 128 12 Admin Records This section includes m About Admin Records on page 129 B Admin Records List on page 129 B Admin Details on page 130 About Admin Records The adm
116. the journal Brain Research is an e constituent in the ScienceDirect e package However e constituents can also be e journals e books or electronic products of other types that are sold by groupings or packages An e constituent can be linked to only one package It cannot be linked to another e constituent or directly to an e interface As a result there must be a separate e constituent record in every package in which an electronic journal is offered For example in addition to being an e constituent in EBSCOhost Electronic Journals Service the Journal of Early Modern History also has an e constituent record in the e packages SwetsWise and Ingenta Select e Standalone An e standalone is an individual electronic resource that is linked directly to an e interface The most common examples of e standalone resources are Abstract and Indexing databases However electronic journals that are not sold via a package or e books sold separately can also be represented as e standalone Chapter 3 Overview of e Product Management records Examples of e standalone resources are Medline and D Lib An e standalone resource is linked to an e interface and has no e constituents e Print An e print represents the print version of an electronic resource that is often relevant to the electronic version for acquisition and licensing purposes An e print record has different fields than true electronic e products but in other ways is sim
117. the name and the letters are all changed to uppercase The contact name cannot be edited with the loader 335 Verde Staff User s Guide 336 31 Admin and Local Admin Input Files This section includes About Admin Input Files on page 337 Admin Input File Rules on page 337 Admin Input File Fields on page 338 Admin Loader Workflow on page 344 About Local Admin Input Files on page 345 Local Admin Input File Rules on page 345 Local Admin Input File Fields on page 346 Local Admin Loader Workflow on page 347 About Admin Input Files Verde s admin loader loads the admin input file This input file loads admin records that must be added to the Verde database The input file contains columns for the fields in the Verde database and rows for each record being loaded The admin input file s columns are described in Table 65 Admin Input File Rules Before loading your input file ensure that the file follows these rules m The input file includes the mandatory Match column When an input file does not contain the mandatory column it is not loaded to Verde and an error is logged in the summary m The Match column contains values When an input line does not contain a value for a mandatory field the input line is rejected and an error is logged in the output report Verde Staff User s Guide m The input file columns can be rearranged and non mandatory columns can be removed from the input file The text of the co
118. to simply as members Full members have Verde instances of their own in which they manage local resources m Guest members members for which the center manages resources Guest members do not have Verde instances of their own Both types of members full and guest must be configured as libraries of type institute To configure a member instance to work in a shared consortium environment 1 Log in to the central instance and select Managing gt Libraries The Details tab opens enabling you to create a new library record 2 Inthe Library code field enter a unique library code The library code cannot be the same as the member instance code or as any other library or organization code within the same Verde installation Note The Verde Implementation team recommends using the following conventions in defining a library code For full members add _i to the instance code For example if the instance code is UMCB the library code would be UMCB_i For guest members add _g to the instance code For example if the instance code is UMCB the library code would be UMCB_g 3 Inthe Library name field enter the name you want to assign the library you are creating Chapter 45 Setting Up a Shared Consortium Environment 4 Optional Enter up to three alternative names for this library in the Alternate name fields 5 Under Guest member select Yes if you are creating a record for a guest member or No if you are creating a
119. to the libraries selected in the central instance s Libraries tab m If an e product is inactive in the central instance and active in the local instance the parallel SFX item is activated according to the default in the local instance s Libraries tab The parallel SFX item is also activated for all the local SFX institutes that correspond to the libraries selected in this tab m If an e product is active in both the central instance and the local instance the parallel SFX item is activated in one of the following ways m The parallel SFX item is activated for the local SFX institutes that correspond to the libraries selected in either the central or local instance s Libraries tab m Ifthe default is selected in the local instance the parallel SFX item is activated for the default m Ifthe default is not selected in the local instance the parallel SFX item is deactivated for the default m If an e product is inactive in both the central instance and local instance the parallel SFX item is deactivated 486 Chapter 50 Synchronizing e Product Updates with SFX Table 84 Synchronization in Asymmetrical Model Specific Member Institutes e Product in Central Instance Active more than 50 of local institutes are managed by the center Active fewer than 50 of local institutes are managed by the center e Product in Member Instance Inactive Inactive How Parallel Item Is Updated During Synchronizat
120. use flag Indicates the use of a proxy server The possible values are E Null Field left blank E IP Selective Indicates IP selective E No Indicates that a proxy server is not used B Selective Indicates selective use of the proxy server E Yes Indicates the use of a proxy server 319 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 57 Library Input File Fields Field Name Type of Field Field Description Mandatory Length Fields Proxy server The type of proxy type server used when the Proxy server use flag field is not null The possible values are B Null Field left blank E EZ proxy Indicates the EZ proxy being used E Library proxy Indicates the library proxy being used E Other Indicates another proxy type is used B SQUID Indicates SQUID is being used E WAM Indicates WAM is being used Proxy prepend VarChar A string to add to the string URL going to the proxy server Proxy server Additional information note regarding the library s proxy server Library Loader Workflow After Verde verifies that the library input file is in the correct format and that each of the rows contains the mandatory information Verde searches for a record in the database that matches the Library code field If the library is found Verde updates the library record If no library record is found Verde creates a new library record provided all the mandatory
121. user you are creating If you are creating a staff user the staff user you create will be able to perform only those functions enabled by the profile s with which 389 Verde Staff User s Guide 390 the user is associated Note that there is no limit on the number of profiles that may be associated with a user Note zE XI Select profiles for user Availabe for Instances NST1 university z Profiles List Selector Permissions for create and edit all type of e products view permissions for a Licensor All permissions for license all reports related to license run licenses data loz Acqusitions All ACQ permissions update ALEPH all cost permissions all reports relate Trial All trial permissions related reports Access All access permissions Guest Search basket view e Products view WorkExpressions OK Cancel Figure 125 Selecting User Profiles Profiles are defined in the Profiles tab of the Admin module For details on this tab see The Profiles Tab on page 427 Click OK The profile s you selected are displayed under User s Profiles In the User s Roles section of the Users tab select one or more of the following roles for the user you are creating Access Acquisitions Acquisitions manager License manager Licensor Selector Administration Implementation Chapter 38 The Users Tab Interoperability Legal Maintenance updating Review renewal Selection
122. users The number of concurrent users Concurrent users note Note field Cost share The amount that the institution is paying for the e product Cost share percentage The percentage amount that the institution is e paying for the e product Currency Currency of the amount defined above Cost share date Date of the cost sharing Cost share note Note field Budget Information about the budget that covers the cost Invoice Tab Invoice records store information about invoices for the acquisition record Invoices that are managed in other systems can be loaded into Verde using the Acquisitions Data Loader The ILS invoice ID field in Verde stores the ID of the invoice in the external system and can be used for matching and updating invoice records Invoice records are linked to annual acquisition records However once they have been created invoice records display on all acquisition records that share an acquisition number In this way it is possible to view invoice history Creating New Invoice Records To create a new invoice record from the Invoice tab of the acquisition record click Add Invoice Invoices can be added to a new acquisition record only after the acquisition record has been submitted and saved to the server You must have editing privileges to create new invoice records Editing Invoice Records Records can be accessed and edited by clicking the plus sign next to a specific record 98
123. 05 Error The synchronization was not completed successfully If this status is the result Verde resets the sync status to Sync required and the next scheduled batch synchronization includes the e product Batch Synchronizing Verde enables you to batch synchronize all e product updates that are waiting for synchronization You can schedule a batch synchronization to be performed automatically at a regular time and interval and you can do one time batch synchronizations A batch synchronization task automatically processes All e product updates of the types described in Updates that Require Synchronization on page 482 unless they were already synchronized e Products that need to be activated or deactivated on the day of the task because of a purchase or cancellation made in the past for this date All e product updates managed locally by your Verde instance If your Verde instance is the central instance of a consortium the local instances must synchronize any updates made to e products that they manage locally All e product updates performed by the central instance of your consortium if you are managing a local instance of a consortium and the consortium has no central SFX instance To check which e products currently require synchronization see Checking Which e Products Require Synchronization on page 504 While a batch synchronization task is in process users cannot synchronize any single e product updates The scheduli
124. 06 En From Volume Issue Activation to date a Tar volume Issue Jump to Filter by e Product status Title AIP conference proceedings Embargo from C up to LO Months Applied physics letters Biointerphases Chaos Computers in physics Geochemical transactions I Submit Cancel ational af annlind nhueine Figure 19 Activation Window 45 Verde Staff User s Guide 46 If the Deactivate option is available and you select this option the Deactivation pop up window opens prompting you to enter the data required to deactivate the e constituent The values entered in these fields are used to update the e constituent in the e package list Deactivation Across languages and cultures e Product status Withdrawn Selection status Evaluation Activation from date 25 Feb 2003 l Expiration date Figure 20 Deactivation Window The pink summary box above the list of e product titles displays the following information m the name of the e package and e interface the status of the e package the selection status of the e package the e package type the active date for the e package 6 e Product Attribute Records This section includes m About e Product Attribute Records on page 47 e Product Summary Tab on page 51 m Inheritance of e Product Attribute Records on page 55 E Copying and Pasting e Product Data on page 57 About e
125. 1 VET 12014370360 C EStendAloneLoader 1 VET 32014369404 Ce EStandAloneLoader 1 VET 12014367722 EStandAloneLosder i VET 12014367722 Figure 112 Loader Output Report The following information is displayed for each loader output Report date The date on which the report was created defining the load output settings during the run summary Click the link to view the load s report summary For a description of the report summary see Viewing the Report Summary on page 365 Comple Report name The name given to the report This is specified while Report summary A link to the text file containing the load s report p p p p p omple p p p p p omple mple Report file A link to the XML CSV or PRN file containing the load s report file Click the link to view the load s report file For a description of the report file see Viewing the Report File on page 366 In Process Complete Failed Report status The status of the report The following statuses are possible Chapter 33 View Loader Output Viewing the Report Summary The report summary contains a summary of the load process including a list of the records that were updated or added and the input file statistics B ET_1204012738462_3 1 1204012738743_summary txt Notepad lol x Fie Edit Format View Help PARAMETERS IN USE update database false Input file f exlibris verde v2_4 verde home dat
126. 19 B Access Records List on page 119 m Access Details on page 121 About Access Records Access records store information that is needed to access the electronic resource This information includes access requirements URLs user names and passwords Typically access records are created for e packages and e standalones However it is also possible to create access records for e interfaces and e constituents Four types of access records can be defined Web interface m 739 50 E XML m SRW SRU Access Records List The Access Records List contains a list of access protocols and links to the access record for each protocol The icon in the first column indicates whether an access record exists for the e product An e product can have only one access record for each access type If an access record does not exist for an e product access information is inherited from the parent e product Verde Staff User s Guide 120 Only protocol information applicable to the e product is included in the access record There are three functions available from the Access Records List you have the appropriate user privileges E Create new E Edit E Duplicate The buttons for each function display only when relevant If an access record does not exist the Create New button is displayed If a record does exist the Edit and Duplicate buttons display In addition sets of access records can be copied and pasted between e
127. 4 Under Available for Instances select Other instances The screen expands enabling you to select All instances or specific instances from the List of instances drop down list Verde CEA Privileges Edit profile details Profile name Profile privileges Profile description Availabe for Instances Current Instance C Other Instances All Instances C Select Instance s G from the list List of Instances z NST1 university TST universit Mandatory field Figure 157 Profile Details for Multi Instance Installations 5 Select one or more instances using the CTRL key from the List of instances drop down list 448 Chapter 45 Setting Up a Shared Consortium Environment 6 Click the Privileges tab select the privileges relevant to the profile you are defining and click Submit The Profiles tab is displayed enabling you to view a summary of the permissions that you have assigned to the profile Verde Tasks KB Manager KB Tools admin Languages Logout Help Verde SS z Instance 2 Prnvileges Operation ended successfully Edit profile details Profile name Search in INST 2 Profile privileges Search basket view Work view e Product Profile description Availabe for Instances Current Instance Other Instances All Instances Select Instance s from the list List of Instances Instance 2 x Instance 3 x Instance
128. 4 x Figure 158 Profile Privileges for Defined Profile Once an administrator of an instance selected above assigns the created profile to specific users in this instance these users will be able to perform the actions governed by the privileges specified within the defined profile Setting Up Guest Profiles A guest profile is a predefined profile that enables the search of and navigation to other instances In addition to creating and assigning profiles for regular users administrators of each local instance and of the shared instance in a multi instance environment should create guest profiles for and assign these profiles to guest users To add a guest profile and assign it to a guest user Log in as an administrator 2 Inthe Admin module click the Users tab 3 Click the login name of the user to which you want to assign the profile The user s details are displayed 449 Verde Staff User s Guide 450 4 Click Add profile The Select profile for user screen is displayed Languages Logout Help Instance 2 Verde Tasks KB Manager KB Tools Admin en Verde i nen vor ed Provileges verde Popup mucrosoit Internet Explorer EE User details Login name Jon Password j seese Full name Availabe for Instances ARATE Profiles List Email Verde system administrator Figure 159 Add Guest Profile 5 From the Available for instances drop down list select
129. 7 414 B Access E Acquisitions E Acquisitions manager B Administration B Implementation E Interoperability E Legal E License manager E Licensor E Maintenance updating E Review renewal E Selector E Selection trial consideration Users are assigned one or more roles A role is defined for each task in a workflow A user that has the appropriate role becomes the potential owner of a task If only one user has been assigned this role all tasks with this role will automatically be assigned to this user Users can view only the tasks linked to their roles in the Verde Tasks module Chapter 39 The Code Tables Tab Verde Task Table 81 Verde Task Table Functional Fields Values Verde task name Report task and There is a list of reports tasks and loader names loaders For more information on these see Introducing the KB Tools Module on page 177 Organization Table 82 Organization Table Functional Fields Values Instance There are three main entities in Verde e product library and organization Institute This table includes roles for libraries and organizations Licensing agent Instance and Institute are library Consortial member institution roles A single instance can support one or more libraries All Consortium libraries within one instance share the e products and the key e product Interface provider attributes such as acquisitions license trial access and adm
130. Acquisition Records List The e package acquisition record can then be updated In the illustation below the Acquisition Records List displays an e constituent level record The down arrow on the Acquisition tab in the left Chapter 9 Acquisition Records menu indicates that the acquisition record is inherited The spectacle icon in the Actions column indicates that you can only view the record and not update it a e Products en New Search en New Work en PY View Basket en Quick Add E O 256 2 GaleGroup Business and Com Galegroup_ O ar Status en Production Active en 05 Feb 2006 Local Holdings embargo en 2002 ISSN en 1540 0719 Status en Production Active en 05 Feb 2006 e Package type en Aggregator Acquisitions en Active License en Approved Status en Production Active en 05 Feb 2006 Summary Acquisition Records List en ed New ACQ en Link ACQ en Start subscription en End subscription en ACQ Number en Purchase Order en Status en __Actions en e 01 Jan 2000 01 Jan 2010 1140515261609_5 Active License Access Admin Trial Cost Figure 42 Editing Acquisition Records Linking Acquisition Records To link an e product record to an existing acquisition record click Link ACQ This option should be used when multiple e product records are acquired through a single subscription In such cases you should first create a new acquisition record fo
131. Cancel Figure 135 Load Acquisitions Note You can monitor the load process by viewing the SVERDE BASE home system log acqLoad log log file 421 Verde Staff User s Guide 422 Acquisition Input File Structure The acquisition input file must be in the following XML format lt Acquisitions gt lt Acquisition gt lt WorkExpressionData gt lt Isbn gt lt Isbn gt lt Issn gt lt Issn gt lt EIssn gt lt EIssn gt seite lt WorkExpressionData gt lt EProductAndSubscriptionPeriodData gt lt EProductType gt lt EProductType gt lt HoldingsData gt lt HoldingsData gt lt ILSProductId gt lt ILSProductId gt lt ILSHoldingsIds gt lt ILSHoldingsIds gt lt SubseriptionStartDate gt lt SubscriptionStartDate gt lt EProductAndSubscriptionPeriodData gt lt AcquisitionData gt lt AcquisitionNumber gt lt AcquisitionNumber gt lt OrderNumber gt lt OrderNumber gt lt OrderDate gt lt OrderDate gt lt StartDate gt lt StartDate gt lt EndDate gt lt EndDate gt lt RenewCancelDate gt lt RenewCancelDate gt lt OrderForm gt lt OrderForm gt lt OrderSendMethod gt lt OrderSendMethod gt lt MethodOfAcquisition gt lt MethodOfAcquisition gt lt MaterialType gt lt MaterialType gt lt Organization gt lt Organization gt lt NoCopies gt lt NoCopies gt lt Price gt lt Price gt lt DiscountOnPrice gt lt DiscountOnPrice gt lt VendorId gt lt VendorId gt
132. Contact Selector sponseringLibrary automaticUpdate Sponsoring library Automatic update activityStatus Availability Chapter 21 View Report Output Table 26 Report of Active e Products Without Licenses Internal Name activityStatusDateNote Display name Activity status date note publicNote Public note Suppress upCode Suppress Up code freeOrSubscription Free or subscription crossRefEnabled Cross ref enabled organizationCode Organization code Free Free localCoverage Local coverage coverageText Coverage text holdingsInILS Holdings in ILS holdingsNote packageType Holdings note Package type selectiveModeCode Selective mode code SFXID2 JKEY SEX id 2 JKEY titleKey Title key addedToPackage removedFromPackage Added to package Removed from package License fields licenseCode License code licenseName License name typeCode License type methodCode License method license startDate License start date license endDate License end date executionDate licenseDuration License execution date License duration license statusCode License status 213 Verde Staff User s Guide 214 Table 26 Report of Active e Products Without Licenses Internal Name statusNote Display name License status not
133. Description Drop down list with the following options E Purchase E Gift E Free E Exchange Discount on price DISCOUNTON PRICE Percentage discount negotiated with vendor Pricing model PRICINGMODEL Note field A description of the fee structure applicable to the product Price cap PRICINGCAP Amount by which the price can rise This is the maximum percentage of annual increase in a multi year agreement Price cap period from and to PRICINGCAP FROM PRICINGCAPTO Dates on which the price cap begins and ends Price note Inflation rate PRICENOTE INFLATIONRATE The note field that contains additional information regarding the subscription price Defined in percentage terms Consortial agreement CONSORTIAL AGREEMENT Indicates whether an acquisition falls under a multi party agreement that uses the same license for all parties Pooled concurrent users POOLED CONCURRENT USERS The number of concurrent users if shared across a consortium rather than within a specific institution This number may be spread across one or more e products Concurrent users note CONCURRENT USERSNOTE Note field Can be used for E A specific explanation of how users are allocated or shared if pooled or platform based E Additional information about the number of concurrent users List price LISTPRICE Listed price 95 Verde Staff U
134. E XML E SRW SRU Access status mandatory field Domain names 352 The possible values are E Active E Inactive E Test These fields can be customized in the code table Domain names Chapter 32 Access and Access Authorization Input Files Table 69 Access Input File Fields Field Name a Ke Description Related Length Access Type Implemented The possible values are authorization method E Empty E Certificate E IP address E IP address password E Other E Password E Script E Unrestricted These fields can be customized in the code table Alternate The possible values are authorization method E Empty E Certificate E IP address E IP address password E Other E Password E Script E Unrestricted These fields can be customized in the code table Authorization Authorization method note method note IP address The possible values are registration method E Online E Send to provider These fields can be customized in the code table 353 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 69 Access Input File Fields Field Name Field Description Related Length Access IP address registration instructions IP address general note IP address registration instructions IP address general note Type Access information note Access information note Primary access URI Primary access URI Primary access URI type
135. H to Verde is described in detail in the ALEPH Verde Interoperability Guide Verde Staff User s Guide 420 Converting Acquisitions The acquisition conversion process enables you to take an input file from ALEPH and convert it to a format that can be loaded into the Verde database To convert an acquisition 1 2 3 Transfer the ALEPH XML export file of an acquisition record to the following location on the Verde server SVERDE BASE home data import In the Admin module s Initial tab click Convert Acquisitions The process assumes that there is a file to be converted in the data import directory Click Submit to convert the acquisition record When the conversion process is completed the following files are created E SVERDE BASE home data import acqToStandard xml E SVERDE BASE home data import acgRejectedNumbers xml This file includes the following information for each rejected record the number of records in the input file the identifier the title the e product type the acquisition number and the order number Note You can monitor the conversion process by viewing the SVERDE BASE home system log acqConvert log log file Loading Acquisitions After the ALEPH input file has been converted it can be loaded into the Verde database using one of the following acquisition loading options m Load acquisition data that is in XML format The XML forma
136. Interface List Merged Data Part 7 Interoperability Part 7 contains the following m Section 49 Introducing Verde Interoperability on page 475 m Section 50 Synchronizing e Product Updates with SFX on page 481 Verde Staff User s Guide 474 49 Introducing Verde Interoperability This section includes m About Verde Interoperability on page 475 m Verde SFX Interoperability on page 476 About Verde Interoperability Verde can interoperate with other applications such as SFX ALEPH and Voyager Verde serves as a single point of maintenance for e resource data that is shared by a library s suite of automation tools It is intended to facilitate collection management decisions by providing information about the size and composition of the current collection including data on the price of resources already in the collection Although Verde has no full acquisitions module it can store acquisition information order and vendor related details invoices price sharing that can be updated from ALEPH via standard batch processes At the same time Verde can trigger certain actions in ALEPH For more information about Verde ALEPH interoperability refer to the ALEPH Verde Interoperability Guide Verde can also display acquisition information order and vendor related details invoices price sharing that is stored in Voyager For more information about Voyager Verde interoperability refer to the Verde Voyager Interopera
137. Libraries names 272 e Product The names of the libraries for which the e product is active Enter the library code multiple library codes should have a comma between them Update of a library record will remove the existing library record Chapter 26 e Standalone Input Files Field Name Availability Table 49 e Standalone Input File Fields Field Length Type of Record Type e Product Description Availability status The possible values are E Up E Down If the field contains the value Down the Availability from and Availability to fields must contain values Mandatory Field Availability from Availability to e Product e Product Start date of the period when the e product will be unavailable End date of the period when the e product will be unavailable Availability note e Product Note to accompany availability status Interface name Work Title of interface for loaded e standalone Yes For work records associated with new e interface records when creating new e standalone records Update target e Product Indicates the system for update The possible values are E Null E SFX E SFX and MetaLib E MetaLib E JLS 273 Verde Staff User s Guide e Standalone Loader Workflow After checking that the e standalone input file is in the correct format and that each of the rows c
138. Library List The library list displays the following information m the name of the library m the Open Library button enabling you to open the library record m the library s code m the library s role Institute or Instance m the Contacts button opens the library record s Contacts tab To create a new library click the New button in the top right hand corner of the screen To edit the details of an existing library click the Open Library button of the record you want to edit The library record s Details tab opens Library Details The library details screen consists of four tabs m Details m Contacts m IP Lists E Proxy Server Chapter 18 Library Management L mathematics HS Contacts IPs lists Proxy server Library code math SFX Institute code mathematics Library name mathematics Library role Alternate name 1 Institute Alternate name 2 Role note role notes Judy Alternate name 3 Default library access Exclude Include Street full time employees 0 City Faculty 0 State Province County Graduate students 0 Submit Cancel Figure 81 Library List Details Tab Details Tab When creating a new library record the following fields are mandatory m Library code The library code must be unique across all library types An institute and instance therefore cannot share the same code In addition t
139. License contact E e Product Access contact E Purchase Partner contact These fields can be customized by changing the value in the code table select Topic gt Organization gt Field gt Contact Role The list contains library contact and organization contact roles Note that the values of library contact roles begin with INT meaning internal Multiple roles can be entered separated by a semicolon If left blank or set to lt NULL gt the system assigns a default role of Other for the new library contact If the input file includes a new role for the updated library contact the new library contact role is added to the list of already existing roles 323 Verde Staff User s Guide Library Contact Loader Workflow After Verde performs a general validation of the library contact input file the workflow below is followed m When creating a new contact the contacts are added without searching for a matching contact m When updating existing contacts the contact being added is compared with contacts that exist in the database If a match is found for the normalized contact name library code and e mail the contact record is updated Otherwise the contact record is added as a new contact When a new contact is created a normalized version of the contact name is used for the matching field The spaces are removed from the name and the letters are all changed to uppercase The contact name cannot
140. List on page 151 m Cost Record Fields on page 153 About Cost Records Cost records contain data that describes the various types of costs associated with an e product and are intended for use in collection development decision making Cost records can contain many cost types including the total amount that was paid for a particular e product for a particular period of time the invoiced price and the vendor price A cost record includes fields for storing specific information about the payment such as budget or fund name check number or invoice number Multiple cost records can be linked to a single e product Unlike the invoice that is linked to an acquisition record cost records are linked directly to e products This means that while the invoice is entered for an entire e package cost records can be entered for individual e constituents Cost Records List The Cost Records List displays all of the cost records for a particular e product The list is sorted in reverse chronological order The Cost Records List displays the following information for each record m the cost type m the payment date Verde Staff User s Guide m whether the amount is a credit or debit m the payment amount m buttons that enable the following actions m editing the record if you have editing privileges and the record is not inherited B copying the record to the same e product KB Manager Verde Welcome INST1 administ
141. Management wonend 163 Viewing the Orpantsalion LISk sn tenen 164 Organization Details messen neden needed eenden 165 Bo TAD etn deerne rekene 166 Contacts Tranen 166 Chapter 18 Library Management narren erneer 169 About Library Management sscstssstcssassvesievssasiosssiciarnntievsevivbetuneesieities 169 Viewing the Library List annotatie abn 170 Verde Staff User s Guide library Details essentie 170 Details TAD sororia ATE A ds ee 171 Contacts Tab E EE E EE E AT 172 PPT AGES TAD E PE EEEE A A E AE EN 173 Proxy Serger TUB notennamen 174 Part 3 KB Tools Module Chapter 19 Chapter 20 Chapter 21 Chapter 22 Introducing the KB Tools Module venen venen venenve neven veneen 177 Delivery and Scheduling Properties vonerennnenernketernkanddn 178 REPOTIS osiers sirce nransis ieee EEE E S 181 General Report of e Products oasen tene 181 Report e Products by Selection Status cccccosecssssserssssosveeeosesesnesoessonsas 190 Report on e Packages with Acquisitions nennen ennen 191 Report on Locally Created e Products cccsssssssssssssssssstssssnsssensseees 192 Report on e Product with Usage StatistiCS nennen ennen 193 Report of Active e Products without Licenses nennen 194 Report of IP Ranges by Licensor nun denderen 195 View Report Outputiamsnennennenendnententndn nn 197 About Viewing Report Output neneerineersneersneesnesssrnsenee 198 General Report of e Products wennen sneden 200 Report e Products by Selection S
142. Member Instances on page 461 Search Locally Created e Product Records on page 464 Navigation on page 466 In a shared consortium environment users can search across any combination of instances to which they have access using a combination of filters The search interfaces and filters available from the center differ from those available to members Search and Display in the Center When searching from the center you can filter searches by the following managed for all managed for some managed for a specific institute managed by a specific member instance include KnowledgeBase By selecting the appropriate combination of fields you can retrieve the following m all e products that are managed for all m alle products that are managed for some m all e products that are available for a particular instance regardless of who manages them Verde Staff User s Guide 460 E all e products that are managed by a particular instance m all e products that are managed by or for a combination of instances If you do not right click Find the search will be performed using the same filters as the previous search If this is your first search in the current session it will be performed in the active instance in this case the center The instance filter is sticky That is after you select a set of instances to search all subsequent searches will be performed on this set of instances until you explicitly set new filters I
143. Print button prints all fields in the acquisition record that contain data as well as all local acquisition and invoice records Title information for all e products acquired by the acquisition record is also included in the printout The E Mail button opens a window that allows you to enter the e mail addresses of the sender and recipient as well as a subject and note The e mail address in the user record is used by default in the To field but this address can be overwritten To send the acquisition record to more than one recipient separate recipients using semicolons The body of the e mail message includes all of the fields from the record that contain data Acquisitions Tab The fields in the Acquisitions tab are divided into sections The following table describes the fields within these sections Table 7 Acquisitions Tab Fields Section Field Name Description Acquisitions Start and end SUBSCRIPTION The start and end dates of the dates STARTDATE acquisition record are the start and end dates of the annual subscription SUBSCRIPTION The Subscription open date contains ENDDATE the start date of the first subscription 91 Verde Staff User s Guide Section 92 Field Name Acquisition status Table 7 Acquisitions Tab Fields Code ACQUISITION STATUS Description The status of the acquisition record controlled by a drop down list There are eleven possible statuses New statuses cannot be added but
144. Reports Defining Invoice Parameters The available fields are m Invoice date Can be defined as equal to less than or more than m Payment date Can be defined as equal to less than or more than m Invoice status Possible values are m Paid m Ready to be paid m Unpaid 187 Verde Staff User s Guide The last part of the report input deals with parameters related to the license License Filters on active records O License type License status Click through License method Manifest assent Negotiated hd License start date F License end date License execution date Licensee on Licensor oe Perpetual access rights No Undetermined hd Archiving rights No Undetermined zi No Remote access fs Fair use clause C yes C No Ignore Figure 96 Reports Defining License Parameters The available fields are m Filters on active records if the box is selected only licenses that have the status Approved will be retrieved m License type Possible values are m Regular Trial Supplemental m Prevailing m License status Values are New In negotiation Under review Under local review Pending local response Pending licensor response 188 Chapter 20 Reports Awaiting vendor generic license Redacted version created Electronic version created Awaiting local signature Final legal version received Approved Pending final
145. TEXT Ultra DR EN we OE OEE cin GE Figure 176 Availability Status Chapter 49 Introducing Verde Interoperability E Get license data Verde sends SFX license and administrative information about an e product to be displayed in the SFX menu For example active portfolios with getFullText services have a link to Verde Click the I button to open an information window which displays active license details as well as general information from Verde Ex Libris OSFX SFX Services for this record Source Acc ts of chemical research 0001 A Basic Full Text Full text available American Chemical Society Year folume Issue Start Page 98 vo ssue 1 Available from 1968 volume 1 iss Figure 177 Active License Details and General Information The information is divided into two sections License Notes and General Notes The License Notes section contains the following information from the license record for the values that are defined in the record Authorized user definition Local authorized user definition Citation requirement detail Digital copy Digital copy term note Print copy Print copy term note Scholarly sharing Scholarly sharing term note Distance education Distance education digitally term note Course reserve print Electronic link term note Course pack print 477 Verde Staff User s Guide 478 m Course pack term note m Walk in term use note m Public note The General Notes s
146. TO Perpetual Access Right Perpetual Access To The right to permanently access the licensed materials paid for during the period of the license agreement The date to which there is perpetual access PERPETUALHOLDINGSNOTE Perpetual Holdings Note Note about perpetual holdings PHYSICALLOCATION Physical License Location The place where a printed or other tangible instance of the license is stored PRINTCOPY Print Copy The right of the licensee and authorized users to print a portion of the licensed materials PRINTCOPYTERMNOTE 524 Print Copy Term Note Information which qualifies a permissions statement on Print Copy Appendix B Explanation of Fields PUBLICNOTE Table 92 License Fields Data Element Name Public Note Definition Additional information regarding the resource that is intended for public use REMOTEACCESSCODE Remote Access The right of an authorized user to gain access to an Electronic Product from an offsite location RENEWALDATE Renewal Date Date of renewal RENEWALTYPECODE Renewal Type A clause which specifies whether renewal is automatic or explicit REPLACEDBY REPLACES Replaced By Replaces License code of later license License code of earlier license SCHOLARYSHARING Scholarly Sharing The right of authorized users and or the licensee to transmit hard copy or an electronic copy of
147. Table 43 e Constituent Input File Fields Field Length Record Type e Product Description Pointer to a matching record in MetaLib Mandatory Field ID number ID source e Product e Product Pointer to a record ID in an alternate system The name of the alternate system Title key e Product A locally defined abbreviated title that can be added to the URL for direct linking Suppress Boolean e Product e Product Indicates if the e product is hidden from public view Currently not functional Indicates whether the available resource is free of charge The possible values are E Free E Subscription From year e Product The year from which the electronic version is available From month e Product The month from which the electronic version is available From day e Product The day from which the electronic version is available From volume e Product The volume from which the electronic version is available 253 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 43 e Constituent Input File Fields Field Name Type of Record Description Mandatory Field Type Field From issue e Product The issue from which the electronic version is available To volume To issue e Product e Product The volume until which the electronic version is available The issue until which the electronic version is
148. The e constituent loader does not update work records or remove work records or e products from Verde s database Before loading the e constituents ensure that the e constituent s e package exists in Verde If the e package does not exist follow the instructions in The Quick Add Wizard on page 64 for creating a new e package record m e Standalone The e standalone loader enables you to create and update e standalone records and their related interfaces It is possible to create and update several e standalone records related to different interfaces Verde Staff User s Guide 232 during one load It is also possible to simultaneously create or update several e standalone records that belong to the same interface In addition to creating and updating e standalone records the e standalone loader creates new work records for e standalone records if no corresponding work records exist in the KnowledgeBase The loader also indexes the e standalone records and their work records The e standalone loader does not update work records or remove work records or e products from Verde s database Acquisition The acquisition loader enables you to load new acquisition records to the Verde database When loading acquisition records each record must be associated with a single e product Therefore before loading acquisition records ensure that the acquisition s associated e product exists in the Verde database In addition to load
149. a portion of the licensed materials to a third party for personal scholarly educational scientific or professional use SCHOLARYSHARINGNOTE Scholarly Sharing Term Note Information which qualifies a permissions statement on Scholarly Sharing STARTDATE Start Date The start date of the license 525 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 92 License Fields Data Element Name STATUSCODE License status Definition Status of the license Default values are New In negotiation Under review Under local review Pending local response Pending licensor response Awaiting vendor generic license Redacted version created Electronic version created Awaiting local signature Final legal version received Approved Pending final local signature Retired Pending final signature by licensor Approved locally Rejected Can be customized by changing the value in the code table STATUSNOTE License status note TRMREQUIREMENTNOTE Termination Requirements Note Note field that contains additional information regarding the license status A clarification of the termination requirements and what certification of the requirement activities is necessary TRMRIGHTNOTE Termination Right Note 526 Additional information necessary to amplify any specifications of termination rights Appendix B Expl
150. a consortium environment locally created e products are automatically propagated to other 67 Verde Staff User s Guide instances These e products can be deleted only if they can be deleted in all instances e Products that are part of the KnowledgeBase cannot be deleted Note You can delete an e product only if you have delete e product permissions List of e Product Fields Verde uses a single database table for all e product types This table contains some fields that are common to all types and other fields that are specific to one e product type The following table lists the fields field types and field usage Table Legend A Field is present in all types P Field is present in e package I Field is present in e interface S Field is present in e standalone C Field is present in e constituent required field Table 5 List of e Product Fields Field Name Description General Information e Product type Interface Package Standalone Constituent Print This field cannot be updated e Package type Type of e package selective or aggregator Selective e package Are you purchasing the entire e type package 68 Chapter 7 e Product Records Table 5 List of e Product Fields Field Name Selection status Description Current selection status of the e product Values are E Removed E Review E Approved E Final Approval E Rejected E Evaluation
151. a import tmp_COBC52E13 57CD16061 EFEDB84C1532E3_1204012738441_unittestexamples xls License Dates null Default License Status FINAL_VERSION Default Licensee null Default Licensor null Default Renewal Type EXPLICIT Running mode online SUMMARY Start date Tue Feb 26 09 58 58 IST 2008 End date Tue Feb 26 09 59 58 IST 2008 Elapsed time 0 days 0 hours O min 59 sec Instance INSTL Number of rows found in the input file 65 Number of new rows found in the input file 0 Number of existing rows found in the input file 1 Number of rejected rows 64 Figure 113 Load Report Summary The Parameters in Use section of the load report summary lists the information entered in the loaders screen The following table describes the Summary section of the load report summary Field Start date End date Table 71 Load Report Summary Description The date and time the run started The date and time the run completed Elapsed time The total number of days hours minutes and seconds it took to complete the run Instance The instance code of the Verde instance to which the records were loaded Reading File The location of the input file and file name Total number of records in input file The number of e constituent acquisition license admin library organization records in the input file Number of new records in input file The number of new e constituent acquisition licens
152. ab Fields STARTDATE Description The date on which the trial begins or on which the product becomes available End date ENDDATE The date on which the trial ends or on which the product will no longer be accessible unless acquired Status STATUSCODE The possible values are E Approved E On hold E On trial E Requested E Trial over These fields can be customized by modifying the code table Status note STATUSNOTE The notes about the trial 145 Verde Staff User s Guide 146 Field Name Advance notification period Table 13 Details Tab Fields Code TICKLERPERIOD TICKLERPERIOD MODECODE Description The advance notice interval required by the library to warn of an upcoming trial end date The default values are Days Months and Weeks These fields can be customized by modifying the code table Contact ORGCONTACT CODE Organization contact Points to the Name field in the Organizationcontacts table Available to public AVAILABLETO PUBLIC An indication of the availability of the trial product to the public License required LICENSEREQUIRED Indicates whether a license is required for the product s trial period Activate SFX ACTIVATESFX Indicates whether to activate SFX for the product s trial period Currently not functional Cost note COSTNOTE The cost of the trial A note about the cost Decision
153. age 275 License Input Files on page 281 Library Library Contact and Library IP Input Files on Organization and Organization Contact Input Files on Admin and Local Admin Input Files on page 337 Access and Access Authorization Input Files on page 349 View Loader Output on page 363 View KB Reports and View Scheduled Tasks on page 369 Customized Report Outputs on page 371 Verde Staff User s Guide 176 19 Introducing the KB Tools Module The KB Tools module contains tools for running reports performing tasks and loading data All the KB tools are run in offline mode You can run reports or tasks once as a single instance or you can use the scheduler to define a recurrence pattern and range in order to run reports and tasks at a later time To access KB Tools in the top toolbar click KB Tools Verde Figure 86 KB Tools The KB Tools module includes the following tools Report enables you to submit a report Task enables you to submit a task Loader enables you to submit a loader View Loader Output enables you to view the output of a specific loader View Report Output enables you to view a specific report View Task Output enables you to view the output of a specific task View KB Reports enables you to view all KB reports View Scheduled Tasks enables you to view all the scheduled tasks Select a tool Report z Report view Report Output view Task Outpu
154. ain Title e Product Interface Standalone Interface Type Name lt CSA CSA Bacteriology DATABASE Illumina gt Abstracts Microbiology B m The input file columns can be rearranged and non mandatory columns can be removed from the input file The text of the column s header cannot be modified m All of the e standalone record s fields can be updated with the following exceptions The Global coverage and JKEY fields can never be updated in an e standalone record m The SFX ID and Free Subscription fields cannot be updated for an e standalone that is from the Central KB E For new records when a field is left blank or a column is removed from the input file the field is saved in the database as an empty field or as a default value If the same identifier already exists in database the row will be rejected For records being updated the existing values are left unchanged including blank fields You can clear the value of a non mandatory field by entering lt NULL gt in the appropriate column in the input file If a mandatory field s value is cleared the record is not loaded and an error is returned m To remove a local coverage record you must enter the value lt NULL gt in all the coverage fields From year From month From day and so forth If you enter lt NULL gt in only some of the coverage fields the local coverage record will not be removed m An input file row can contain a single continuous coverage
155. alReport 1 VET 1165307 Completed General Report of e Products Figure 105 Report Output m Report date The date and time that the report was run m Report name The report name that can be defined in the Delivery Properties window m Report summary A log is created for all reports that have either run successfully or have failed completion Clicking the summary hyperlink activates a dialog for opening or saving the status report dj VET _1135514959870_1 1 1135514960758_summary Notepad File Edit Format Help PARAMETERS IN USE status REMOVED statusUpdateDate null vendor null sponsoringLibrary null selector null Category null Includeconstituents true Running mode online Start date Sun Dec 25 14 49 20 IST 2005 End date Mon Dec 26 00 24 17 IST 2005 Elapsed time 0 days 9 hours 34 min 57 sec Instance INSTL Input records 385326 Non matching records 382684 Selection status does not match 382682 selection status update date does not match 2 vendor does not match 0 sponsor Ing library does not match 0 selector does not match 0 Category does not match 0 Matching records 2642 Displayable records 2647 2642 matching EProducts 5 non matching parents for display Non displayable matching records Cnon includable Constitutents 0 Figure 106 Report Summary m Report file When the report has run successfully the output can be viewed by clicking the output hyper
156. ana eneen dn eenn 96 Active Acquisition Records ensen heteen 97 Renewed Acquisition Records ssesssssssssesssssesssssserseninensisrrsernenreneneesens 97 Cancelled Acquisition Records sanneke 97 Local Acquisitions VAD natste teen areias 97 voice Tab Ae nieren nent eenden 98 Creating New Invoice Records auoersrorenenrenenearer dentata 98 Editing Tn oice Records siaisiisansaitsantaiaiiiocanaianaaagdan mana i 98 Deleting Ingoice Records werner oeradel vna a 99 Inooice Tab Fields oenen TA A baden saken 99 Acquisition VV OTL LOWS melanie 100 Gelting Started annet 100 Processing Acquisition Records mvvsersonoannteieenehrdnadenne 100 Renewing and Reviewing Acquisition Records aaneen 101 OAD IS CCU nternet neder ban 101 Manual Renewal ereronde eneen 101 B Prod Regie qien ieai E O R 101 Renewing or Canceling Acquisition Records sucunterermartenntene 102 Verde Staff User s Guide Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 License Records s s ssssssssossssssosssosoosssnesssosssssoosssosossssssssssnssssossssossssssssss 103 About License Records eeessesseeeessessrecssessssecesesssscoecsssesrrecessosesecesessese 103 License Records LiSt cecccsesssssssccccecscsssececececessssneeceeceesssseesessecesenaes 104 License Details enen ennen eenen vennenevevenenenneneereevenenenvven 105 Adding and Editing Licenses paceraar 106 Linking LACUS cts cies ata eeens 107 D pli ating LICENSES apenoten elanden 108 De
157. anation of Fields Table 92 License Fields TYPECODE Data Element Name License type Definition Type of license Once defined cannot be modified Default values are Regular Trial Supplemental Prevailing Can be customized by changing the value in the code table UCITAOVERRIDE UPDATEDATE UCITA Override Clause Indicator Update Date A clause that reflects the licensor s agreement to use U S state contract law in the event UCITA is ever passed and implemented in the specified governing law state Date record updated UPDATEDBY Updated By Verde user USERESTRICTIONSNOTE VENDORADVANCEDNOTICE Use Restriction Note Vendor Advanced Notice Use Restriction Note The amount of time before the license expires that you need to cancel your subscription A number VENDORADVANCEDNOTICEVAL Vendor Advanced Notice Value The amount of time before the license expires that you need to cancel your subscription A value WORKINTERMUSENOTE Walk in term use note 527 Verde Staff User s Guide 528
158. and Highwire Press are examples of e interfaces e Interfaces are included as separate records in Verde because they may be acquired and licensed independently of the electronic resources that are accessed via the interface Verde Staff User s Guide 26 e Package An e package is a grouping of one or more electronic e products known as e constituents in Verde Examples of e packages include JSTOR Arts and Sciences L Elsevier ScienceDirect and EBSCO Academic Search Premier There are two distinct types of e packages Aggregator Packages Aggregator packages are inclusive When an aggregator package is selected in Verde all its e constituents are automatically included in the package Acquisitions and licensing are performed only at the level of the package Examples of aggregator packages include EBSCO s Academic Search Premier or Academic Search Elite ProQuest s ABI Inform with full text and JSTOR Arts and Sciences I m Selective Packages Selective packages contain multiple e constituents from which a library can select Examples of selective packages include Elsevier s ScienceDirect Wiley s InterScience and Oxford University Press via Highwire A package can be linked to one e interface only e Constituent 9 An e constituent is an electronic resource or e product that is part of a package The most common example of an e constituent is a single electronic journal that is part of a package For example
159. and ICOLC 1998 These fields can be customized by modifying the code table Usage statistics delivery method DELIVERYMETHOD The manner in which statistics are made available Chapter 12 Admin Records Field Name Usage statistics format Table 12 Admin Tab Fields FORMATHTML FORMATDELIMITED FORMATEXCEL FORMATPDF FORMATCVS FORMATASCII FORMATOTHER Description The formats in which statistics are made available The following formats are available E HTML E Delimited E Excel E PDF E CSV E ASCII E Other Usage statistics frequency FREQUENCY The frequency with which statistics are made available The possible values are E Annual E Bi annual E Monthly E Quarterly E User selectable These fields can be customized by modifying the code table Usage statistics online location ONLINELOCATION The online location at which statistics can be accessed such as a URL or file path Usage statistics delivery addressee DELIVERYADDRESS Library contact name Usage statistics note NOTE Other information regarding usage statistics Usage statistics locally stored LOCALLYSTORED Information about and or links to locally stored data 135 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Hardware requirements internal Table 12 Admin Tab Fields HARD WAREREOUIRE MENTSPRIVATE Description Information about hardware
160. and clicking Submit If you click the ellipsis to the right of the Contact field the List of Contacts window opens displaying a list of defined contacts that you can filter by role Jump to Role all Ge All P Account manager Cems uce Consortial contact Jon Brice License contact Sales representative Miss Brown Technical support Trial contact ee Mss Noir Figure 65 List of Contacts If there is more than one incident record the records can be sorted by date title status and type Configuration Local Admin statistics Incidents Breaches Back to list New 1 3 of 3 records Date Y Title Status Type Actions 08 Dec 2006 Incident 1 Closed Type 1 fa 23 Dec 2006 Incident 2 In process Type 1 a x 21 Dec 2006 Incident 3 Re opened Type 1 zu 2 x Figure 66 Incident Record Incidents can be linked to only one e product The e product can be of any type except e print An e product however can have more than one incident When adding a new incident record note the following m The Occurred date and Reported date fields are populated with the current date These dates may be modified as necessary Incident type Status and Organization code fields are mandatory fields The first two can be pre defined to contain a library defined value by default m Once the record has been submitted the following fields are automatically updated as well Incident code C
161. and its content to be Open URL compliant Possible values are Yes No OpenURL activation status OPENURLACTIVATION STATUS The activation of external links Possible values are Yes No 133 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Linking note Table 12 Admin Tab Fields LINKINGNOTE Description Information about external linking for example implementation details or other notes MARC record availability MARCRECORD AVAILABILITY The availability of MARC records for the resource Possible values are Yes No MARC record note Interface languages availability MARCRECORDNOTE INTERFACELANGUAGESA VAILABILITY Further information regarding the availability of MARC record sets for example free or purchased acquisition and implementation status and so forth Possible values are Yes No The availability of multiple languages for the Interface Possible values are Yes No Interface languages implemented INTERFACELANGUAGE IMPLEMENTED1 3 The activation of one or more interface languages The field is available if the value of Interface languages availability is Yes Usage statistics available Statistics standard compliance AVAILABLE STATISTICSSTANDARD COMPLIANCE The availability of usage statistics for the resource Possible values are Yes No The official standard to which the statistics conform Default values are COUNTER
162. anguage in which the Verde user interface is displayed by clicking Languages in the top right corner Bas nay FASE Deutsch English UK 30 English Add Figure 3 Language Menu View your user name and the instance in which you are currently working in the top right corner Navigate from module to module by clicking the module tabs in the menu bar 19 Verde Staff User s Guide You can perform the following tasks in each module m Verde Tasks View assigned and unassigned tasks that were generated by the Verde workflow engine For information on the Verde Tasks module see Verde Tasks on page 381 m KB Manager Manage e products and their attributes libraries and organizations For information on the KB Manager module see Introducing the KB Manager Module on page 23 m KB Tools Schedule and run reports tasks and loaders as well as view the output of reports tasks and data loads For information on the KB Tools module see Introducing the KB Tools Module on page 177 m Admin only if you have administrative permissions Perform administrative functions such as managing Verde users and setting default values for relevant Verde entities For information on the Admin module see Introducing the Admin Module on page 385 Additional Verde Features Verde supports both single instance environments as well multi instance or shared consortium environments In a shared consortium envi
163. assign both the acquisition record and the purchased e products a status of Review Libraries that do not review e product records annually as part of the acquisition renewal process should run the task with the Update database field set to No The Subscriptions for review process initiates the renewal workflow if it is active e Product Review Libraries that do review the e products should review all e products that have a selection status of Review These e products are approved or rejected during the course of the review process The Verde Report e product by selection status report should be used to produce reports of e products for review as well as reports of e products that have been rejected or approved These reports are used by the acquisitions staff Acquisition records for e products that have been rejected must be cancelled while the acquisition records for e products that have been approved must be renewed Note that both the renewal and the cancellation are manual 101 Verde Staff User s Guide 102 Renewing or Canceling Acquisition Records This is the final step in the renewal process The decision to renew or cancel the acquisition record is usually based on the e product selection status In order to cancel an acquisition record update the acquisition status to Cancelled If you are working with ALEPH click the Update button to send a message to ALEPH so that the ALEPH order can be cancelled Note that the update wor
164. at are performed online as well as processes that are performed by or with the help of Verde tasks and reports Note that acquisition processing and e product selection are closely related and records are transferred betweeen the two processes The primary difference between the two processes is that selection is performed on individual e products of all types while acquisition processing occurs on the level of the acquisition record and affects sets of e products For more information about the selection process see About Selection Workflows on page 73 Getting Started Acquisition records can be created in the following two ways m At the beginning of your implementation process acquisition records can be created in batch mode by the SFX localization program This program creates an acquisition record for every e package and e standalone that is activated These records are activated in Verde because they are active in your site s SFX installation m By clicking New ACQ in the Acquisition Records List Note that a report of e products that have been approved for purchase can be produced and used by acquisitions staff as the basis for the manual creation of acquisition records Processing Acquisition Records Once an acquisition record has been created it must be processed approved and made active There is a Verde workflow for managing this process For more information on Verde workflows see About Selection Workflows on page 73
165. at of the IP range in the license is the same as its format in the library record Users Tab The Users tab stores a site defined list of user types The list of user types is maintained by the local administrator in the Verde Admin module The allowed user tables store the list of licensed user groups per e resource Each user group can be set to Allowed or Not Allowed Users with editing privileges 115 Verde Staff User s Guide can create and edit allowed user records Allowed user information is provided to external systems via Verde SOAP services Summary Description Terms Notes License review Locations Users Back e Product OO CO Add user Expand all Sollapss all Acquisition License El Instance Code Usergroup userarpi Allowed no Access User group usergrp1 z Admin Local note Trial Cost Allowed Not Allowed Usage Figure 53 Users Prevailing Term Records A prevailing term record must be defined when there is more than one active license direct or inherited for an e product Where there is more than one active license record that is licenses with overlapping time frames for an e product an error message and an Add Prevailing Terms button are displayed in the License Records List Error message Prevailing terms is necessary Summary License Records List emi Nev License Link License Add Prevailing Terms Acquisitions beense nam
166. ate The package Activation from date is taken from the Subscription start date If the interface is not active then activate Updates all e constituents that have a selection status of Final Approval These e constituents get the package e product status and the package Activation from date The package Activation from date is taken from the current date If the interface is not active then activate Reject update Standalone Uses the Subscription end the selection date of the current acquisition status of an e record as the Activation to product to date The default can be Rejected overwritten Uses the current date as the Activation to date The default can be overwritten No action Interface Uses the Subscription end date of the current acquisition record as the Activation to date The default can be overwritten Uses the current date as the Activation to date The default can be overwritten No action 82 Chapter 8 Selection Workflows Action Table 6 e Product Selection Status Updates Constituent of selective package Package aggregator Is e Product Active Is There an Acq Results No action until package is approved or rejected Uses the Subscription end date of the active acquisition record as the Activation to date Updates the selection status and Activation to date of all e constituents 83 Verde Staff User
167. atic E Explicit E Perpetual These fields can be customized in the code table If left blank the default value is saved License URI License The Uniform Resource Identifier at which the license agreement is made available 286 Chapter 28 License Input Files Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Description Mandatory Field Type Length Field License URI License The type of Uniform type Resource Identifier being used to locate the license agreement The possible values are E URI E URL E URN These fields can be customized in the code table Physical license License The place in which a location printed or other tangible instance of the license is stored Electronic file License Contains the file location location of the electronic version of the license Integer License The amount of advance notice required prior to license renewal if the licensee does not wish to renew the subscription 287 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Type of Record Field Description Mandatory Field Type Length Field Auto renewal License The time interval in cancellation which the Non period value Renewal Notice Period is measured The possible values are E Days E Weeks B Months These fields can be customized in the code table 288 Chapter 28 License Input Fil
168. ation method Null IP address registration method Online WWW Primary access URI type URL WWW Alternate access URI type URL WWW Local Persistent URI type URL SRW SRU SRW SRU port 0 m The input file columns can be rearranged and non mandatory columns can be removed from the input file The text of the column s header cannot be modified m For records being updated the existing values are left unchanged including blank fields You can clear the value of a non mandatory field by entering lt NULL gt in the appropriate column in the input file If a mandatory field s value is cleared the record is not loaded and an error is returned 351 Verde Staff User s Guide Access Input File Fields The following table describes the input file fields for the access loader Field Name Match mandatory field Type of Field Table 69 Access Input File Fields Field Length Description Must be one of the following E Verde e product code E SFX ID of associated e product Note If you choose to use an SFX ID as the unique identifier for each record and you want to edit the file in Excel format the ID column as text If the ID column is in general or number format Excel does not store any digits past the 15th digit and the data is lost Related Access Type Access type mandatory field The possible values are E WWW E 239
169. atus Active or Review m the subscription start and end dates The Start Subscription column is automatically sorted from latest to earliest the acquisition number The purchase order number The status of the acquisition record buttons to perform the following actions Open Acquisition if you have editing privileges and the acquisition record is not inherited m View Acquisition if the record is inherited and or you do not have editing privileges The following two function buttons display above the list of acquisition records m New ACQ opens a new blank acquisition form m Link ACO links the e product record to an existing acquisition record Click Renew to open the next year s record More information about acquisition renewal is available in Acquisition Workflows on page 100 If there is an active acquisition or renewal workflow the Workflow button is displayed above the Acquisition Records List Clicking the button opens the list of tasks for the workflow 87 Verde Staff User s Guide 88 Acquisition Details The acquisition record has a single tab Acquisitions that contains all of the fields for the acquisition record There are two additional tabs that display one for Local Acquisitions and the other for Invoices Local acquisitions and invoices are linked to specific annual acquisition records However when an acquisition record is renewed the system copies the local acquisition
170. ayed in the drop down list 377 Verde Staff User s Guide 378 Part 4 Verde Tasks Module Part 4 contains the following m Section 36 Verde Tasks on page 381 Verde Staff User s Guide 380 Verde Tasks Verde Tasks is the area where staff members can view various tasks waiting for some action or input These tasks are usually a result of workflows that have been initiated in the system After clicking the Verde Tasks tab the user is defaulted to the Task tab with a list of tasks related to the user s role The options for filtering tasks are m My open tasks m My closed tasks m My tasks m Unassigned tasks m My tasks and unassigned tasks Verde Tasks Fy Open Tasks EH Gina Workflow Start date End date e Product Link To Verde Action ie ce and payment terms Release ct being acquired from this e Product Figure 121 Verde Tasks The task summary screen displays the following information m The name of the task Clicking the name opens the task m Workflow Icon Click the workflow icon to display the workflow diagram The workflow to which the task is linked Start date End date The name of the e product Verde Staff User s Guide 382 m A link to the relevant e product E Action A user with administrator password privileges is able to access the additional Verde Tasks Admin tab This tab displays all tasks for all users Verde Task
171. be edited with the loader Library IP Input Files Verde s library IP loader loads the library IP input file This input file contains a list of IP range records for an existing library that need to be added to or removed from the Verde database The library IP loader cannot update records in the database The input file contains columns for the fields in the Verde database and rows for each record being loaded The library IP input file s columns are described in Table 59 Since IP ranges are associated with a specific library ensure that the library record exists in the Verde database before you load IP ranges for the library The library IP input file has the same rules as the library input file For a description of these rules see Library Input File Rules on page 315 324 Chapter 29 Library Library Contact and Library IP Input Files Library IP Input File Fields The following table describes the input file fields for the library IP loader Table 59 Library IP Input File Fields Field Name Type of Field Description Mandatory Fields Library code The code of the library in Verde with which the IP range records are associated If this field is blank the record will be rejected and an error will appear in the loader s log file The start of the IP address range for the organization The end of the IP address range for the organization Exclude Boolean Indicates whether this IP is excluded fro
172. bility Setup Guide This section contains information on Verde SFX interoperability and describes in detail the process of synchronizing e product updates with SFX For information on setting up Verde SFX interoperability refer to the Verde SFX Interoperability Setup Guide Verde Staff User s Guide 476 Verde SFX Interoperability Verde and SFX communicate with each other in a number of different ways in order to provide the following functionality Transfer locally created Verde e product and work records to SFX Activation deactivation When an e product of type e constituent e package or e standalone is activated or deactivated in Verde an update is sent to SFX Update coverage When the local coverage of an e product of type e standalone e package or e constituent is updated an update is sent to SFX Update embargo When the local embargo is updated on an e standalone or e constituent the data is sent to SFX Update active libraries When the list of active libraries is changed Verde sends the data to SFX Verde can update only SFX institutes it does not update SFX groups Update availability status If an e product is flagged as temporarily unavailable in Verde SFX status is updated to down SFX is updated when the e product becomes available again This functionality is available for e standalones and e packages Full Text Fulltext available vis EBSCOhost Academic Abstracts Full
173. bliographic Identifier E ISSN E eISSN E ISBN E eISBN Verde Identifier E SFX internal ID E Verde e product code E Verde work expression code Note If you choose to use an SFX ID as the unique identifier for each record and you want to edit the file in Excel format the ID column as text If the ID column is in general or number format Excel does not store any digits past the 15th digit and the data is lost Mandatory Field Yes For updated e constituent records Chapter 25 e Constituent Input Files Field Name Title main title Type of Field Table 43 e Constituent Input File Fields Field Length Record Type Description The title of the e constituent being added to the Verde database Mandatory Field Yes For work records associated with new e constituent records Title sub title The sub title of the e constituent being added to the Verde database Title number of part The part number included in the title of the e constituent being added to the Verde database e Product type The type of resource E journal E book E citation E dissertation For a full list of the work record e product types see the table Work Record e Product Types on page 63 Yes For work records associated with new e constituent records 247 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 43 e Constituent Inpu
174. cannot be sent SFX is busy your sync SFX is processing an Wait and try again request cannot be earlier request processed Your sync process There is a problem Report the error to your DBA or cannot be processed at with the SFX server server manager this time the SFX server is not responding 492 Chapter 50 Synchronizing e Product Updates with SFX The Verde and SFX KB revision numbers do not match the sync process has been aborted Table 88 Synchronization Errors Description There is problem with the KnowledgeBase levels Synchronization is not permitted Recommended Action Report the error to your DBA or server manager They need to run a KB update on either Verde or SFX To verify your Verde KnowlegeBase level click the Verde logo in the KB Manager module For details see Verde Modules on page 18 Failed to initiate the sync process There is a problem with Verde Report the error to your DBA or server manager The sync process for this e product cannot be initiated at this time the sync task is already running Please try again after the sync job has completed Failed to add local created e products to SFX A synchronization task is already running SFX was not able to create new records and return SFX IDs to Verde Try again later Report the error to the SFX liaison There is already an SFX TARGET entry with the value title of pa
175. ce data from the matching column is not used when creating a new work or e product record this field ensures that new work records have a bibliographic identifier The International Standard Book Number is a unique bibliographic identifier Since data from the matching column is not used when creating a new work or e product record this field ensures that new work records have a bibliographic identifier 263 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 49 e Standalone Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Description Mandatory Field Type Length Field The International Standard Book Number for the electronic version of a book This is a unique bibliographic identifier Since data from the matching column is not used when creating a new work or e product record this field ensures that new work records have a bibliographic identifier Abbreviated title Imprint place of publisher The e standalone s abbreviated title The place of publishing Imprint publisher The name of the publisher e Product format Local category main category The format of the resource The main category of the resource assigned locally Local category sub category The sub category of the resource assigned locally Local field lt number gt One of the e product s nine local fields LCCN 264 Library of Congress
176. ce must be configured as a library of type institute in the central instance Then it will display in the Libraries tab of the e product When an e product is localized that is either an e status or a selection status is assigned the Libraries tab must be edited by the user or it will default to the library default behavior that is set in the library record To make the e product available to a member select the corresponding library from the list of libraries in the e product Libraries tab In each library record there is a flag to indicate if the default is to make this library active or inactive Selecting all will make the e product available to all members Note that at least one library must be selected If no default behavior is set and the e product library is not edited then the system will automatically assign the value all meaning that the e product is available to all libraries The e product libraries must be set in e package and e standalone records e Constituent records can either inherit the library settings from their package record or they can have their own settings e Constituents should have independent library settings only if their library settings differ from that of the package To create e constituent level library settings click the Add button in the e constituent record s Libraries tab Select the appropriate libraries from the library list and then click Submit Note that in e constituent records the Lib
177. cense record is connected to multiple e products you can open it for editing from the License Records List of each of the e products to which it is 107 Verde Staff User s Guide 108 connected Once a license record is linked to an e product the Related tab is displayed This tab displays the e product title e product status and selection status of each e product that is connected to the license record You can navigate to an e product by clicking the e product name link El Metapress Allerton Press 9 Metapress o Am OD e Package type Selective License New status Production Active 19 Jun 2008 Summary Description Terms Notes License review Locations Users Back to list x gt oS e Product Submit Cancel Figure 50 License Record Related Tab Note When you delete a license record that is linked to multiple e products the record is deleted from every one of the e products to which it is connected Duplicating Licenses The Duplicate License button is available in the License Records List s Actions column All licenses and prevailing term records can be duplicated for the same e product When licenses are duplicated all fields except the license start and end date and license status are copied Note that you must have editing privileges to be able to duplicate licenses See Copying and Pasting e Product Data on page 57 for more information about duplicating license information from one e produ
178. ces serves as the central instance while the other instances are member instances In Verde the shared consortium environment provides tools to support the management of shared and non shared resources as well as enhanced cross consortium search and filter capabilities cross consortium navigation merged displays and cross consortium reporting Definition of Terms Multi instance a Verde installation that works in a mode that supports interaction between the instances Shared consortium environment shared model the multi instance model that includes a central instance and cooperation between the member instances Non shared model the multi instance model that may support cooperation but does not support sharing between instances Central instance sometimes referred to as the shared instance This is the instance that is responsible for managing shared resources The central instance cannot be a member instance Member instance an instance that is part of the consortium but is not the central instance Sometimes referred to as a local instance Institute a subdivision of an instance In the central instance each local instance should be defined as an institute its Related Instance value should be defined as member instance Local Institute a particular library within a member instance In the central instance each local institute can be defined using the Related Institute field Verde Staff Use
179. ch esecenensh bese sieccontive 425 The Profiles Tapren seesinane iain 427 About the Profiles Tab nanne enne envensennennennvense eneen eenvenvennenn 427 Creating a New ProStreet ens 428 Editing a Profile REoStd nnmenaen eeen 430 Deleting a Profile ummeke 431 The Configuration Tab nnen 433 About the Configuration T AD enmet 433 Configuring External Services antenna drenten 433 Configuring the e Product SUMMA onderne annet 436 Table of Contents Part 6 Shared Consortium Environments Chapter 44 Chapter 45 Chapter 46 Chapter 47 Environment Chapter 48 The Shared Consortium Environment ven voon vene sonen onse neneneneen 441 Definition of TEMS emendata 441 Setting Up a Shared Consortium Environment sesesessosesesesessssesee 443 Setting Up the System Configuration Parameters 443 Configuring MSS amedee angenent 444 Selecting Instance Abbreviations sunandae ea 446 Working with SETS en eene 447 Setting Up Guest Profiles Jameson 449 Copy Paste Attribute Profiles aannemende 450 Multi Instance Report Profiles czicissascaictdsncisviasatedenoletianndasixtatanabaniavssan 451 Working in a Shared Consortium Environment ensen vonenen 453 Managing Resources Centrally sissen teiten 453 EP ROM UGE Libraries Anansie edndaennrmanet 454 CONO Level remember dente 455 e Prod ct ZiT IOS zenennivetrerten coieshanradiqpicpacupsecanlaxacentyia iia 455 Managing Resources Locally nsezsnesnsaneeeannerreannenstdene andes 455 BPR CE
180. ckage SFX was not able to create a new target record because a target with that name already exists Check the situation in Verde and take the appropriate actions so that there are not two packages with the same name During the synchronization process the sync status display field in the e product brief summary displays the changing status of the synchronization The status moves through the following in sequence 1 Sync required 2 Adding new records 3 In process Verde 4 Sync waiting for SFX 5 In process SFX 6 Synced Once the sync process has been initiated click the check status link that displays in the e product summary to report on the status of the sync process A popup window opens with the current status of the sync process If there is a 493 Verde Staff User s Guide 494 problem with the sync process the process will be cancelled and the e product flagged as sync required Once an e product has been synced a sync status display field appears in the e product brief summary and displays one of the following statuses Done SFX updated SFX is updated successfully and no further action is required Done SFX not updated The synchronization was completed but resulted in no changes to SFX Done SFX setup required SFX is updated successfully and SFX setup is required for the e product For information about performing SFX setup see Performing SFX Setup on page 5
181. clude all content found in the equivalent print version Possible values are Present Absent Chapter 28 License Input Files Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name _ Typeof Record Concurrency with print version Field Type License Description The presence of a provision in the contract stating that the licensed materials are available before or no later than the equivalent print version and or are kept current Possible values are Present Absent Mandatory Field Intellectual User information confidentiality Boolean Boolean License License A clause in which the licensor warrants that making the licensed materials available does not infringe upon the intellectual property rights of any third parties The requirement that user data should not be shared with third parties reused or resold without permission UCITA override clause indicator Boolean License A clause that reflects the licensor s agreement to use U S state contract law in the event UCITA is ever passed and implemented in the specified governing law state 307 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Type of Record Field Description Mandatory Field Type Length Field Click wrap Boolean License A clause indicating modification that the negotiated agreement supersedes any click through click wrap other user
182. cope of your search m Find Local These searches are performed in the local KnowledgeBase and retrieve matching records that have been created locally or records from the Global KnowledgeBase that have been localized by adding a local selection status and or an e product status or by adding an attribute record m Find All These searches are performed in the entire KnowledgeBase and retrieve matching records regardless of their local status If you are working in a multi instance non shared environment right click the Find button and in the pop up window choose the instances that you want to search Select Search KB to include e products from the Chapter 3 Overview of e Product Management KnowledgeBase that are not active or local in your search Click Find to activate the search If you are working in a multi instance shared environment see Search Display and Navigation in a Shared Consortium Environment on page 459 for information on the available search and display options Viewing Search Results The e products and work records for information on work records see About Work Records on page 35 that meet the criteria of your search are displayed in the e product management area Above the table a summary line is displayed indicating the search term the total number of e product work records retrieved by the search and if you are working in a multi instance non shared environment the instances that were sea
183. cord to Evaluation Table 46 Updating Selection Status to Evaluation Match Standalone Match Interface Selection Status m You can link several new e standalone records to the same e interface record in one input file If the e interface record does not exist in the Verde KnowledgeBase before the loading process specify the name of the new e interface record in the Interface Name column for the first e standalone record appearing in the input file Include the interface name in lt gt brackets in the Match Interface column for all subsequent e standalone records in the same input file The following example illustrates how to create six new e standalone records linked to the new e interface CSA Illumina record Table 47 Create Six e Standalone Records Linked to the CSA Illumina Record Match Match Title Main Title e Product Interface Standalone Interface Type Name CSA Aerospace amp DATABASE CSA High Technology Illumina database lt CSA CSA Agricultural DATABASE Illumina gt and Environmental Biotechnology Abstracts lt CSA CSA Aluminum DATABASE Illumina gt Industry Abstracts lt CSA CSA ANTE DATABASE Illumina gt Abstracts in New Technologies and Engineering lt CSA CSA ASFA 3 DATABASE Illumina gt Aquatic Pollution and Environmental Quality 259 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 47 Create Six e Standalone Records Linked to the CSA Illumina Record Match Match Title M
184. ct to another Deleting Licenses Licenses can be deleted only before they have been approved Once a license has been assigned a status of Approved or Retired it cannot be deleted You can delete licenses only from the parent level record and only if you have delete privileges Licenses that have been inherited or licenses that are related to a workflow cannot be deleted To delete a license that can be deleted click the Delete button in the license details screen Chapter 10 License Records Printing and E Mailing License Records The Print and E Mail buttons appear in the license details screen When a license is printed the printout includes all fields that contain data In addition the following items are included in the printout m license terms m license notes E license reviews The titles of all e products that are covered by the license are also included in the printout When the E Mail button is clicked a screen opens prompting you to enter a the addresses of the sender and recipient a subject and a note The body of the e mail message contains all fields in the license that contain data License Record Tabs License records are considered active when they have the status Approved The status of the license determines the list of mandatory fields m When a license is new there are no mandatory fields m When a license is Active or Retired the following are mandatory m Licensee Licensor Start and end date
185. d Abstract the corresponding Verde package will be based on the combination of the target and the Full Text service The Abstract service will not be converted to Verde Most Verde packages match targets with the Full Text service However if a target in SFX does not have the Full Text service but has for example the Abstract and Table of Contents services the matching Verde package will be based on the combination of the target and the Abstract service In this case the Table of Contents service will not be converted to Verde If an e product requires further tasks these tasks must be performed in SEX The following may be required and can be performed in SFX only m Setting up linking m Setting a user name and password for access to an e product m Activating lower services if there is more than one service related to a particular target The highest level service is activated automatically by the synchronization process when the target is activated in Verde whereas the others should be activated manually in SEX After SFX synchronization Verde informs you of which e products require SFX setup SFX setup can be performed using SFX only The following are optional and you may want to perform them in SFX after synchronization Setting the public name Setting the proxy to yes Adding authentication information Adding a public note Setting JKEY for locally created e products Setting auto active status for locally create
186. d e products Chapter 50 Synchronizing e Product Updates with SFX Synchronizing Locally Created e Products Records of e products that are locally created and are therefore not part of the Ex Libris KnowledgeBase can be transferred from Verde to SFX automatically as part of the synchronization process Records are transferred from Verde to SFX if they meet the following criterion the record is a work e package or e constituent record the update target of the package or the e constituent s package is SFX the record does not have an SFX ID e Standalone records are not transferred automatically to SFX even if the update target is SFX For more information about synchronizing e standalone records see e Standalone Records on page 491 Adding New Records Once synchronization has been initiated for an e package Verde checks to see that the package and all of its constituents have SFX IDs Records that do not have SFX IDs are not part of the SFX KnowledgeBase and Verde must transfer the record to SFX When this occurs the sync status Adding new records will appear in the e product summary 489 Verde Staff User s Guide The following table shows the relationship between entities in Verde and in SFX Table 85 Relationship Between Entities in Verde and SFX Verde Entity SFX Entity Work Object e Constituent Object portfolio e Package Target Target service full text e Interface Interface e Standalone
187. d for creating a new organization When an organization code is added or updated more than once in an input file the values specified in the last update are saved in the database Organization Contact Input Files Verde s organization contact loader loads the organization contact input file This input file contains a list of organization contact records for an existing organization that need to be added to or updated in the Verde database The input file contains columns for the fields in the Verde database and rows for each record being loaded Since organization contacts are associated with a specific organization ensure that the organization record exists in the Verde database before you load organization contacts for the organization The organization contact input file s columns are described in Table 63 The organization contact input file follows the same rules as the organization input file For a description of these rules see Organization Input File Rules on page 327 331 Verde Staff User s Guide Organization Contact Input File Fields The following table describes the input file fields for the organization contact loader Field Name Organization code Contact name Table 63 Organization Contact Input File Fields Type of Field Field Length Description The Verde code of the organization with which the organization contact record is associated If this field is blank the record will be
188. de Staff User s Guide 162 17 Organization Management This section includes About Organization Management on page 163 m Viewing the Organization List on page 164 m Organization Details on page 165 About Organization Management In addition to e products Verde has two other entities Organizations and Libraries Organization records are created for the various external organizations that the library communicates with in the course of managing electronic resources that vendors and e interfaces provide An organization record can be of one of the following types E a consortium member a consortium an interface provider a licensing agent a licensor a vendor An organization s role determines its relationship with an e product For example the organization type Interface provider is generally associated with an e interface Each organization can have multiple roles Each organization also has several contacts A contact is a person who has one or more of the following roles m Technical support m Account manager Verde Staff User s Guide Sales representative License contact Trial contact Consortium contact Other Organizations are used in the following Verde areas m e Interfaces associated with the organization type Interface provider m Acquisition records associated with the organization type Vendor m License records associated with the organization types Licensing agent and Licens
189. der s log file Contact name The library contact s name Job title The library contact s job title Email The library contact s e mail address Phone No The library contact s phone number Alternate The library contact s secondary phone No phone number Fax No The library contact s fax number Street The name of the street in the library contact s address 321 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 58 Library Contact Input File Fields Field Name Field Description Mandatory Length Fields City The city in the library contact s address State Province The province in the library contact s address Country Text The country in the library contact s address Postal code Text The zip code in the library contact s address Main contact Boolean The library s main contact There are two possible values 1 Yes or 0 No If left blank the default value 0 is saved Note that only one contact per library can be defined as the main contact 322 Chapter 29 Library Library Contact and Library IP Input Files Table 58 Library Contact Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Field Description Mandatory Field Length Fields Contact role The role of the library contact The possible values are E Other E ILS Acquisitions E ILS Cataloging E e Product sponsor E Selector E Donor E e Product ACQ contact E e Product
190. ditional information necessary for specifications of termination rights Termination requirement note Attachment full path 312 License License A clarification of the termination requirements and what certification of the requirement activities is necessary Full path of license attachment on the server For loading multiple license attachments insert paths separated by semicolons Make sure that the full path can be reached from the Verde server To delete a license attachment set the value to lt NULL gt Chapter 28 License Input Files License Loader Workflow After Verde verifies that the license input file is in the correct format and includes mandatory columns Verde examines the value in the Match column m If the Match column value is a title workexpression code SFX ID or e product code Verde searches for a related e product m Ifno match is found the line is rejected m If Verde retrieves matches for more than one e product the line is rejected m If only one related e product is found Verde verifies that values exist for the mandatory fields If the input file includes mandatory fields the program progresses to the next stage If a field is blank or a column is removed from the input file the default value is saved in the database The default values are taken from two areas m The program first checks the default values defined in the Task Properties
191. dmin trial and workflow Each section summarizes relevant values for example the Trial section includes trial parameters status start and end dates and so forth The Summary tab includes several types of data text icons and links The text is displayed regardless of your user permissions However you can link to the attribute records only if you have the appropriate privileges For example you can link to the license record only if you have privileges to view licenses Ei Q AIP Scitation American Association of Physics Teachers g AIP Scitation Status Production Active 06 Sep 2007 e Package type Selective Status Production Active 06 Aug 2007 Summary Gl E Product Title AIP Scitation American Association of Physics Product Teachers Acquisition Coverage e Product Type Verde Package License Interface AIP Scitation Consortial purchase Managed locally Access Free Yes ad mn El E Product More Info Trial E Libraries Cost Usage E License Workflow Bl Acquisitions ca Admin E Trial al Workflow Figure 26 Summary Tab 51 Verde Staff User s Guide The Summary tab includes the following fields Table 3 Summary Tab Section Fields Comments e Product Title of e product For e constituent summary contains also titles of related e package and of e interface Coverage If local coverage exists it is displayed If not global coverage is shown
192. e Mandatory Field 303 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Type of Record Field Length Course pack electronic Field Type License Description The right to use licensed materials in collections or compilations of materials assembled in an electronic format by faculty members for use by students in a class for purposes of instruction The possible values are E Null Field left blank E Not applicable E Permitted explicit E Permitted interpreted E Prohibited explicit E Prohibited interpreted E Silent These values can be customized in the code table Mandatory Field Course pack term note License Information that qualifies a permissions statement on Course Packs Remote access Number License The right of an authorized user to gain access to an Electronic Product from an offsite location Walk in term use note 304 License Information that qualifies the status or permitted actions of Walk In Users Chapter 28 License Input Files Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Field Name Type of Record Perpetual access rights Field Type License Length Description The right to permanently access the licensed materials paid for during the period of the license agreement The possible values are E Null Field left blank E No E Unde
193. e Field Name Sponsoring library Table 49 e Standalone Input File Fields Field Length Record Type e Product Description The library name of the library responsible for the e product Mandatory Field Library contact e Product The library contact name of the contact in the library responsible for the e product Public note e Product A note displayed in external applications such as the OPAC A Z lists and SFX Currently not functional Internal note e Product A note displayed to Verde staff only SFX ID MetaLib ID e Product e Product Pointer to a matching record in SFX For records that are part of the Global Knowledge Base this value is set and cannot be updated manually Pointer to a matching record in MetaLib ID number e Product Pointer to a record ID in an alternate system ID source e Product The name of the alternate system Title key 270 e Product A locally defined abbreviated title that can be added to the URL for direct linking Chapter 26 e Standalone Input Files Field Name Suppress Table 49 e Standalone Input File Fields Field Type of Record Field Boolean Type e Product Length Description Indicates if the e product is hidden from public view Currently not functional Mandatory Field e Product Indicates whether the available r
194. e licensor Licensor originalLicensor Licensee Original licensor Licensee licensingAgent Licensing agent localLicenseNegotiator Local license negotiator deliveryRequirements Delivery requirements licenseURI License URI licenseURIType License URI type physicalLocation Physical location fileLocation File location vendorAdvancedNotice vendorAdvancedNoticeVal Vendor advanced notice Vendor advanced notice value noticePeriodCode Notice period code licensingNote publicNote Licensing note Public note replacedBy Replaced by Replaces linkedLicenseNote Replaces Linked license note renewCancMNote Renew cancellation method Note renewalDate Renewal date license createdBy Created by license updatedBy Updated by license createdDate Created date license updateDate Update date generalTermsNote General terms note userRestrictionsNote useRestrictionsNote User restrictions note Use restrictions note Chapter 21 View Report Output Table 26 Report of Active e Products Without Licenses Internal Name authorizesUserDef Display name Authorizes user definition localSuthorizesUserDef Local authorizes user definition fairUseClauseCode allRightsReservedCode Fair use clause All rights reserved code dbProtectionOverrideC
195. e Coverage visible 9 Interface visible M ee Consortial purchase visible WW Free visible M e Figure 149 Configuration Tab e Product Summary Configuration By default all sections and fields are selected and the e Product section is expanded m To prevent a section from being displayed in the e product Summary screen clear in the Visible check box in the section s title bar For example if you clear the Visible check box in the Trial section s title bar as illustrated below the Trial section will not be displayed in the e product Summary screen a rrian Expanded TT visible el Start date visible 7 e amp End date visible A H Status visible 7 amp H Decision date visible 7 Purchase decision visible O H amp Figure 150 Trial Section Clearing the Visible Check Box To prevent a field from being displayed in the e product Summary screen clear the Visible check box at the end of the field s row For example if you clear the Software requirements public and View Admin settings fields these fields will not be displayed in the e product Summary screen 437 Verde Staff User s Guide m To change the display order of a section in the e product Summary screen click the Up or Down arrow in the section title bar E Libraries Expanded Visible M Lel el El License Expanded Visible Pe Figure 151 Up and Down Arrows Section Title Bar m To change t
196. e Library code SFX Institute code Library name Library role Lz Sa Alternate name 1 Institute Alternate name 2 Role note 5 Alternate name 3 zl Zi Guest member No C Yes Related Instance z Default library access C Exclude Include Full time employess o es Faculty Do P P e i Submit Cancel Figure 82 Library List Details Mandatory Fields Contacts Tab Any number of contacts can be defined for each library Each contact can have one or more roles Alternatively there can be one or more contacts with the same role The following library roles are available m e Product sponsor m Selector E Donor E e Product ACQ contact B e Product license contact E e Product access contact m Purchase partner contact m SFX MetaLib m Other m ILS Acquisition a ILS Cataloging 172 Chapter 18 Library Management To add anew contact click the Add Contact button The contact name and e mail address are mandatory fields Other fields can either be completed or left blank If no role is selected the role Other is assigned by default Details Contacts IPs lists Proxy server Add Contact Expand all Collapse all El ContactName Job Title Roles Main contact no x Contact Name Main contact No C Yes Job Title Contact role Do ILS Acquisition Email ILS Cataloging METALIB a Phone no nnn Contact role note aj Alternate phone no Fax n
197. e admin library organization records in the input file 365 Verde Staff User s Guide Number of existing records Table 71 Load Report Summary Description The number of existing e constituent acquisition license admin library organization records that updated successfully Number of rejected records The number of e constituent acquisition license admin library organization records that were rejected Viewing the Report File The report file contains summary details regarding each of the input file s records jj D E LF G eel 4 Match fielc e Product e Product License name License ccStatus Cause 2 CEP 1123 Administra CEP_1123 basic1 Reject Licensee is a mandatory field 3 CEP 1123340540995 952550 Reject mistake is not allowed value for License method 4 CEP 1123340540996 9525650 Reject field General terms note size validation error ESA Reject Match value is missing 6 LIC1183581417660_1 update regular LIC118358 Reject Regular license cannot be updated to prevailing type P LIC1189001807067 3 update a license LIC118900 Reject License LIC1189001507067_3 has status Approved anc 8 LIC1202996896270_1 update a license wLIC120299 Reject License LIC1202996896270_1 has status Retired and t 9 LIC1202997102676_3 update a privailing LIC120299 Reject Prevailing terms record cannot be created invalid licens 10 LIC1200491376622_5 dependencies cherLIC120049 Reject Licens
198. e eProduct Code eProduct Type Processing Date and Time 4 CEP 1123334177030 612019 e Package 30 08 2007 17 54 16 5 CEP 1123334172775 611701 e Package 30 08 2007 17 54 16 6 CEP_1123334175516 611903 e Package 30 08 2007 17 55 19 7 CEP 1123334170350 611523 e Package 30 08 2007 18 01 03 8 CEP 1123334185868 612547 e Package 30 08 2007 18 33 41 _9 ICEP 1146456568183 _24 e Package 30 08 2007 18 33 42 10 CEP 1137339370092 56 e Package 30 08 2007 18 34 26 11 ICEP 1157550614384 146836 e Package 30 08 2007 18 36 12 Figure 187 Batch Synchronization Sample Output Report CSV File In the default Verde output report format the report provides the following information m e Product Code The unique code for each e product that was processed during the synchronization e Product Type Displays either e Package or an e Standalone Processing Date and Time The date and time of the e product processing Note If a custom report format is used the report may display a different set of output fields Monitoring Synchronization History You can view the synchronization history per e product or for the entire instance The sync history enables you to manage the synchronization status of the e products in your instance 499 Verde Staff User s Guide 500 To view the synchronization history for a specific e product From the e product record in the KB Manager module click the Sync History tab The SFX Sync History screen is di
199. e details in the Create New Organization pop up window and clicking Submit Budget BUDGETS The name of the budget or fund that is paying for the subscription Renewal cancellation Advance notification period SUBSCRIPTION NOTIFICATION The number of days before the acquisition end date that an alert should be sent to acquisition staff to review the acquisition record Auto renewal AUTORENEWAL Controls renewal Acquisition records that are marked for auto renewal are renewed by the Verde task Subscription Renewal Advance notice date ADVANCE NOTICEDATE Calculated by the system based on the Advance notification period and the acquisition end date Renewal cancellation date Renewal cancellation decision note RENEWCANC DATE RENEWCANC DESCISION NOTE Date on which the acquisition record was renewed or cancelled The reason for canceling or renewing the subscription Renewal cancellation note for ILS RENEWCANC NOTEILS Send display in ILS Renewal cancellation note for vendor RENEWCANC NOTEVENDOR Sent to vendor Print cancellation restriction PRINTCANCEL RESTRICTION Contractual restrictions on canceling subscriptions for print versions of journals contained in the package Print cancellation note PRINTCANCEL NOTE Note field Additional information about specific cancellation restrictions for print versions of
200. e managed centrally are activated in the center for one or more member instances Resources that are managed locally are activated acquired and licensed by the member instance in the member instance The central instance is responsible for the management of shared resources that is resources that are active for one or more member instances The management of shared resources involves activating the resources for one or more member instances as well as managing acquisitions and or licensing of the same resources Member instances are responsible for managing the local data that is maintained for shared resources as well as managing all aspects of local resources Managing Resources Centrally Resources that are managed centrally are activated and controlled in the center for member instances This means that data that resides in the e product record namely status selection status activation from date expiration date coverage embargo and availability among other fields is all set in the center and applies to all members that receive it from the center If an e product is managed in the center for a member instance then the e product from the center will be retrieved when searching the member instance The e product will also display from the member instance Verde Staff User s Guide e Product Libraries The e product Libraries tab is used to designate for which consortium members the e product is managed Each member instan
201. e status Requested or On hold can be deleted View cost Allows viewing cost records Create edit cost Allows creating editing and duplicating cost records Delete cost Allows deleting cost records 397 Verde Staff User s Guide Attribute Workflow Privilege View usage Table 73 KB Manager Module Privileges Description Allows viewing usage records Create edit usage Allows creating editing and duplicating usage records Delete usage Handle a workflow Allows deleting usage records Allows handling a workflow Start a workflow Allows starting license and acquisition workflows Cancel a workflow Allows canceling a workflow Organization View library Allows viewing library library contact IP range and proxy server records Create edit library Allows creating and editing library library contact IP range and proxy server records Also allows deleting of library contact IP range and proxy server records Delete library View organization Allows deleting library library contact IP range and proxy server records Note A library that is being used in the environment for example the library is selected as a sponsoring library for a certain e product cannot be deleted Allows viewing organizations and organization contacts Create edit organization KB Tools Module Privileges Allows creati
202. e Input File Fields Field Length Record Type License Description Date of renewal Mandatory Field License execution date Standard duration License License The date on which the license was executed The period of time covered by the license agreement Used when licenses are renewed Can be defined in weeks months and years Yes For several license statuses Standard duration value License The period of time covered by the license agreement The possible values are B Weeks B Months E Years These fields can be customized in the code table Vendor Advance notice Integer License The amount of time before the license expires by which you need to cancel your subscription This can be defined in one of the following measurements B Weeks B Months B Years The measurement is defined according to the value of the Vendor Advance notice value 285 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Type of Record Field Description Mandatory Field Type Length Field Vendor Advance License The measurement notice value used for Vendor advance notice The possible values are E Days E Weeks B Months These fields can be customized in the code table License A clause that specifies Yes For a new whether renewal is license automatic or explicit The possible values are B Autom
203. e Input File Fields Field Length Type of Record Field Type License Description The condition under which the licensee terminated an acquisition during a contract period The possible values are E Null Field left blank E At will E Breach by licensor E Other These values can be customized in the code table Mandatory Field Licensee termination Integer License License The time interval in which the Licensee Notice Period for Termination by the library is measured The amount of advance notice required prior to contract termination by the licensee The possible values are E Days E Weeks E Months These fields can be customized in the code table Boolean License The ability of a Licensor to terminate an acquisition during a contract period 311 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Licensor termination condition Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Length License Description The conditions under which the licensor terminated an acquisition during a contract period Mandatory Field Licensor termination notice period License The amount of advance notice required prior to contract termination by the licensor Licensor termination notice period operator License The time interval in which the licensor notice period for termination is measured Termination right note License Ad
204. e Start date End date License status License type ID Actions 23 Aug 2006 1 May 2007 Approved Regular LIC1167036547959_21 if License 1 Jan 2006 1 De 0 Apr ed Reguler 1C116703601981 Access Figure 54 Prevailing Term Records A prevailing term record must then be defined by clicking the Add Prevailing Terms button in order to store the license terms that govern the e product Prevailing term records have the same fields as license records however the following differences exist m The license type is automatically defined as Prevailing 116 Chapter 10 License Records m There are only two statuses Active and Inactive Back to list Summary Description Terms Notes Prevailing Review Locations Users e Product a Type Prevailing L acquisition Prevailing terms active zl Prevailing terms name i License Prevailing terms Inactive a Prevailing terms method Click through 5 status note im 7 oO Admin Prevailing terms nn z Trial start date Licensor Prevailing terms ZE Ean ond dake Original licensor Usage Date Renewed Prevailing terms EI Licensee Workflow execution date B Submit Cancel Figure 55 Prevailing Terms Status Note Only users with editing privileges can create prevailing term records License Workflows A Verde workflow for licensing is initiated when a trial has ended with the decision to purchase See Permissions on page 159 for mor
205. e alerted to the decision status Note that the decision status can be changed before the trial has been completed Trial status E Requested The Trial status is a mandatory field that may be updated either manually or by the Trial Management task The E On trial task updates the trial s status according to trial s start and end dates as follows E On hold E Approved E Trial over E From the status Approved to the status On hold or On trial when the start date is reached E Fromthe status On trial to the status Trial over when the end date is reached All other changes should be performed manually For more information about trial participant alerts see Trial Workflow on page 148 413 Verde Staff User s Guide Privileges Permission Table 80 Privileges Table Functional Fields Values KB Tools and KB Manager permissions Verde permissions allow performing certain actions in the KB Manager and KB Tools modules For details see KB Manager Module Privileges on page 392 and KB Tools Module Privileges on page 398 Profile Default profile names B Access E Acquisitions E Guest E Licensor E Selector E Trial Profile definitions include specific granular authorizations or permissions as well as restrictions A staff user associated with a particular profile is able to activate only those functions allowed by this profile For more information see The Profiles Tab on page 42
206. e and Provider These fields can be customized by modifying the code table IP address registration instructions IPADDRESS REG INSTRUCTION The URI at which IP addresses are registered the email address or contact role to which updates are sent or other relevant instructions IP address general note IPADDRESS GENERAL NOTE Additional notes pertaining to IP address information Access record ID ACCESSCODE The access code Creation date CREATION DATE The date on which the access record was created 123 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 11 Data Tab Fields Relevant Access Description Latest update CREATEDBY UPDATEDATE Type Verde user Contains the ID of the staff person who created the admin record The date on which the access record was updated By UPDATEDBY Verde user Contains the ID of the staff person who created the admin record Primary access URI WWW_ PRIMARY ACCESSURI The method of access the location and the file name of an e product Primary access URI type WWW_ PRIMARY ACCESSURI TYPE The type of URI being used to locate and identify the product The possible values are E URL E URN E Undetermined These fields can be customized by modifying the code table Alternate URI WWW_ ALTERNATE URI An alternate URI available for access to an identical or alternate version of the resou
207. e can include only the following characters a z A Z 1 10 _ underscore If an organization code value in the input file includes other characters the code will be converted by Verde The original code will be saved as an external code The converted code will be saved as an organization code Chapter 30 Organization and Organization Contact Input Files Organization Input File Fields The following table describes the input file fields for the organization loader Field Name Organization code Organization Name Table 62 Organization Input File Fields Type of Field Description The organization code If this field is blank the record will be rejected and an error will appear in the loader s log file An alternate name used for the organization The organization can have up to three different alternate names Mandatory Fields Yes For new records Alternate name lt number gt Text An alternate name used for the organization Active Boolean Indicates whether an organization is active or inactive The possible values are 0 or 1 where E 1 Active E 0 Inactive If this field is left blank the Active default value is saved for the new organization Street The street name in the organization s address City The city in which the organization is located State Province Country The state or province in which the organization
208. e constituent Final Approval e package e standalone or e interface or Rejected Note that the e product selection status is indexed and can be searched online using the status index The e Products by Selection Status Verde report can also be used for this purpose Evaluating e Constituents During the evaluation process selectors review e constituents and update their selection status to Approved or Rejected e Constituents of selective packages can be updated by clicking the e constituents Update buttons in the package list You can updated multiple e constituents by adding them to the basket and using the update function in the basket In addition an e constituent loader exists to simultaneously update the status of large groups of e constituents within a package For more information on the e constituent loader see e Constituent Input Files on page 243 Note e Constituents of selective packages should be reviewed and approved or rejected after the e package has been approved but before the e package is updated to Final Approval or Rejected Chapter 8 Selection Workflows Review The review process is performed regularly for subscriptions that are not automatically renewed typically on an annual basis During the review process selectors evaluate acquisition records and the e products that are purchased through these records paying attention to both usage and cost data At the end of the review process e products are
209. e five fields that are set globally m SFX ID Chapter 7 e Product Records Global holdings Global embargo JKEY Belongs to package Editing e Package and e Standalone Records e Package and e standalone records are both attached to e interfaces When activating an e package or e standalone the system checks the status of the attached e interface record If it is not already active the system activates it using the same Active from date as the lower level record The e product status is set to Production e Package records have six fields that are set globally m e Product type m e Package type m Global holdings m Global embargo u SFX ID In e package records this is the SFX Target Service Internal ID In e standalone records that come from SEX this is the SFX Object Portfolio Internal ID m Belongs to interface All other fields can be set locally Note that e packages rarely have global holdings data e Standalone records have five fields that are set globally e Product type Global holdings Global embargo Belongs to interface SFX ID This is the SFX Object Portfolio Internal ID Deleting e Product Records In a single instance environment e product records that were created locally can be deleted only if the e product record does not have any associated attribute records If an e product has associated attribute records these records must be deleted before you can delete the e product record In
210. e information In addition licenses can be managed using a combination of online and batch processes The process for adding new licenses as well as negotiating and approving them is manual The Report of Active e Products without Licenses can be used to create a report of active e products without licenses The General Report of e Products can be used to create a report of licenses with a particular statuses In addition you can locate e products with a particular license status using the online search The License renewal type controls the manner in which licenses are renewed The following rules govern license renewal m Perpetual licenses do not need to be renewed Automatic licenses are renewed automatically when the acquisition record for the e product is renewed m Explicit Renewal licenses must be renewed by clicking the Renew button The Renew button is displayed above the license details when a license is renewable Renewing a license extends the license end date by the license standard duration The Verde License Renewal task renews licenses that are about to expire It also creates a report of licenses that have to be renewed explicitly and are up for renewal The license renewal process uses the Vendor advance notice field in the license to determine when licenses should be reported for renewal 117 Verde Staff User s Guide 118 11 Access Records This section includes m About Access Records on page 1
211. e license start and end dates IP ranges are defined per library or per license Licensed libraries are listed in the Allowed Location tab of the license Task properties Run on instances Sort by e Product type IP Types Run on library Include Organizations on Figure 103 Report of IP Ranges by Licensor 195 Verde Staff User s Guide 196 You can define the following parameters for this report Instance available in consortium environment only Note that only instances in which the user was granted permission to run the report are displayed in the report form Sort by Options are m Organization m Library E e Product title e Product type m e Interface m e Package m e Standalone m e Constituent IP types m Internal taken from the Library record m IP for Vendor taken from the Library record m License IP range entered directly on the license allowed location tab Run on libraries Clicking on the ellipsis on the right hand side of the field activates a pop up window displaying a list of defined libraries with filter option by role Include Organizations Clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the field activates a pop up window of organizations licensors with filter option by role 21 View Report Output This section includes About Viewing Report Output on page 198 General Report of e Products on page 200 Report e Products by Selection Status on page 208 R
212. e note Usage endor Test Organization 1 wen zi Workflow 5 E mi Submit Cancel Figure 40 Acquisition Records Acquisition Records List The Acquisition Records List displays the list of acquisition records for a particular e product Verde has an acquisition record for each year that a subscription is active Records display in reverse chronological order such that the most recent record is displayed first The Acquisition Record List displays acquisition records for the particular e product and if the e product is an e constituent record it also displays acquisition records for the constituent s e package Acquisition records associated with a particular e product can be Chapter 9 Acquisition Records edited from the list while inherited records can be edited by clicking the inheritance icon that is displayed in the first column of the list Summary Acquisition Records List Piok New ACQ Link ACQ Rane Start subscription Y End subscription ACQ Number Purchase Order Status Actions Acquisition 07 Feb 2006 13 Mar 2007 1142334159055_6 Active 2 License Access Figure 41 Acquisition Records List The Acquisition Records List displays the following information for each record 4 m whether the record is the parent record or the inherited record An inherited record opens in edit or display mode depending on your privileges m if the record is currently active The record must have the st
213. e set of libraries that have access to the e product including m Setting the libraries when you activate a new e package or e standalone Chapter 50 Synchronizing e Product Updates with SFX m Changing the list of active libraries for an active e package e standalone or e constituent m A change in the local coverage of an e standalone or e constituent A change in the local embargo of an e standalone or e constituent A change in the update target of an active e package or e standalone so that the update target is now SFX when it previously was not Note Updates to the Verde KB that are the result of running the KB update process are not sent to SFX Synchronizing Updates in Consortia Verde supports the following two models of communication between SEX and Verde The symmetrical model In this model each Verde instance communicates with a single SFX instance This model is used by Verde and SFX consortia as well as by single site Verde and SFX installations in which each Verde instance has a corresponding SFX instance The following diagram represents the symmetrical consortium model Figure 180 Symmetrical Consortium Model ea Local ea 3 In the above model the synchronization process includes e product analysis within an individual Verde instance and the transferring of the analysis results to the individual SFX instance with which the Verde instance is associated 483 Verde Staff User s Guide
214. e specific tasks that are built into each workflow You can activate and rename all or part of these tasks For more information about site specific tasks refer to the Workflows Configuration Guide Permissions There are three user permissions that relate to workflows m Handle workflow which controls whether a user can view and update workflows and their tasks E Start workflow which controls whether a user can initiate a new workflow E Cancel workflow which controls whether a user can cancel a workflow that is in process Verde Staff User s Guide Without Handle workflow permissions you cannot start or cancel workflows Handle workflow permissions must therefore be assigned together with start and cancel workflow permissions License and Acquisitions Workflows When the Purchase decision field of a trial record is updated to Purchase it triggers the creation of two workflows License and Acquisitions Decision date 07 Apr 2006 Purchase decision Purchase Purchase decision note Figure 73 Purchase Decision Status Purchase If these are the first workflows created for the e product a green bar is added to the left of the Workflow menu option indicating that the e product now has workflow records Summary Add new e Product Workflow List Acquisitions Workflow Status Start date End date Actions 1 In process 21 D 006 S License Access Admin Trial Cost Usage
215. e standalone O Run report on e products with no license Create e print D Run subscription renewal task Edit e product B Run subscriptions for review task Delete e product m Run trial participant alerts task Update ALEPH Vv Run trial management process task View license ica Run license renewal task Create edit license C Run SFX Sync Delete license O Run e constituents data loader Approve license O Run acquisitions data loader Submit Cancel Figure 126 User Privileges 6 Click Submit The user is created in the Verde database and displayed in the Users List 391 Verde Staff User s Guide 392 KB Manager Module Privileges In general KB Manager module privileges include view create edit and delete permissions for most attributes For example the access attribute s KB Manager module privileges include the following m View access E Create edit access E Delete access The following table contains a detailed explanation of KB Manager module privileges Table 73 KB Manager Module Privileges Attribute Privilege Search Search basket view work view e Product Description Allows the following actions E Perform search E View e product attributes in the General Information Interoperability and Libraries tabs E View work records E Add e products to basket E View basket Chapter 38 The Users Tab Table 73 KB Manager Module Privileges Attribute Privilege Description Cr
216. e table 157 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Counter level Table 15 Details Tab Fields efoYe COUNTERLEVEL Description If a usage report received from a vendor is in Counter format specify the Counter level The possible values are E Level 1 B Level 2 These fields can be customized by modifying the code table Vendor VENDORCODE The vendor who provides the usage report Points to ORGANIZATIONCODE field in the ORGANIZATION table Report timestamp Report ID REPTIMESTMP Not in use Not in use Ips Not in use Usage ID Creation date CREATIONDATE Usage ID A unique identifier generated by Verde The date on which the usage record was created By CREATEDBY Verde user Contains the ID of the staff person who created the usage record Latest Update LATESTDATE LATESTBY Verde user Contains the ID of the staff person who updated the usage record The date on which the usage record was updated 16 Workflows This section includes About Verde Workflows on page 159 m License and Acquisitions Workflows on page 160 m Renew Acquisitions and Review e Product Workflows on page 161 About Verde Workflows There are three workflow options available in Verde m License B Acquisitions m Renew acquisitions and review e product You can choose which of the above workflows you want to use A fixed number of sit
217. e type from Prevailing to another type and vice versa m A Prevailing license type can be created only if the associated e product already has more than one active license license with Approved status Note For records being updated default values are not taken into account 314 29 Library Library Contact and Library IP Input Files This section includes Library Input File Rules on page 315 Library Input File Fields on page 317 Library Loader Workflow on page 320 Library Contact Input Files on page 321 Library Contact Input File Fields on page 321 Library Contact Loader Workflow on page 324 Library IP Input Files on page 324 Library IP Input File Fields on page 325 About Library Input Files Verde s library loader loads the library input file This input file loads library records that need to be added to or updated in the Verde database The input file contains columns for the fields in the Verde database and rows for each record being loaded The library input file s columns are described in Table 57 Library Input File Rules Before loading your input file ensure that the file follows these rules m The input file includes mandatory columns When an input file does not contain all mandatory columns the input file is not loaded to Verde and an error is logged in the summary Verde Staff User s Guide 316 m All of the fields in the mandatory columns contain values When an input line does
218. eate edit work Allows the following actions E Create work records For more information see Adding New Work Records on page 36 E Edit work records For more information see Editing a Work Record on page 38 E Delete fields in locally created work records except for two required fields Title and e Product Type E Add local fields to already existing work records E Delete local fields in work records that are part of the KnowledgeBase Delete work Allows deleting locally created work records Users cannot delete work records that are part of the KnowledgeBase A work record cannot be deleted if it has related e products 393 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 73 KB Manager Module Privileges Attribute Privilege Description e Product Create e interface A user can create an e product of each type only if the user has Edit e product permissions Create e package Create e constituent i Ane product must be Create e standalone connected to a work record Create e print E For details on how to create appropriate work records see Adding New Work Records on page 36 E For details on how to create an e product see Adding New e Product Records on page 62 E e Products of type e standalone e package and e interface can also be created using the Quick Add wizard For details see The Quick Add Wizard on page 64 Edit e product Allows editing e product attributes in
219. ecords as well as e package and e standalone records Note When updating an e product record you can update only local e product fields Global fields that are maintained by Ex Libris via the KnowledgeBase such as e Product type e Package type and Global holdings cannot be edited Editing e Constituent Records e Constituent records always belong to an e package The status fields that can be updated vary depending on the package type of the e constituent s parent If the e constituent belongs to an aggregator package none of the four status related fields can be updated because in aggregator packages these fields are controlled exclusively on the package level With selective package e constituents you have more flexibility The values of all four status fields can differ from the value of the same field in the e constituent s parent However there are rules that govern the interaction between the fields in the e constituent and those in the e package The rules are as follows m To activate an e constituent the e package must itself be active Note that unlike e interfaces e packages are never automatically activated m If an e package has been rejected and withdrawn all of its e constituents become inactive and withdrawn For more information about the interaction between e packages and their e constituents as well as the approval and activation workflows see Selection Workflows on page 73 e Constituents hav
220. ection Rejection can occur as part of an evaluation or a review process or it can occur independently Rejecting an active e product has very different consequences than rejecting an inactive one When an active e product is rejected an Activation to date is assigned either by you or by the system The Activation to date controls when the e product is withdrawn If there is an active acquisition record the Activation to date uses the Subscription end date found in the acquisition record If there is no acquisition record the current date is used as the Activation to date You can change this date manually There is no need to update e products that are not yet active and have been rejected In these cases the selection status is retained for historical purposes For more information about rejection as part of a trial see Trial Workflow on page 148 Rejecting an aggregator package affects all of the package s e constituents The selection status of each of the e constituents is updated to Rejected and an Activation to date is assigned Rejecting a selective package involves a manual process You use the filter function in the package list to select all active e constituents and then use the Update buttons to update the selection status of each of the e constituents to Rejected and assign an Activation to date Note The status of active e products that have been rejected is not updated to Withdrawn online Instead Verde updates the e p
221. ection contains the following information from the e product and e product admin records for the values that are defined in the record m Hardware requirements public Software requirements public Maintenance window value Provider system status uniform resource indicator User documentation Public note Display U P Verde displays U P data from SFX as part of the Verde access record Deep linking Users can deep link from the Verde e product record to the SFX object portfolio or target service record The deep link is available from the e Product Interoperability tab and is accessed by clicking the SFX button that is displayed next to the SFX ID Note that deep linking works only if the SFX ID is valid and exists in your SFX database and if the Verde SFX link is set The first time that you deep link during a session you have to log in after that your user name and password is remembered E Target Service Object Threshold Mod Act Action Test 1 E Vo cesconost BUSINESS SOURCE PREMIER _ getFullTe 0001 4788 Accounting and bu obj parsedDateC gt 1982 undef unde 20050621 W C 9 Summary _ guGeneraliinformationsss MR EGT e Product Acquisition SFX ID 111064870470074 U Figure 178 Deep Link from Verde e Product Record Chapter 49 Introducing Verde Interoperability Link to resource Verde provides access to an SFX menu displaying the electronic full text service for an active e c
222. ed explicit E Prohibited interpreted E Silent These values can be customized in the code table Mandatory Field 293 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Length ILL electronic Field Type License Description The right to provide the licensed materials via interlibrary loan by way of electronic copies The possible values are E Null Field left blank E Not applicable E Permitted explicit E Permitted interpreted E Prohibited explicit E Prohibited interpreted E Silent These values can be customized in the code table Mandatory Field ILL record keeping required ILL term note 294 Boolean License License The requirement to keep records of interlibrary loan activity and provide reports to the licensor at periodic intervals or upon request Additional information related to interlibrary loans Chapter 28 License Input Files Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Description Mandatory Field Type Field Fair use clause Boolean License A clause that affirms indicator statutory fair use rights under U S copyright law 17 USC Section 107 or that the agreement does not restrict or abrogate the rights of the licensee or its user community under copyright law Boolean License A clause stating that all intellectual
223. ed when the SFX customer is a CrossRef library affiliate member and linking to article level is available via CrossRef Suppress Indicates if the e product is hidden from Public View Not functional Creation date The date the record was created Automatically generated by Verde Created by Verde user Updated by Verde user Latest update date CKB CKB update date Date that the KB record was updated by Ex Libris in the Central KB Automatically generated by Verde Latest update date Local LKB update date Automatically generated by Verde 71 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 5 List of e Product Fields Field Name Description Libraries Consortial purchase Possible values are B Full purchased for every member of the consortium E Partial purchased for some members of the consortium E Local purchased locally Libraries Option to define the libraries that have the e product together with details of their holdings 72 8 Selection Workflows This section includes About Selection Workflows on page 73 Evaluation on page 74 Review on page 75 Approval and Final Approval on page 75 Rejection on page 76 Activation on page 77 Table of e Product Updates on page 78 About Selection Workflows The value selected in the e product record s Selection status field determines the e product selection workflow that will be
224. ed a status of Approved or Retired it cannot be deleted Only licenses with the status Approved are handled by the License Renewal Task The license s status plays a significant role in the license workflow For more information see License Records on page 103 Chapter 39 The Code Tables Tab License type Table 77 License Table Functional Fields Values E Prevailing The default license type is Regular E Regular A license with the type Trial is created E Supplemental automatically by the system during a trial process when the License required check box is selected in the license record E Trial A prevailing term record must be defined when there is more than one active license Renewal type Acquisition Field Payment status E Automatic The License Renewal task renews licenses that are about to expire whose renewal type is defined as Automatic E Perpetual For more information see License Workflows on page 117 E Explicit Table 78 Acquisition Table Functional Fields Values E Paid The invoice payment status The default status is Paid Invoices with the E Ready to be paid status Paid cannot be deleted Unpaid 411 Verde Staff User s Guide 412 Table 78 Acquisition Table Functional Fields Values E Active E Approved E Cancelled E Denied E New E On hold E In process 1 E In process 2 E Ready to be approved B Renewed E Review
225. ed licensing agent to view a list of contacts for the organization If a licensing agent is missing from the list of organizations you add the licensing agent to the list by clicking the New button entering the appropriate details in the Create New Organization pop up window and clicking Submit The library contact responsible for negotiating the license License delivery requirements DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS The required medium in which official communications must be delivered Licensing note LICENSING NOTE Note field Public note PUBLICNOTE Note field License replaced by REPLACEDBY License code of later license License replaces REPLACES License code of earlier license License history note LINKEDLICENSE NOTE Note field License code LICENSECODE Automatically generated by Verde Creation date CREATEDDATE The date on which the record was created Automatically generated by Verde Created by CREATEDBY Verde user Latest update UPDATEDATE The date on which the record was updated Automatically generated by Verde 113 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 10 Description Tab Fields Field Name ef Te Description Notes Tab The Notes tab stores license use notes for a given license or prevailing terms There are two types of notes E Public Internal Public notes are made available to external syste
226. ed of changes to the trial record including changes to the trial s start and end dates as well as the registering of a trial decision In addition trial participants are notified of the trial s completion before the trial is over You set the period of advance notification in the Advance notification date field The e mail sent to participants includes a link to an external feedback page so that Chapter 13 Trial Records trial participants can enter their feedback directly without having to log in to Verde B Q MetaPress Akademiai Kiado 0 Metapress Status Trial Selection status Approved Active 25 Feb 2009 27 Feb 2008 Local Holdings embargo 10 2004 12 2006 Package type Selective Acquisitions In process 1 license Approved EB Status Production Active 21 Jun 2007 Welcome Irina Thank you for participating in our trial Please register your feedback below Feedback General Feedback Conclusion z Today s date 25 Feb 2008 OK Cancel Figure 70 External Feedback Form Note The General note and Feedback fields may include up to 2000 characters each If a trial participant completed the form and then reopened the link the feedback that already exists is displayed Note that only one feedback record per trial participant can be saved in a trial record If a trial participant updates the feedback form the latest updated feedback is saved Starting a Trial Once a trial has been approved a
227. ee Note Organizations existing in one instance cannot be viewed by other instances in the consortium If member instances in a consortium work with the same list of organizations it is possible to create one organization input file and load it using the organization loader in each instance For more information about the organization loader see About Organization Input Files on page 327 Viewing the Organization List 164 From the Managing drop down list select Organizations A list of organizations is displayed The organization list is sorted alphabetically by organization name An organization has one main name and may have several alternate names Each version of the name appears in the list To access a particular organization within a long list of organizations use the Jump to option that appears above the list Managing organizations New Jump to Go Organization name Code Roles A Or la VENDOR EA Academia Sinica Press el sinica VENDOR EA Eran oF AGENT LICENSOR IP VENDOR CONSORTIAL_MEMBER CONSORTIUM RZ Ex Libris China oO AGENT IP VENDOR LICE EA QA Organization1 Q AGENT LICENSOR IP R nization 1 oy VENDOR IP CONSORTIAL_MEMBER AGENT CONSORTIUM LICENSOR EA Twentieth Century QO 20century VENDOR R Figure 76 Organization List Chapter 17 Organization Management The organization list displays the following information m the name of the organization m the Open Organization b
228. ee is a mandatory field Missing licensee for lic 11 LIC1200491376622 5 dependencies cherLIC120049 Reject Licensor is a mandatory field Missing licensor for lice 12 LIC1200491376622 5 dependencies cherLIC120049 Reject Licensee is a mandatory field Missing licensee for lic 13 LIC1200491376622 5 dependencies cherLIC120049 Reject Licensor is a mandatory field Missing licensor for lice 14 LIC1200491376622 5 dependencies cherLIC120049 Reject Licensee is a mandatory field 15 LIC1200491376622 5 dependencies cherLIC120049 Reject Licensor is a mandatory field 16 1LIC1200491376622 5 dependencies cherLIC120049 Reiect Licensee is a mandatorv field Missina licensee for lic Figure 114 Report File The report provides the following information for all loader types per record m Match field Match value in the input file E Status Possible values are m New Updated Rejected for e constituent e standalone license access loaders m New Rejected for admin access authorization loaders m Failure Success for organization library acquisition ALEPH Vendor Converter loaders m Cause If the record was rejected the reason for the rejection 366 Chapter 33 View Loader Output In addition to the information that is provided for all loader types and described above the following loaders can have additional columns that provide specific information E e Constituent loader m e Product Title the
229. eeen 344 About Local Admin Input BES ooren ee 345 Local Admin Input File Rules nnee 345 Local Admin Input File Fields cs ssesctesssuetenngnesnassestsscyonceeteonsensecedincvssdcies 346 Local Admin Loader Workflow ende 347 Chapter 32 Access and Access Authorization Input Files venen ese even 349 About Access Ioput Piles siaiscisssaets toes hi shee scaasanyad iaasa aes 349 Access Input Pile RULES tensiden 350 Access Input File Pields vsncisaidsaensinnconncnrdnn nne 352 Access Loader VWOEKEIDM mensenetende 356 About Access Authorization Input Pes snee 357 Access Authorization Input File Rules isiicicscc cetscansincioiosudececcsieivains 357 Access Authorization Input File Fields vices osccisatieoncnenannss 358 Access Authorization Loader Workflow annen 361 Chapter 33 View Loader Outputs 363 Viewing Loader OWED maes mene naarden 363 Viewing the Report Summary s e sssssessssessesseresissisesresrenenresrseesessesrenes 365 Viewing th Report PE 366 Chapter 34 View KB Reports and View Scheduled Tasks enen esv even 369 Viewing KB RepottS cc ssss ciassssccuinssierernstertaserortenctertenteenstnesirtebepseeativensinistee 369 Viewing Scheduled TASKS uee 370 Chapter35 Customized Report Outputs ivan isseicscetsienasiissinsniiniennaieesunnnniss 371 About Customizing Report Outputs siciisiiescisinniseiionn 371 Creating Your Own Properties File snot eren en 372 Fditing the Properties Penor eenden 372 Field S nerenin eaea e
230. ege For more information see KB Tools Module Privileges on page 398 491 Verde Staff User s Guide Synchronizing per e Product Whenever you add activate update or cancel a resource Verde informs you that synchronization with SFX is required You can synchronize an update from the e product record at any time This enables you to update SFX immediately instead of waiting for the update to be synchronized by the next scheduled batch synchronization Note You cannot synchronize an update to a single e product while a batch synchronization task is in process To synchronize a single update to an e package or e standalone 1 From the e product record in the KB Manager module make the required addition activation update or cancellation For example if you need to change the date from which a certain e package will be activated search for the e package click the e Package List button 9 to navigate to the e package from the search results screen and change the date that appears in the Activation from date field 2 If the update you made was an update to an e constituent navigate to the e package to which the e constituent belongs 3 Click the Link to Resource button If the process does not begin one of the following errors may appear Table 88 Synchronization Errors Description Recommended Action The SFX sync task is The sync process is Wait and try again already running your running sync request
231. el Figure 62 Admin Details Editing Links 131 Verde Staff User s Guide 132 List of Admin Tab Fields The following table describes the fields in the admin record s Admin tab Field Name Online admin module available Table 12 Admin Tab Fields ONLINEADMIN Description Denotes whether resource attributes can be directly modified online by the subscribing institution Possible values are Yes No Admin URI ONLINEADMINURI The URI of the online administration module The field is available if the value of Online admin module available is Yes Session timeout Session timeout value SESSIONTIMEOUT SESSIONTIMEOUTVALUE Indicates whether there is a configurable inactivity timeout Possible values are Yes No The inactivity timeout used for the resource The field is available if the value of Session timeout is Yes Logout URI LOGOUTURI Indicates whether a logout URI can be specified Possible values are Yes No Logout URI value LOGOUTURIVALUE The logout URI used with the resource The field is available if the value of Logout URI is Yes User e Interface configuration UICONFIGURATION The ability to control user interface features Possible values are Yes No Subscriber branding available SUBSCRIBERBRANDING Indicates whether a branding feature is available Possible values are Yes No Subscriber branding activated
232. eld click the field s Delete button Note that only locally created fields and non mandatory fields can be deleted m To set the non filing indicator for the Title field click the Edit 2 button The non filing indicator is used to define the number of characters to be suppressed for filing For example to suppress the word the you would enter 4 that is three spaces for the word the and one space for after the word The suppressed characters are highlighted in yellow in the Title field s Details column as shown below siam _ CD The Journal of the Managing e Products z E The Journal of the Siam Society Edit Field Code CKB SFX ID 991042723460822 Created by CKB administrator 06 Aug 2005 Non filing indicator Select fields 4 Field d 2 arseen Main Title The Journal of the Siam El LEEN j S Field Details Society CODEN ISSN 0857 70 Ee Tide ETE Subtitle H Corporate Author Imprint s n Ba zj Abbreviated Title A E RR Number of Part RAE SFX 9910427 a Imprint a Update frequency Name One art z zl Figure 14 Edit Title Field E To re index the work record click the Index 2 button 38 Chapter 4 Work Records Deleting Work Records You can delete work records that were created locally as long as the work records do not have associated e products If they do have associated e products first delete the associated e
233. em reports as well as their resolution Training information Information regarding the availability of special training for example instructions on how to bypass simultaneous user restrictions May also include training contact names and other general information Administrative documentation Information about and or location of documentation available for product administrators User documentation Admin Loader Workflow Information about and or location of documentation available for end users After Verde verifies that the admin input file is in the correct format and includes the mandatory Match column Verde examines the Match field m Ifno match is found for this field the line is rejected m If Verde retrieves matches for more than one e product the line is rejected m Ifonly one related e product is found Verde checks the validity of the other fields in the input file If the fields are in the correct format an admin record is created Otherwise the line is rejected 344 Chapter 31 Admin and Local Admin Input Files About Local Admin Input Files Verde s local admin loader loads the local admin input file This input file loads the local admin records that need to be added to the Verde database The input file contains columns for the fields in the Verde database and rows for each record being loaded The local admin input file s columns are described in
234. enabling you to define values for the usage record fields After you click Submit the record is displayed in the Usage Records List Usage Record Fields The following table describes the fields in the usage record s Details tab Table 15 Details Tab Fields Field Name Description Period from FRMPERIOD Mandatory field The date on which the usage period begins Period to TOPERIOD Mandatory field The date on which the usage period finishes Number UNUMBER Mandatory field The number of the usage record 156 Chapter 15 Usage Records Field Name Report Page type Table 15 Details Tab Fields Code REPORTTYPE Description Usage report type The possible values are E Abstracts E Full text requests E Full text HTML requests E Full text PDF requests E Full text postscript requests E Full text total requests E References E Searches E Sessions E Turnaways These fields can be customized by modifying the code table Institution INSTITUTECODE The library that accesses the e product if the usage is limited to one library Points to the ORGANIZATIONCODE field in the ORGANIZATION table Usage summary note Usage record type USAGESUMMARY RECTYPECODE Additional information about usage The format that is used by the vendor for usage reports The possible values are E Counter E Other B Local These fields can be customized by modifying the cod
235. ent and work records as well as rows for each record being loaded The e constituent input file columns are described in Table 43 Note The e constituent loader loads a single coverage per row To load multiple coverage ranges include a row per e constituent level coverage The e constituent loader does not load institution level coverage e Constituent Input File Rules Before loading your input file ensure that your input file follows these rules m All of the fields in the mandatory columns contain values When an input line does not contain all of the mandatory fields the input line is rejected and an error is logged in the output report Verde Staff User s Guide 244 If you want to create a work record associated with the new e constituent record the following fields are mandatory m title main title m e product type For example the following sample input file creates a new e constituent record with minimal information provided in the input file Table 40 Sample Input File Title Main Title e Product Type To update an e constituent record the Match field is mandatory The Match field is either a bibliographic or Verde identifier used to identify the e constituent or work record The following example illustrates how to update e constituents with coverage information Table 41 Update e Constituents with Coverage Information From Year To Year LEP_1203348384027_94 LWE_1194878929338_2535
236. enu bar select KB Tools 2 From the Select a tool drop down list select SFX Sync To Be Synced The Verde SFX To be Synced list appears The Sync Status column displays the current synchronization status of each e product If an e product is currently being synchronized one of the following statuses appears m Waiting for SFX m In process Verde m In process SFX If there are many e products for which synchronization is currently in process you may want to use the e Product or e Standalone 9 buttons to view the e products and check their sync statuses The check recovers processes that are not running properly and marks e products for updates Performing SFX Setup When an SFX synchronization task results in the status Done SFX setup required the synchronized e product requires SFX setup in SFX Verde enables you to deep link to SFX to perform this setup To deep link to SFX and perform setup for an e product Open the e product From the Options menu select e Product 1 2 3 Select the Interoperability tab 4 Click the Link to Resource button The SFX login screen opens 505 Verde Staff User s Guide 506 5 Enter your user name and password and click Submit You are logged into SFX 6 Set up a user name and password for the e product For information about using SFX refer to the SFX 3 0 User Guide When you have finished you can use the Synchronization History screen to mark the synchr
237. envenvennennennvensensenneenvenvensernen 68 Selection WorkfloWsumestnesnintad ennn 73 About Selection Workflows nanos en sensors ennennvensennenneenvensersernen 73 Bvalatlon mmm neerde seersenreree Derren enter ata 74 Evaluating g Gonstituents arcassonensis 74 REVIEW scsaics acess roven deere senden a vaten tenten CEEE E EE RNE EEEE bete EESE aai 75 Approval end Fin l Approval nes naan 75 PRS PO UOT ee teiecstal ancmicc wan taioateeiennanlansu clams hend iseatatisaele ions 76 Table of Contents PSI ORION eneen neede edentate 77 Activating e Standalones e Interfaces and Aggregator Packages 77 Activating Selective Packages icc nsntamiesaniismnateiaualialeaannaen 77 Activating e Constituents in Active Selective Packages an 78 Tableots Product Updates nnee esters 78 Chapter 9 Acquisition Records nnen van eenn 85 About Acquisition Records essen 85 Local Acquisition Records ain 86 Invoice Record ssrin ER EEE AEA 86 Acquisition Records LISE weeer edad lenea 86 Acquisition Details snee nennen dresser needed detennseden veesiennenee 88 Adding New Acquisition Records ornosrerensna sonen 88 Editing Acquisition Records waarmaken nn 88 Linking Acquisition Records annen 89 Deleting Acquisition Records ssssssssssssssessssssssresssserinrrsesnerenenensrerrsesnes 91 Printing and E Mailing Acquisition Records eenen 91 Acquisitions Tap emeente tenet eneen nnn 91 New Acquisition RECTAS sunsets 96 Interim Acquisition Statuses am
238. eport on e Packages with Acquisitions on page 209 Report on Locally Created e Products on page 210 Report on e Products with Usage Statistics on page 211 Report of Active e Products Without Licenses on page 211 Report of IP Ranges by Licensor on page 217 Verde Staff User s Guide About Viewing Report Output View Report Output shows all the occurrences of each report These can be reports run in the past or reports currently running The list of report outputs is identical to the list of reports defined in Reports on page 181 ger KB Tools Admin Verde Select a tool View Report Output v E E Product gt General report of e Product Report e Products by Selection Status Report on e Packages with Acquisitions Report on Locally Created e Products Report on e Products with Usage Stati 5 Report of active without licenses Figure 104 Select a Tool View Report Output Clicking any of the reports opens a screen displaying the following columns of information m Report date m Report name m Report summary Report file 198 Chapter 21 View Report Output m Report status ore Report date Reportname Report summary Report file Report status general Ep tGeneralReport I VET 1166714 EProductGeneralReport 1 VET 1166714 omplete EN SE ns ae firefox test EProductGeneralReport 1 VET 1165307 EProductGener
239. equency Subject Continues continued by SFX ID This is the SFX Object ID Adding New Work Records You add new work records using both the new work and edit work screens You can then associate an e product type with the work record To add a new work record 1 Inthe e product management area of the KB Manager module click the New Work button A form screen with mandatory and optional fields for the work record opens Managing e Products z New Search W View Basket Quick Add a Code SFX ID MetaLib ID Created by ISSN ISBN ISSN C ISBN Number e Product Format e Product Format eISSN eISBN eISSN eISBN Number Title Figure 12 36 Author Corporate author Author C Corporate author Name Sub unit numeration New Work Form Screen Chapter 4 Work Records Note This screen does not contain the full list of available fields The full list of available fields can be viewed from the edit work screen only This screen can be accessed only after you submit the work record 2 Complete the provided fields Note that the Title and e Product Type fields are mandatory 3 Click Submit The new work record is saved and the edit work screen of the record opens displaying the record title the instance code the associated SFX and MetaLib IDs the user name of the user who created the work record and the creation da
240. erden EE A EA 372 Column NAMES auster Iei R A ER A 374 Header Parameters nitendo benee 374 Choose a Properties File maatre aerden 375 Part 4 Verde Tasks Module Chapter36 Verde Fasksnssrtsrrssrm sen avensis didier ned 381 Verde Staff User s Guide Part 5 Admin Module Chapter 37 Chapter 38 Chapter 39 Chapter 40 Chapter 41 Chapter 42 Chapter 43 Introducing the Admin Module nne sven eneen enenvenenvenevensenenn 385 The Users Pabst 387 About the Users Tab ereer ir er rr rerea r REEE r SEIE ERE EEE RETS 387 Creating a New USL cissrisrseririseiierreestir prieur pension sts K r NESES NSE V bannen 388 KB Manager Module Privileges assessements 392 KB Tools Module Privileges sentent 398 Editing a User Reebtdonmnmnsmenssiedtnent en 399 Deleting a USER tremendous ban dede en 400 The Code Tables TAB winnen nnen eneen 403 About the Code Tables Fab asten 403 Updating a Code TAPE nennen eenen 404 Updating Functional Fields vanette teater 405 The Default Values Va cise isiiiccitiercii siesta idaiieanciin 417 About the Default Values Tab temmen 417 Defining Default Values for a License Record nee 418 The Initial Taburiente 419 About the Initial Tab nanne EE NE E EE EE ERT EER 419 Converting ACS OB nes 420 WAU Acquisitions sons eiiiai asime iiite sia 420 Acquisition Input File Structure scenario 422 L calizing RECON Sss nienia iraani a raae 423 R indexihg soscsorsiseseeseoserisrera reiret pensase pue Einen pra rur i
241. ere are permissions for viewing creating and deleting license attachments Terms Notes License review location Add file Figure 47 Adding an External License File Adding and Editing Licenses To create a new license record from the License Records List click New License Note that you must have both creating and editing privileges to create new licenses Once an e product has been linked to an existing license see for details the license is displayed and is editable from the e product s License Records List To edit a license from the Actions column of the License Records List click the Open License E button This button is displayed only if you have editing privileges and if the license is editable Package level license records can be edited only from the License Records List of the e package record In an e constituent record the e package licsense record can be viewed only You can access the license record of an e package by clicking the Edit Inherited Record button that is displayed in the first column of the License Records List The e package license record can then be updated In the illustation below the License Records List displays an e constituent level record The down arrow on the License tab in the left menu indicates that the license record is Chapter 10 License Records inherited The spectacle icon in the Actions column indicates that you can only view the record and no
242. ernet Explorer TRIE Instances to search I Managed for All gt Member Managed for Some instance 2 Instance 2 I Instance 3 Instance 3 search KB Find Cancel Figure 167 Search Locally Created e Products in Central Instance 464 Chapter 47 Search Display and Navigation in a Shared Consortium Environment If an e product was created in the central instance it can be retrieved in a member instance using the default search parameters If the locally created e product is an e constituent it is displayed in the package list of the e package to which the e constituent is linked An e constituent that is created in one instance is shown in the package list of another instance if the Display All option is selected For example an e constituent entitled ABC is created in INST2 and connected to an e package If you are in instance INST3 and select the Display Local option in the package list the ABC e constituent is not shown Jump to Go 1 15 of 80 records Filter by e Product status fan dl Filter by Selection status Fan dl Display Local Display All Title Y Identifier e prodi Soledo Coverage Advanced composite materials 1568 5519 Approved v 9 1 2000 Advanced powder technology v 11 1 2000 Advanced robotics v 14 1 2000 African and Asian studies v 1 1 2002 v Amphibia reptilia Approved v 20 1 1999 Ancient civilizations from Scythia to Siberia 1570 0577
243. es Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Length Field License status Type License Description The status of the license Possible values are E New E In negotiation B Under review E Under local review E Pending local response E Pending licensor response E Awaiting vendor generic license E Redacted version created E Electronic version created E Awaiting local signature E Final legal version received E Approved E Pending final local signature E Retired E Pending final signature by licensor E Approved locally E Rejected If left blank the default value is saved These values can be customized in the code table Mandatory Field Yes For a new license 289 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Type of License status note Table 53 License Input File Fields Record Field Type License Description Note field that contains additional information regarding the license status Mandatory Field Licensor Original licensor License License The person who granted the license The party who formulates the terms and conditions of use for the product with whom the licensee purchaser is bound in contract by signing or otherwise assenting to a license agreement The original organization granting the license Licensee License The person to whom the license is g
244. es the consortium purchase level is Managed for all if it is active for some libraries the consortium purchase level is Managed for some and if it is active locally the consortium purchase level is Managed locally Adding New e Product Records When the KnowledgeBase does not contain an e product for a resource you must create a new e product record Note You can create an e product record only if you have edit e product permissions You can create an e product record in one of the following ways m By creating an e product set e package e interface or e standalone e interface using the Quick Add wizard or an alternative manual procedure For more information see Creating e Product Sets on page 64 m By creating a work record and associating it with an e product For information about creating a work record see Adding New Work Records on page 36 m By attaching an e product to an existing work record as described in this section m By loading multiple e constituent or e standalone e products via e constituent and e standalone loaders For more information see About Verde Loaders on page 231 Chapter 7 e Product Records To attach an e product to an existing work record 1 Inthe e product search result screen or e product screen click the Open Work button to open the e product s work record The work record contains the title and description of the e product Work records can be centrally or locally
245. esource is free of charge The possible values are E Free E Subscription From year e Product The year from which the electronic version is available From month e Product The month from which the electronic version is available From day From volume e Product e Product The day from which the electronic version is available The volume from which the electronic version is available From issue e Product The issue from which the electronic version is available To volume e Product The volume until which the electronic version is available e Product The issue until which the electronic version is available e Product The year until which the electronic version is available 271 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Table 49 e Standalone Input File Fields Field Length Record Type e Product Description The month until which the electronic version is available Mandatory Field e Product e Product The day until which the electronic version is available The type of embargo E From X months E Up to X months This is relevant to e constituents and e standalones Embargo months e Product The number of months that are embargoed locally Holdings note ILS holdings ID e Product e Product A note regarding the holdings Link to MARC record in ILS
246. ess 1 a start date equal to the date on which the localization process is run and an end date as specified in the following step 5 If you selected Do you want to create acquisition records enter or select an end date to assign these records in the Subscription end date box Chapter 41 The Initial Tab 6 Under Load locally created e products for select one of the following options Locally created work records Creates local e products for local work records only e Products that are linked to work records that are already part of the KnowledgeBase will not be loaded Work records that are already part of the KnowledgeBase Creates local e products only for work records that are part of the KnowledgeBase Local e products that are linked to local work records will not be loaded Both Loads all local e products regardless of the work record to which they are linked 7 Click Submit The localization process updates Verde so that the same resources are active in SFX and Verde Resources that are active in SFX are assigned an e product status of Production and an Activation from date that is equal to the date on which the localization process is run Note While the localization process is running you cannot use the Verde GUI Re indexing In the Admin module s Initial tab click Reindex A general indexing process is triggered in the active instance the instance to which you logged in During the process
247. ess of your user permissions However linking to attributes is 470 Chapter 48 Merged View available only to users with appropriate privileges For example linking to a license will be available only to a user with view license privileges Q Metapress American Society for Clinical Pathology 0 Metapress CP Status Production Active 11 Nov 2007 e Package type Selective License Approved Availability Down 01 Dec 2007 31 C Sync Status Sync required Last Sync Done SFX updated 15 Nov 2007 16 46 Status Production Active 25 Sep 2007 El E Product Summary e Product Title Metapress American Society for Clinical Pathology Acquisition Coverage e Product Type Verde Package License Interface Metapress Consortial purchase Managed locally EEE Free Yes Admin El E Product More Info Trial cost Local Center Availability Down 01 Dec 2007 31 Dec 2007 Usage E Product status Production Production Selection status Rejected Workflow Sponsoring Library Sync History Selector Note Public note Interface Provider Yiew Access settings Access list Link to Resource Link to e Product OpenURL activated Figure 173 Merged View e Product Summary Tab The Summary page is configurable For more information see Configuring the e Product Summary on page 436 Viewing Merged Data in the e Package and e Interface Lists The e package and e interface lists can be modified to display e product a
248. essLoaderFullListTemplate template that includes a full list of fields Some of the fields are common to all access types Other fields are relevant only for specific access types If you want to load access records for a specific access type use one of the following templates each template available for a specific access type m AccessLoaderWWWTypesTemplate m AccessLoaderXMLTypesTemplate m AccessLoaderZ39TypesTemplate m AccessLoaderSRW_SRUTypesTemplate The templates are saved on the server in the examples and templates directory For more information see Loading Input Files to Verde on page 236 Input values that are not relevant for the defined access type are ignored Some fields are mandatory for several access types For a full list of mandatory fields for each access type see the following table Table 67 Access Types Mandatory Columns Access Type Mandatory Columns WWW None Z39 Z39 50 address 239 50 port XML XML port SRW SRU SRW SRU base URL Chapter 32 Access and Access Authorization Input Files m When a field is left blank or a column is removed from the input file the field is saved in the database as an empty field or a default value is supplied The following fields in the access record have default values Access Type Access Status Table 68 Access Record Default Values Default Value Active Implemented authorization method Null Alternate authoriz
249. eted E Silent These values can be customized in the code table Mandatory Field Course reserve term note License Information that qualifies a permissions statement on course reserves 301 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Type of Record Field Description Mandatory Field Type Length Field Electronic link License The right to access the licensed material The possible values are E Null Field left blank E Not applicable E Permitted explicit E Permitted interpreted B Prohibited explicit E Prohibited interpreted E Silent These values can be customized in the code table Electronic link License Information that term note qualifies a permissions statement on electronic links 302 Chapter 28 License Input Files Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Length Field Course pack Type License Description The right to use licensed materials in collections or compilations of materials assembled in a print format by faculty members for use by students in a class for purposes of instruction The possible values are E Null Field left blank E Not applicable E Permitted explicit E Permitted interpreted E Prohibited explicit E Prohibited interpreted E Silent These values can be customized in the code tabl
250. ewing or canceling the subscription printCancelRestriction printCancelNote Boolean Restrictions on canceling print versions of electronic titles covered by a license Additional information about specific cancellation restrictions for print versions of electronic titles covered by the license purchaseOrderNo The number assigned to the purchase order of a product vendorSubscriptionCode The ID of the vendor subscription materialType Material type subscriptionType Subscription type subscription TypeNote Subscription type note noteForILS Note for ILS noteForVendor Note to be included in correspondence with vendor price The amount paid for the product 277 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name acquisitionMethod Table 50 Acquisition Input File Fields Field Length Description Method of acquisition discountPrice pricingModel Text A discount in price or in pricing formula A description of the fee structure applicable to the product pricingCap Float The maximum percentage of annual increase in a multi year agreement pricingCapFrom Date Dates on which the price cap begins pricingCapTo Date Dates on which the price cap ends inflationRate Float The inflation rate defined in percentage terms consortialAgreement pooledConcurrentUsers Boolean Integer I
251. existing statuses can be removed The statuses that appear in the list are defined in the Admin module Status codes are stored in the database and these cannot be changed The display constant however can be changed in the Admin module Standard setup provides the following statuses E New E In Process 1 2 3 E Approved E Denied E Sent for Additional Processing E On Hold E Active E Renewed E Cancelled Acquisition status date ACQUISITION STATUSDATE The date that the acquisition status was assigned Subscription open date ORDERDATE The date that the subscription was first opened Corresponds only to the acquisition start date on new subscriptions Vendor VENDORCODE The vendor for the subscription Click to open the list of organizations Any organization can be selected though the organization you want is most likely to have the role Vendor To view only vendors select the role Vendor from the drop down list and click Submit Click the Select Organization button to select an organization Once an organization has been selected click the hyperlinked vendor to see a list of contacts for the vendor Chapter 9 Acquisition Records Section Field Name Vendor continued Table 7 Acquisitions Tab Fields Description Note If the vendor is missing from the list of organizations you can add the vendor by clicking the New button entering the appropriat
252. f the e product The possible values are B Implementation 1 B Implementation 2 B Implementation 3 E Production E Withdrawn E Null These values can be customized by editing the code table If this field contains a value the Activation from date field must contain a value When the e standalone is activated during loading if the related e interface is inactive it is given an e product status of Production and an Activation from date that is the same as the Activation from date of the e standalone Mandatory Field Chapter 26 e Standalone Input Files Table 49 e Standalone Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Description Mandatory Field Type Length Field Selection status e Product The selection status of the e product The possible values are E Evaluation E Review E Approved E Rejected E Withdrawn by Publisher E Null These values can be customized by editing the code table Activation from e Product The date from date which the e product is active If this field contains a value the e Product status field must contain a value Expiration date e Product The date until which the e product is active If this field contains a value the e Product status and Activation from date fields must contain values Concurrent Integer Concurrent number number of users of users for e standalone 269 Verde Staff User s Guid
253. f you select the check box Search KB KnowledgeBase records that are not localized will be included in the search Search KB can be selected only in conjunction with other instances It cannot be used alone Scene eT Verde Tasks KB Manager KB Tools Admin J 5 51 x i P Welcome Naor ma Languages Logout Help Z lanal a Z Yerde Popup Microsoft Internet Explorer oe Center New Search New Work Pr View Basket Quick Add Man Find Type Contains e Product Type CA rine Title 7 Managed for all gt Member Holdings e Interface Actions Managed for M Some M MEMB1 F GUEST V MEMB2 K MEMB1 VV MEMB2 I Search KB Figure 162 Search Center Display There are three components to the display m the search result summary m the navigation menu that displays when right clicking a button or e product name m the Holdings column that displays the instance name and the e product and e product selection status in the instance The search filters largely control what is included in or excluded from each of the components If an instance was included in the search then it will also display in the search result summary be included in the navigation menu and display in the Holdings column If the instance was not included in the search it will not be included in any of the above The only exception to this rule is the Chapter 47 Search Display and Navigation in a Shared Consortium En
254. ff User s Guide Table 92 License Fields CITATIONREQUIREMENTDETAILS Data Element Name Citation Requirement Detail Definition A specification of the required or recommended form of citation CLICKWRAPMODIFICATION COMPLETENESSOFCONTENTCODE Click wrap Modification Clause Indicator Completeness of Content Clause Indicator A clause indicating that the negotiated agreement supersedes any click through click wrap other user agreement or terms of use residing on the provider s server that might otherwise function as a contract of adhesion The presence of a provision in the contract stating that the licensed electronic materials shall include all content found in the print equivalent CONCURRENCYWITHPRINTCODE Concurrency with Print Version Clause Indicator The presence of a provision in the contract which states that the licensed materials is available before or no later than the print equivalent and or is kept current CONFDTYOFAGREEMENT Confidentiality of Agreement The presence or absence of clauses that specify or detail restrictions on the sharing of the terms of the license agreement CONFDTYOFAGREEMENTNOTE 516 Confidentiality of Agreement Note Specific details about what aspects of the license are private Appendix B Explanation of Fields Table 92 License Fields CONFIDENTIALITYOFUSER Data Element Name Confidentiality of User
255. followed Verde supports the following e product selection workflows Evaluation Review Approval Rejection Activation The e product selection process involves online and batch updates as well as Verde reports The process relies on relationships between e product records as well as relationships between e product and acquisition records The selection process is closely related to acquisition workflows For more information about acquisition workflows see Acquisition Workflows on page 100 Verde Staff User s Guide 74 Evaluation e Products can be evaluated as part of the trial workflow or independently of this workflow To initiate the e product evaluation process assign the selection status Evaluation to the e product If the e product is an aggregator package the selection status of all e constituents related to this package is updated to Evaluation If the e product is a selective package you use the Update button in the e package list to update the selection status of the package and all its e constituents to Evaluation Note It is recommended that you assign the Evaluation selection status only to e products that are not active If an e product is assigned a Trial status Verde automatically assigns a selection status of Evaluation to the e product After an e product has been assigned a selection status of Evaluation e product selectors review the e product and assign it a new selection status of Approved
256. for the access authorization loader Chapter 32 Access and Access Authorization Input Files Field Name Table 70 Access Authorization Input File Fields Type of Field Description Must be one of the following E Verde e product code E SFX ID of associated e product Note If you choose to use an SFX ID as the unique identifier for each record and you want to edit the file in Excel format the ID column as text If the ID column is in general or number format Excel does not store any digits past the 15th digit and the data is lost Mandatory Fields Access type Library Text The possible values are E WWW E Z39 E XML E SRW SRU Library name or library code Proxy server decision Boolean Proxy server decision 359 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Proxy registration status Table 70 Access Authorization Input File Fields Type of Field Field Length Description The possible values are E Not applicable E To be registered E Registration in process E Registered These fields can be customized in the code table The default value is Not applicable Mandatory Fields Proxy note Electronic resource user identifier Proxy Note Electronic resource user identifier Electronic resource user password Electronic resource user password Electronic resource local user identifier Electronic resource
257. h as inaccessible or non subscribed portions not marked as such at the site unusual login logoff requirements local vs remote authentication control and navigation or accessibility features DOMAIN NAMES Any domain names associated with a given product Some proxy servers require this information Implemented authorization method IMPLAUT METHOD The method by which access to the product is controlled If the provider supports more than one access method this element records the methods selected for use by the subscribing institution The possible values are E IP address E Password E IP address password E Script E Certificate B Unrestricted E Other These fields can be customized by modifying the code table Chapter 11 Access Records Alternate authorization method Authorization method note Table 11 Data Tab Fields ALTERNATE AUTMETHOD AUTMETHOD NOTE Relevant Access Type Description Additional authorization methods available for the product The possible values are E IP address E Password E IP address password E Script E Certificate E Unrestricted E Other These fields can be customized by modifying the code table Additional information pertaining to the authorization method IP address registration method IPADDRESS REGMETHOD The method by which IP addresses are sent to the product provider The possible values are Onlin
258. h as the e product and its attributes as well as related libraries and organizations By default when you enter the KB Manager module the e product management area is displayed To view the library or organization management area select Libraries or Organizations respectively from the Managing drop down list Managing e Products z e Products libraries organizations Find siam Figure 4 Managing Drop Down List For information about the e product management area see Overview of e Product Management on page 25 For information about the organization management area see Organization Management on page 163 For information about the library management area see Library Management on page 169 Verde Staff User s Guide 24 3 Overview of e Product Management This section includes B e Product Types on page 25 m Getting Started in the e Product Management Area on page 27 An e product is the main type of entity managed by Verde This section describes the five types of e products that exist within the Verde system and explains how to begin working in the e product management area e Product Types The following types of e products exist within the Verde system m e interface E e package m e constituent m e standalone E e print The above e product types are described in this section e Interface The e interface is the means by which electronic resources are accessed EBSCOhost
259. hat more complex than it is for other e products because of the complexity of the interaction between e constituents and their packages The e constituents of selective e packages can be selectively activated in cases where some but not all of the e constituents are purchased When a selective e package is activated a message appears to remind you that the e constituents related to the package should be updated accordingly Managing e Products z New Search New Work W view Basket Quic E Q5 adisonline adisonline e Package type Selective Status Production Active 10 Jan 2007 A Message The status es of the constituents in this package have not been updated To update the constituents statuses view the package list and update the constituents as needed Operation ended successfully Figure 39 Selective e Package Message You use the filter function in the package list to select all the approved e constituents that you want to activate and then use the Update buttons to activate each of the e constituents Note that it is possible to activate all e constituents of a selective package using the Update button that is displayed in 77 Verde Staff User s Guide the top right corner of the package list screen when no filter is applied For more information about working with the package list see e Package List on page 43 Activating e Constituents in Active Selective Packages Once a selective
260. he Ex Libris bridge Primo Aleph Alephino Voyager SFX MetaLib Verde DigiTool Preservation URM Voyager ENCompass Endeavor eZConnect WebVoyage Citation Server LinkFinder and LinkFinder Plus and other marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Ex Libris Ltd or its affiliates The absence of a name or logo in this list does not constitute a waiver of any and all intellectual property rights that Ex Libris Ltd or its affiliates have established in any of its products features or service names or logos Trademarks of various third party products which may include the following are referenced in this documentation Ex Libris does not claim any rights in these trademarks Use of these marks does not imply endorsement by Ex Libris of these third party products or endorsement by these third parties of Ex Libris products Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Ltd Microsoft the Microsoft logo MS MS DOS Microsoft PowerPoint Visual Basic Visual C Win32 Microsoft Windows the Windows logo Microsoft Notepad Microsoft Windows Explorer Microsoft Internet Explorer and Windows NT are registered trademarks and ActiveX is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Unicode and the Unicode logo are registered trademarks of Unicode Inc Google
261. he display order of a field within a section click the Up or Down arrow at the end of the field s row For example if you click the Interface field s Up arrow as illustrated below this field will be displayed after the Work data field and before the Coverage field in the e product Summary screen El E Product Expanded M Visible M m el Title Visible M m a e Work data visible M m Coverage visible M m Interface visible IW el Consortial purchase visible M rl ee oe kal Visible M Free Figure 152 Up and Down Arrows Fields m To display a section as expanded in the e product Summary screen select the Expanded check box in the section s title bar To collapse a section clear this check box By default only the e Product section is displayed as expanded 438 Part 6 Shared Consortium Environments Part 6 contains the following Section 44 The Shared Consortium Environment on page 441 Section 45 Setting Up a Shared Consortium Environment on page 443 Section 46 Working in a Shared Consortium Environment on page 453 Section 47 Search Display and Navigation in a Shared Consortium Environment on page 459 Section 48 Merged View on page 469 Verde Staff User s Guide 440 44 The Shared Consortium Environment This section includes m Definition of Terms on page 441 A shared consortium environment is an environment in which multiple instances exist One of these instan
262. he library code must be unique within the installation Thus if a library exists in one instance another library with the same library code cannot be created in a different instance Similarly Verde does not allow you to create a library whose library code is the same as the organization code of an organization that exists in the same instance Thus if an organization with an organization code X exists in an instance a library with the library code X cannot be created in this instance m Library name Role For sites that want to synchronize Verde and SFX the following additional fields are mandatory m SFX institute code for an institute record m SFX instance code forn an instance record Verde instances interact with SFX instances and Verde institutes interact with SFX institutes Verde does not interact with SFX groups When working in a multi instance shared environment there are two additional mandatory fields in the central instance m Guest member This is a member for which the center manages resources The guest member does not have Verde instances of its own The default for 171 Verde Staff User s Guide this field is No For more information about guest members see Setting Up Guest Profiles on page 449 Related instance Managing Libraries z Deta Contacts IPs lists Proxy server E
263. he order Appendix B Explanation of Fields NOTEFORILS Table 91 Acquisition Fields Data Element Name Note for ILS Definition Note for ILS NOTEFORVENDOR NOTICEPERIODCODE Note for Vendor Notice Period Code Note to be included in correspondence with vendor The number of days before the acquisition end date that an alert should be sent to acquisition staff to review the acquisition record NUMBEROFCOPIES Number of Copies Number of copies related only to e print POOLEDCONCURRENTUSERS ORDERDATE Pooled Concurrent Users Order date The number of concurrent users if shared across a consortium rather than within a specific institution The start date of the first subscription ORDERSENDMETHOD Order Send Method Not displayed in UI Method by which the letter is sent The information is received from ALEPH order delivery type POOLEDCONCURRENTUSERS PRICE Pooled concurrent users Price The number of concurrent users if shared across a consortium rather than within a specific institution This number may be spread across one or more e products The amount paid for the product PRICENOTE Price note Note field that contains additional information regarding the subscription price PRICINGCAP Price Cap The maximum percentage of annual increase in a multi year agreement PRICINGCAPFROM Pricing Cap From Dates on wh
264. he synchronization task to start running Use the 24 hour clock format hh mm where hh is the number of hours and mm is the number of minutes Note While a batch synchronization task runs users cannot synchronize any single updates online You can avoid any conflicts by scheduling the synchronization for outside users regular work hours c Under Recurrence pattern select one of the following m Daily to schedule the synchronization to run once a day at the time you specified m Weekly to schedule the synchronization to run once a week at the time you specified Monthly to schedule the synchronization to run once a month at the time you specified d If you want the synchronization to run on weekend days select Include weekends Otherwise the synchronization does not run on weekend days 496 Chapter 50 Synchronizing e Product Updates with SFX e Inthe Start date field enter the date on which you want the first synchronization to run To enter the date click the Calendar button A calendar appears in a pop up window On the calendar select the date you want to enter Atlon verde welig lt BEN 2007 gt SMTWTFS ETE 5S 6789101 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Today is Aug 30 2007 Clear Figure 184 Calendar Pop Up Window for Date Selection f Inthe End date field enter the date on which you want to end the scheduled batch synchronization To enter
265. hen the instance name appears with a C for example TST C means that the e product is managed for TST in the center Searches that are performed with Chapter 47 Search Display and Navigation in a Shared Consortium Environment the filter managed locally will not include e products that are managed centrally 4 INS ee LJ X ax 0 0 HAAG AKO EE CE eee eee Verde erde Tasks KB Manager B Tools Adm nguage Logout Help Member 2 senetics Managing e Products z New Search New Work OW View Basket Quick Add Find genetics By All z Type Contains z e Product Type z GI Find Search results for genetics at Members MEMB2 MEMB1 Found 79 e Products v 42 2001 I Ws Elsevier ScienceDirect MEME EEE Gs Elsevier ScienceDirect a7 PS a oA P MEMB2 C Production Final Approval r J v 42 2001 Teens nigevier SD Academic P MEMB1 C Production Final Approval Elsevier ScienceDirect e CNTR MEMB2 C Production n n bMed from NCBI MEMB1 C Production z PubMed from NCBI Xy American journal of A human genetics gt N ooo2 s297 1837 O ad 6605 a 2 MEMB2 C Implementation 1 z Ci 1999 6 m ago gt EBSCOHOST MegaFILE MEMB1 C Implementation 1 z EBSCOhost e MEMB2 C Withdrawn Rejected 2001 GaleGroup InfoTrac One MEMB1 L Implementation 2 OE Galearoup 7 MEMB1 C Withdrawn Rejected v 60 6 1997
266. hich the institution is located Use restriction note License Indicates whether to use a restriction note Authorized user definition License The group of users allowed to use the Electronic Product as defined in the contract 291 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Local authorized user definition Boolean Table 53 License Input File Fields Record Field Length Type License Description The inclusion of an institution specific preferred authorized user definition Mandatory Field ILL print or fax 292 License The right to provide the licensed materials via interlibrary loan by way of printed copies or facsimile transmissions The possible values are E Null Field left blank E Not applicable E Permitted explicit E Permitted interpreted E Prohibited explicit E Prohibited interpreted E Silent These values can be customized in the code table Chapter 28 License Input Files Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Length ILL secure electronic transmission Field Type License Description The right to provide the licensed materials via interlibrary loan by way of secure electronic transmissions The possible values are E Null Field left blank E Not applicable E Permitted explicit E Permitted interpreted E Prohibit
267. icenses are listed in the table below Note The output file can be customized For details see Customized Report Outputs on page 371 Table 26 Report of Active e Products Without Licenses Internal Name Display name eproductType e Product type eproductTitle e Product title 211 Verde Staff User s Guide 212 Table 26 Report of Active e Products Without Licenses Internal Name eproductIdentifier Display name e Product identifier eproductCode e Product code workExpressionCode eproduct instanceCode Work expression code Instance code sourceInstanceCode Source instance code SFXID SFX id metaLibID MetaLib id otherID Other id otherSource Other source updateTarget Update target procurementStatus Selection status procurementStatusUpdateDate eproductStatus Selection status update date e Product status eproductStatusUpdateDate e Product status update date activityStatusDateFrom activityStatusDateTo Availability from Availability to privateNote Private note eproduct createdBy eproduct creationDate Created by Creation date eproduct updatedBy Update by updateDateCenter Update center updateDateLocal Update local activationFromDate Activation from activationToDate Activation to concurrentNumberOfUsers Concurrent number of users main
268. ich the price cap begins 513 Verde Staff User s Guide PRICINGCAPTO Table 91 Acquisition Fields Data Element Name Pricing Cap To Definition Dates on which the price cap ends PRICINGMODEL PRINTCANCELNOTE Pricing Model Print Cancellation Note A description of the fee structure applicable to the product Additional information about specific cancellation restrictions for print versions of electronic titles covered by the license PRINTCANCELRESTRICTION Print Cancellation Restriction Indicator Any restriction s on canceling print versions of electronic titles covered by a license PRINTPURCHASEORDERNO PURCHASEORDERNO Print Purchase Order No Purchase Order Number Pointer to an acquisition record in another system The number assigned to the purchase order of a product RENEWCANCDATE Purchase Renewal Date The date on which the subscription expires if it is not renewed RENEWCANCDESCISIONNOTE RENEWCANCNOTEILS Renew Cancellation Decision Note Renew Cancellation Note ILS The reason for canceling or renewing the subscription Renew cancellation note to send to the ILS RENEWCANCNOTEVENDOR Renew Cancellation Note Vendor Renew cancellation note to send to the vendor SUBSCRIPTIONNOTIFICATION Advanced notification The number of days before the acquisition end date that an alert should be sent to acquisition staff to review the acqu
269. idity of the other fields in the input file If the fields are in the correct format an access record is created If the fields are not in the correct format the line is rejected About Access Authorization Input Files Verde s access authorization loader loads the access authorization input file This input file loads the access authorization records that need to be added to the Verde database The input file contains columns for the fields in the Verde database and rows for each record being loaded Note The access authorization loader only creates access authorization records and does not update these records Each time you load new access authorization records the previous ones are deleted Thus if you want to update one or two fields in an existing access authorization record it is recommended that you do so manually in the KB Manager module The access authorization input file columns are described in Table 70 Access Authorization Input File Rules Before loading your input file ensure that your input file follows these rules m The input file includes mandatory columns When an input file does not contain mandatory columns it is not loaded to Verde and an error is logged in the summary m The mandatory columns contain values When an input line does not contain a value for a mandatory field the input line is rejected and an error is logged in the output report m The following columns are mandatory m Match m Access
270. ies out different Verde operations Staff users can be assigned roles such as Selection Librarian or Acquisitions Librarian and are linked to profiles that define their permissions within the Verde framework Super users and administrators perform their managerial tasks in Verde s Admin module which they can access from Verde s top menu after logging in to the system with super user or administrator credentials Staff users however do not have access to and cannot view the Admin module The Admin Module section describes the actions that may be performed within the following Admin module tabs Users For information on this tab see The Users Tab on page 385 Code Tables For information on this tab see The Code Tables Tab on page 385 Default Values For information on this tab see The Default Values Tab on page 417 Initial For information on this tab see The Initial Tab on page 385 Profiles For information on this tab see The Profiles Tab on page 427 Configuration For information on this tab see The Configuration Tab on page 385 38 The Users Tab This section includes m About the Users Tab on page 387 Creating a New User on page 388 E m Editing a User Record on page 399 7 Deleting a User on page 400 About the Users Tab The Users tab in the Admin module displays a list of defined users WEC Code tables Default Values Initial Profiles Configuration Users List Add
271. igate to Previous Screen 32 Chapter 3 Overview of e Product Management The most recent search can be retrieved by selecting the navigation crumb that contains the Find icon This search crumb is displayed as soon as a search is performed and continues to be displayed until a new search is performed Up to five additional crumbs are created one for each of the five e product or work records that are accessed When a sixth e product or work record is accessed a new crumb is created and overwrites the first non search crumb Note Navigation crumbs are created for work records only when the these records are accessed from the search result table If you select an e product and then view the work record of this e product a navigation crumb is created for the e product record itself but not for its work record e Product navigation crumbs display icons that correspond to the e product types m C for e constituent S for e standalone P for e package I for e interface Pr for e print W for work When you select a navigation crumb the e product or work record opens to the screen that was last viewed For example if the screen that was last viewed is a license list the e product opens to the license list if the screen that was last viewed is an acquisition list the e product opens to the acquisition list Viewing Your Basket When you view the search result table you can add records to your basket by clicking the Add to
272. ilar to an e product e Print records can be created manually or imported using a batch program They are used in Verde for information and reporting purposes only e Print records are not linked to any other e products and are associated with work records only for information on work records see About Work Records on page 35 The following diagram illustrates the relationship between e interface e standalone e package and e constituent e products e Constituents Figure 5 Relationships Between e Products e Interface e standalone e package and e constituent e products are supplied by Ex Libris as part of the Verde KnowledgeBase Ex Libris recommends that a local e product record be created only when a KnowledgeBase record does not exist for the particular e resource Existing e product records contain references to records in other Ex Libris products and are updated regularly by Ex Libris via KnowledgeBase updates Getting Started in the e Product Management Area This section describes how to search for e products in the e product management area how to view search results and how to add e products to your basket 27 Verde Staff User s Guide 28 Searching for e Products To begin working with e products within Verde you must perform a search and retrieve a set of one or more e products To search for e products 1 In the e product management area of the KB Manager module in the Find box enter one o
273. ileges we Pr Profile description AR access permissions SOON YM ORT VIM PER View access Create edit access Delete access Availabe for Instances View access authorization Creste edit access authorization Current Instance Other Instances Delete access athorizabon View SFX WP NSTI university Figure 142 Edit Profile Details 2 Edit the profile s properties as required For details see Creating a New Profile on page 428 3 Click Submit Your modifications are saved in the Verde database 430 Chapter 42 The Profiles Tab Deleting a Profile You can remove a profile from both the Profiles list and Verde database To delete a profile 1 Inthe Profiles List click the name of the profile ask B Manager KB Tools mt RN ERS LONS LOE zz Verde i en Test Library Profiles List add Figure 143 Profiles List 2 Inthe screen that opens click the Delete button and click Yes to confirm deletion The profile is deleted from the Profiles List and from the Verde database 431 Verde Staff User s Guide 432 43 The Configuration Tab This section includes About the Configuration Tab on page 433 m Configuring External Services on page 433 m Configuring the e Product Summary on page 436 About the Configuration Tab The Configuration tab in the Admin module enables you to configure parameters for external services used by Verde as well as the way in which the e product Sum
274. ime of the report completion and the Report name if a report name was configured for the task The Report status column indicates one of the following m In Process The task is still in process m Failed The task failed You can link to the report summary in the Report summary column to view any recorded errors If there is no report summary a log is available on the Verde server For access to the log on the Verde server contact your IT department Completed The task is complete and the report is ready to view 4 When the Report status column displays Completed click the link in the Report file column The File Download dialog box opens File Download H xj Do you want to open or save this file e Name YET_1188485625787_27 1 1188485625995 csv Type Microsoft Office Excel Comma Separated Values Fil Frome d verde02 While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially 7 harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or save this fle What s the risk Figure 186 File Download 498 Chapter 50 Synchronizing e Product Updates with SFX 5 Perform one of the following actions m Click Open to open the file immediately An output report file opens on your computer m Click Save to download the file and save it An output report file such as the following is saved to the location you specify 2 mm List of e products that were processed E
275. in The local Licensee acquisition cost and usage records can be created at the library level In Licensor addition it is possible to record resource access authorization Vendor information at the library level that is whether or not the library may access specific resources All other roles in the list are organization roles The role determines the organization s relationship to an e product For example the organization type Interface provider can be associated with an e interface Each organization can have multiple roles 415 Verde Staff User s Guide 416 40 The Default Values Tab This section includes m About the Default Values Tab on page 417 m Defining Default Values for a License Record on page 418 About the Default Values Tab The Default Values tab in the Admin module enables you to define default values for certain e product attribute record fields This helps increase the efficiency with which library staff can input data At the present time default values can be defined for license records only However this functionality will be added to other types of records in the future Verde Staff User s Guide Defining Default Values for a License Record You can define default values for certain license record fields To define default values for a license record 1 Inthe Admin module click the Default Values tab The license record Description and Terms tabs display
276. in both the central instance and local instance the parallel SFX item is deactivated Table 83 Synchronization in Asymmetrical Model Entire Instance e Product in e Productin How Parallel Item Is Central Member Updated During Instance Instance Synchronization 485 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 83 Synchronization in Asymmetrical Model Entire Instance e Productin e Productin How Parallel Item Is Central Member exe ej Ye PLU Late Instance Instance Synchronization Inactive Activated according to the default in the local instance also activates all SFX institutes corresponding to the libraries selected in the local instance Activated according to the default in the local instance also activates all the local SFX institutes Inactive Inactive Deactivated If the central instance is connected to specific member institutes Verde is synchronized with SFX as follows m If an e product is active in the central instance and not active in the local instance the parallel SFX item is activated in one of the following ways m If for this e product 50 or more of the local institutes are managed by the center the parallel SFX item is activated for the default m If for this e product fewer than 50 of the local institutes are managed by the center the parallel SFX item is deactivated for the default The parallel SFX item is however activated for all the local SFX institutes that correspond
277. in the table below Note The output file can be customized For details see Customized Report Outputs on page 371 210 Table 24 Report on Locally Created e Products Internal Name eproductType Display Name Product type eproductTitle eproductldentifier e Product title Identifier eproductCode e product code activationFromDate Activation from date activationToDate Activation to date creationDate Creation date workExpressionCode Work expression code oo WD oa A wy N eproduct instanceCode Instance code Chapter 21 View Report Output Report on e Products with Usage Statistics The default output parameters of the Report on e Products with Usage Statistics are listed in the table below Note The output file can be customized For details see Customized Report Outputs on page 371 Table 25 Report on e Products with Usage Statistics Internal Name Display Name eproductType e Product type eproductTitle e Product title eproductldentifier Identifier eproductCode e product code activationFromDate Activation from date activationToDate Activation to date creationDate Creation date workExpressionCode Work expression code 9 eproduct instanceCode Instance code Instance code Report of Active e Products Without Licenses The default output parameters of the Report of Active e Products Without L
278. indicator property rights not explicitly granted to the licensee are retained by the licensor Data protection Boolean License A clause that provides override fair use protections within the context of assertions of database protection or additional proprietary rights related to database content not currently covered by U S copyright law License A specification of the required or recommended form of citation 295 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Length Digital copy Field Type License Description The right of the licensee and authorized users to download and digitally copy a reasonable portion of the licensed materials The possible values are E Null Field left blank E Not applicable E Permitted explicit E Permitted interpreted B Prohibited explicit E Prohibited interpreted E Silent These values can be customized in the code table Mandatory Field Digital copy term note 296 License Information that qualifies a permissions statement on a digital copy Chapter 28 License Input Files Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Length Field Type License Description The right of the licensee and authorized users to print a portion of the licensed materials The possible values are E Null Fie
279. ing new acquisition records the acquisition loader indexes the new acquisition records License The license loader enables you to create and update license records including the license attachment in the Verde database When loading license records each new license record must be associated with a single e product Therefore before loading license records ensure that the license s associated e product exists in the Verde database In addition to creating and updating license records the license loader indexes any new license records The license loader loads licenses for all e product types except e print Library The library loader enables you to load library records of libraries belonging to your Verde instance Additional loaders are used to load the contact records for each library as well as the specific IP ranges for each library Since library contacts and IP ranges are associated with a single library ensure that the library record exists in the Verde database before you create library contacts and IP ranges for the library Organization The organization loader enables you to load records of organizations belonging to your Verde instance Additional loaders are used to load the contact records for each organization Since organization contacts are associated with a single organization ensure that the organization record exists in the Verde database before you create the organization contacts for the organization
280. inistrative record stores information about the tools provided by the electronic resource to administer an e product The administrative record also stores the user name and password information that is needed to access an e product s administration module Typically administrative records are created for e interfaces as the information is usually common for all e products available from the e interface However they can be created at any level Admin Records List The Admin Records List displays the admin record for a particular e product If there is no admin record for an e product the e product s parent admin record is inherited An admin record can be inherited from any level e package or e interface Typically admin records are maintained on the level of the e package or e interface The New Admin button is displayed at the top of the list if no admin record exists if a record does exist this button does not display The Open Admin button is displayed in the Actions column The Admin Records List displays the following information for each record i i l m whether the record is the parent record or the inherited record Verde Staff User s Guide if the record is currently active kd the code of the admin record the level of the e product type for which the record exists a button in the Actions column that enables you to edit the record if you have editing privileges and the record is not inherited Admi C
281. instance per update New Update and Delete Work expression e Interface e Package e Standalone e Constituent For more information about the KnowledgeBase update process refer to the KnowledgeBase Update Process and Instructions Guide Viewing Scheduled Tasks 370 Verde report and task options allow you to either run a report or task online or to schedule it for a later time The View Scheduled Tasks list provides details of all the jobs that have been scheduled Verde Job scheduler Tools Search by Creator INST1 administrator Gl Find Process Next job Creator Instance Recurrence Actions EProductSelectio tusReport 30 12 07 30 12 07 INST1 WEEKLY x INST1 MONTHLY x INST1 WEEKLY x x BIN 8 24 12 07 INST1 administrator INST1 DAILY Figure 116 View Scheduled Tasks List The summary display of jobs shows the name of the job the process the date on which the job next runs the job creator the instance the reoccurrence pattern for example daily weekly monthly the actions that can be performed edit or delete The Job Scheduler can be searched and filtered by the person who initiated the task creator 35 Customized Report Outputs This section includes m About Customizing Report Outputs on page 371 m Creating Your Own Properties File on page 372 m Editing the Properties File on page 372 m Choosing a Properties File on page 375 About Customizing Report O
282. instances and you want the center to manage each of these institutes you should define a library record for each institute For example if there are three local institutes VERDE21 VERDE22 and VERDE23 in member instance INST2 you would create three separate library records In each record you 445 Ve rde Staff User s Guide 446 would select INST2 as the Related instance but the Related institute would differ for each record Note If you create one library representing a specific institute and another library representing the library s member instance the library representing the member instance includes all the other local institutes within the member instance For example if you create one library with a Related instance value of INST2 and a Related institute value of VERDE21 and another library with a Related instance value of INST2 and no value for the Related institute field the latter library would include all the other local institutes within the INST2 member instance such as VERDE22 and VERDE23 to continue with example provided above Selecting Instance Abbreviations Each local instance and the center instance can select an abbreviation or acronym in addition to the instance name The instance abbreviation will display in the holdings column of the result screen and from the pull down menus that display as part of the multi instance searching and navigation The instance abbreviation is stored in the instance
283. ion Task properties Run on instances Sort by Report type Acquisitions start date Acquisitions end date Filter Package type Vendor Auto renewal type C yes No Ignore Figure 98 Report on e Packages with Acquisitions You can define the following parameters for this report m Instances available in consortium environment only Note that only instances in which the user was granted permission to run the report are displayed in the report form 191 Verde Staff User s Guide 192 m Sort by Options are m Package title m Date m Report type m Subscription start date m Subscription end date m Renewal date Acquisitions start and end dates Can be defined as equal to less than or more than If user leaves the start date blank the start date input parameter is automatically filled in with today s date minus 30 days Filter options are m Package type m Aggregator m Selective m Vendor Clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the field activates a pop up window with a list of organizations vendors with filter option by role Auto renewal type Yes No Ignore Report on Locally Created e Products This report retrieves e products that have been created locally Task properties HeBIS Universitat Frankfurt Run on instances TEST Ex Libris Universit zl Sort by Report only active e Products 7 e Product type Creation
284. ion Activated for default Activated for the SFX local institutes that correspond to the libraries selected in the center s Libraries tab The default is deactivated Inactive Active Activated according to the default in the local instance also activates all SFX institutes corresponding to the libraries selected in the local instance Inactive Active Inactive Activated according to the default in the local instance also activates any local SFX institutes that correspond to libraries selected in either the central or local instance Deactivated Note You can define certain member instances as independent If you do so synchronization is performed as in the symmetrical model described above e Product updates in the central instance will not affect your SFX instance To enable this feature contact your Implementation or Support representative SFX Tasks After Synchronization SFX synchronization can activate an SFX e product s highest level service usually Full Text only and set the appropriate coverage and libraries for this service The Verde KnowledgeBase contains packages that match SFX targets and the highest level of these targets services The hierarchy of target service levels is as follows m Full Text 487 Verde Staff User s Guide 488 E Book Review E Abstract E Table of Contents For example if in SEX there is a target with two services Full Text an
285. ion The role of the organization contact The possible values are E Other E Technical support E Account manager E Sales representative E License contact E Trial contact E Consortial contact These fields can be customized in the code table Multiple roles can be entered separated by a semicolon If this field is left blank or set to lt NULL gt the system assigns a default role of Other for the new organization contact If the input file includes a new role for the updated organization contact the new contact role is added to the list of already existing roles Mandatory Fields Contact role note 334 Additional information about the organization contact role Chapter 30 Organization and Organization Contact Input Files Organization Contact Loader Workflow After Verde performs a general validation of the organization contact input file the workflow below is followed m When creating a new contact the contact will be added without searching for a matching contact m When updating existing contacts the contact being added is compared with contacts existing in the database If a match is found on the normalized contact name organization code and e mail the contact record is updated Otherwise the contact record is added as a new contact When a new contact is created a normalized version of the contact name is used for the matching field The spaces are removed from
286. ion regarding the availability of special training such as instructions on how to bypass simultaneous user restrictions May also include training contact names and other general information Administrative documentation ADMINDOCUMENTATION Information about and or location of documentation available for product administrators User documentation Administrative ID USERDOCUMENTATION ID Information about and or location of documentation available for end users Admin ID Unique Not null Creation date CREATIONDATE Date record created Automatically generated by Verde By Latest update CREATEDBY UPDATEDATELOCAL Verde user Contains the ID of the staff person who created the admin record The date on which the record was updated in Verde By Local Admin Tab UPDATEDBY Verde user Contains the ID of the staff person who updated the admin record In the Local Admin tab any number of local usage records can be defined New records are created by clicking the Add Local Admin button Once a record has been created it can be expanded or collapsed using the or plus or minus buttons to the left of the record If more than one local record 137 Verde Staff User s Guide 138 exists all records can be expanded or collapsed by clicking the Expand All or Collapse All button Click the record s Delete button to delete the record Back to list
287. is a registered trademark of Google Inc Copyright Ex Libris Limited 2008 All rights reserved Document released September 2008 Web address http www exlibrisgroup com Table of Contents Part 1 Introduction Chapter 1 Introducine Verde sitiisie cides cin tian ilies 17 The Verde KnowledgeBase Central Global and Local 17 Verde MO eS ss mmister 18 Additional Verde Features ommoord 20 Part 2 KB Manager Module Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Introducing the KB Manager Module neven on venen eene sensenenee 23 Overview of e Product Management en ason enen senonveneneesenveneneeee 25 e Product Types eenander 25 AAE E E daarden nete dvendradanetidanna 25 BP ACKAQE acnes a a a bende a 26 E C ONSHUECNE sicsiccswivradevarunninan aneweantend Ai EEEE 26 eS tandalone ainiaan ia iaaio EEN AEA AE ANS 26 EEDE iiiter roi eren edt 27 Getting Started in the e Product Management Area ne 27 Searching Jor eProAUCIS semasa stata densan iiiki 28 Viewimne Search Results sisian cas poanteapangulgpsacasansions 29 Working with Navigation Crumbs assen denngne 32 Viewing Your Basket sorsiniossnssurnenannienni a 33 Work Records ennen 35 About Work RECORAS oisiccnccisscnscenniessonusnschavesnchosiintvnvaavonddensebeousecssetaseners 35 Adding New Work IRE COL NG ss nnen bne 36 Editing Work RECO assie dreggen 38 Deleting Work Recotds amantes 39 e Prod ct Lists antennen ten enennnntennende 41 e lntetface L
288. is defines the number of concurrent users being purchased It may be spread across one or more e products Price cap equal to less than or more than This is the amount by which the price can rise Material type Discount on price Can be defined as equal to less than or more than It is the percentage discount negotiated with the vendor Start and end dates The start and end dates of the annual subscription Can be defined as equal to less than or more than than Subscription open date Can be defined as equal to less than or more The next part of the report input deals with parameters related to local acquisitions Local Acquisition Institution MO Cost share date nn 8 Cost share E SC tC Cost share percentage v Figure 95 Reports Defining Local Acquisition Parameters 186 Chapter 20 Reports The available fields are m Institution Clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the field activates a pop up window with a list of libraries with filter option by role Cost share date Can be defined as equal to less than or more than Cost share The amount that the institution is paying for the e product m Cost share percentage The percentage amount that the institution is paying for the e product The following part of the report input deals with parameters related to invoices Invoice Invoice date Payment date Invoice status Figure 180
289. isition record SUBSCRIPTIONTYPE Subscription Type Subscription Type SUBSCRIPTIONTYPENOTE Subscription Type Note Subscription Type Note UPDATEDATE UPDATEDBY 514 Update date Updated by Acquisitions update date Verde User that updated the acquisition record Appendix B Explanation of Fields Table 91 Acquisition Fields Data Element Definition Name VENDORCODE Vendor Code Vendor Code VENDORSUBSCRIPTIONCODE Vendor Subscription The ID of the Vendor Code Subscription License Fields ACCESSABILITYCOMPLIANCE ALLRIGHTSRESERVEDCODE Table 92 License Fields Data Element Name Accessibility Compliance Indicator All Rights Reserved Indicator Definition An agreement that the data is provided in a form compliant with relevant accessibility disabilities legislation A clause stating that all intellectual property rights not explicitly granted to the licensee are retained by the licensor APPLICABLECOPYRIGHTLAW Applicable Copyright Law A clause that specifies the national copyright law agreed to in the contract ARCHIVINGFORMATCODE Archiving Format The format of the archival content ARCHIVINGNOTE Archiving Note Additional information related to archiving rights product and format ARCHIVINGRIGHTSCODE Archiving Right The right to permanently retain an electronic copy of the licensed materials 515 Verde Sta
290. isty raand peatderbatvchehestensoatdelsennt ein ansi 41 SOKA List ncn cacao genean a E AETERNE EEEE eere 43 Verde Staff User s Guide Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 e Product Attribute Records ccscsccsscessescecscsescsssesscesesssseesecserseees 47 About e Product Attribute Records aaneen eeneenvense nnen 47 Left Menu EE 48 WOK ATER sarren EE RESER A A A E AE EAEE TEREA AS 49 e Product SUMINATY ganes kneden danae 50 e Product Summary Tabee 51 Inheritance of e Product Attribute Records eneen 55 Copying and Pasting e Product Data vsiesosiseonissascasvisstinisatacsundanichesaniesnins 57 Copying Attribute Record Details ossaert doin 57 Pasting Attribute Record Details nnn 58 e Product RECOLAS cssiiccevicencecssaxceasedevasnssnbeaninredauisebteniesustensancedosreneesnsaviesares 59 Overview of the e Product Tab nanne ennen eensennenneenvenvensernen 59 General IMPOR NIGHON sossen dankdienst iiia 59 Interoperab 60 Libraries Rare drne been ab dente enden ence Tee Oran 61 Adding New e Product Records snee mes 62 Creating e Product Sets emmen 64 The Quick Add Wizard on innveriereerenertsarderdnnn dieter disaansedanerddandanv dedain 64 Creating an e Product Set Manually saret enen 65 Editing e Product Records nrden inne 66 Editing e Constituent Records oaeen nee 66 Editing e Package and e Standalone Records cississcitssvssccssssvstsasvrsosanvenes 67 Deleting e Product Bee tUS addenda edn 67 List of e Product Fields nanne
291. ium environment can be assigned profiles for one or more instances In fact multi instance searching will work only if users are assigned searching privileges in multiple instances In the current version of Verde users in member instances must be assigned profiles that enable them to search the center Working in a consortium environment requires cooperation between instances To enable users from instance A to perform actions in instance B the administrator of instance B must create an appropriate profile for instance A The administrator of instance A must then assign this profile to users from instance A To create a profile for another instance in a multi instance environment 1 Inthe Admin module click the Profiles tab The Profiles List is displayed Verde Tasks KB Manager KB Tools EEY Languages Logout Help Verde si Instance 3 Profiles List Figure 155 Add Profile 447 Verde Staff User s Guide 2 Click the Add button The profile details screen consisting of two tabbed sections Profiles and Privileges is displayed Verde PRA me Previleges Edit profile details Profile name Profile privileges Profile description Availabe for Instances Current Instance Other instances NSTI university Figure 156 Profile Details Screen 3 Enter the name you want to assign the profile as well as a description of the profile Note that the Profile name field is a required field
292. ivityStatusDateFrom Availability from activityStatusDateTo Availability to privateNote eproduct createdBy Private note Created by eproduct creationDate Creation date eproduct updatedBy updateDateCenter Update by Update center updateDateLocal Update local activationFromDate activationToDate Activation from Activation to concurrentNumberOfUsers Concurrent number of users mainContact Selector sponseringLibrary Sponsoring library automaticUpdate Automatic update activityStatus Availability activityStatusDateNote Activity status date note publicNote Public note Suppress upCode Suppress Up code freeOrSubscription Free or subscription 201 Verde Staff User s Guide 202 Table 17 e Product Fields Internal Name crossRefEnabled Display Name Cross ref enabled organizationCode Organization code Free localCoverage Free Local coverage coverageText Coverage text holdingsInILS Holdings in ILS holdingsNote Holdings note packageType Package type selectiveModeCode Selective mode code SFXID2 SFX id 2 JKEY JKEY titleKey globalEmbargoNumberOfMont hs Title key Global embargo number of months globalEmbargoOperator Global embargo operator addedToPackage removedFromPackage Added
293. k records associated with these records the following fields are mandatory E title main title m e product type E interface name For example the following sample input file creates two new e standalone records associated with two new e interface records Table 44 Creating Two e Standalone Records Match Match Title Main e Product Interface Standalone Interface Title Type Name Advanced SOL DATABASE SQL Database database interface CSA EconLit DATABASE CSA Illumina m If you are adding new e standalone records to existing e interface records and want to create work records associated with the e standalone records the following fields are mandatory m title main title m e product type match interface in order to identify the e interface The following example illustrates how to add a new e standalone Football conference record to an existing e interface record identified by CEP_1123333869159_611111 Table 45 Adding e Standalone Record to Existing e Interface Record Match Match Interface Title Main e Product Standalone Title Type Football CEP_1123333869159 611111 conference CONFERENCE 258 Chapter 26 e Standalone Input Files m To update an e standalone record enter the e product code of the e standalone record in the Match Standalone column and leave the Match Interface column empty The following example illustrates how to update the selection status of an existing e standalone re
294. ks only if an ALEPH order number is entered in the Purchase order number field of the acquisition record To renew an acquisition record click the Renew button in the Acquisitions tab Note that this button appears only if the acquisition record s status is Active or Review Acquisition records that are not active cannot be renewed The renewal function creates a new annual acquisition record with the status Active updates the existing acquisition record to Renewed and extends the license Only licenses that have been assigned the renewal type Automatic are extended Licenses that are extended automatically are extended by the amount of time entered in the Standard duration field of the license If there is no standard duration the license is extended so that the license ends on the same date as the acquisition record 10 License Records This section includes About License Records About License Records on page 103 License Records List on page 104 License Details on page 105 License Record Tabs on page 109 Prevailing Term Records on page 116 License Workflows on page 117 A license is the legal contract between a library and a content or interface provider It contains a legal description of the rights that have been purchased the terms of use and additional obligations of both parties The Verde license record contains both structured and unstructured data fields A license can be linked to one or more e products and an e
295. l Fields Tag Label Searchable By All Identifier All Identifier All Identifier All Identifier MetaLib ID All Verde Identifier All Verde Identifier Author All Organization Corporate Author All Organization Abbreviated Title All Title Title All Title Display Title All Title Imprint Update Frequency All Coverage Note Description Copyright All Language All 655 Category e Product Type All Category All 659 e Product Format All 776 eISSN Eisbn All Verde Identifier 780 Continues All Title 785 Continued By All Title 900 908 Local 1 9 All Local fields 969 Local Category All Local fields Category Local Category 409 Verde Staff User s Guide License License status 410 Table 77 License Table Functional Fields Values E Approved E Approved locally E Awaiting local signature E Electronic version created E Final legal version received E Awaiting vendor generic license E In negotiation E Pending licensor response E Pending local response E Pending final local signature B Under local review E New E Redacted version created E Rejected E Retired E Pending final signature by licensor B Under review The License status is a mandatory field Once a license has been assign
296. l Package Content is not selected the output file includes packages that match the retrieval parameters but only the e constituents that match the retrieval parameters are included in the output Verde Staff User s Guide 182 E Sort by ance one Run on instances Library Sort by Title x View Full Package Content iV Figure 90 Reports Filtering the Output The second part allows for defining parameters related to the e product e Product Filters on active records Under package E product status Selection status Activation from date Expiration date Availability from date Availability to date Availability down Sponsoring library Library contact Package type Free Suppress Cross ref enabled Figure 91 Reports Defining e Product Parameters The available fields are r Trial Implementation 1 Approved Evaluation Free Subscription C ves C No Ignore C ves C No Ignore m Filters on active records An e product is considered active if it has an e product status that is not Withdrawn and if the current date is greater than the active from date and smaller than the expiration date m Under package You can limit your report to set of e constituents that are related to one specific package Clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the Chapter 20 Reports field activates a pop up window displaying a list of al
297. l SFX sfx01 1111 verde2 External Service Type User Name Password URL Context SFX OPENURL gt 8 c 2 a DEEPLINK Alink_to cgi SYNCHSOAP admin admin cai p verde_sync cgi BY SS SS S gt gt gt lt SFX SOAP admin admin cgi p sfxadmin cgi Figure 148 List of Services for an Application The server and port values are displayed to the right of the application name The user name password and URL context values for each service are displayed in the table under the application with which the service is associated The displayed information can be edited or deleted Configuring the e Product Summary You can configure the following for the e product Summary screen m the sections to be displayed in the e product Summary screen the fields to be displayed in each section the display order of the sections the display order of fields in each section whether a section is expanded or collapsed by default 436 Chapter 43 The Configuration Tab To configure the e product Summary In the left menu of the Admin module s Configuration tab click Summary The following screen is displayed Users Code tables Default Values Initial Profiles Configuration Configuration External Services Summary Into a era ASI TREE er of the screen El E Product Expanded visible Title visible M Work data visible M e
298. l Verde e packages Select the required e package from the list EI ici x Choose parent e Product Jump to Go ABC CLIO eBooks Select 4 Access Medicine eBooks Select addall com Select AdisOnline Select AIP Digital Archive Select AIP Scitation Acoustical Society of America Select AIP Scitation American Association of Physicists in Medicine Select AIP Scitation American Association of Physics Teachers Select AIP Scitation American Institute of Physics Select AIP Scitation American Physical Society Select AIP Scitation American Society of Civil Engineers Select AIP Scitation American Society of Mechanical Engineers International AIP Scitation AYS the Science and Technology Society Select AIP Scitation Computing Society Select kd gt gt Clear Close Figure 92 Reports Under Package Parameter e product status Possible values are Trial Implementation 1 Implementation 2 Implementation 3 Production Withdrawn Selection status Values are Activation from date Date from which the e product is active Evaluation Review Approved Final approved Rejected Withdrawn by publisher 183 Verde Staff User s Guide Expiration date Date until which the e product are active Availability down yes no ignore This relates to the flag that signifies if the e product is available or not You can choose to retrie
299. lTaskOutputFormat properties for the license renewal report To create your own customized properties file copy the default file and add _name to it For example E EProductGeneralReportOutputFormat mylibrary properties E LicenseRenewalTaskOutputFormat myinstance properties Editing the Properties File The properties file contains three sections a section that controls the fields included in the output a section that controls the column names and a section that controls the header parameters Fields The first section of the file contains a list of all the fields that are included in the output and a number that controls the sequence in which the fields occur 372 Chapter 35 Customized Report Outputs For example in the EProductGeneralReportOutputFormat properties file the output fields are l eproductType 2 eproductTitle 3 eproductIdentifier 4 eproductCode 5 workExpressionCode 6 eproduct instanceCode 7 sourceInstanceCode 8 SFXID 9 metaLibID 10 otherID 11 otherSource In the LicenseRenewalTaskOutputFormat properties file the license renewal output fields are 1 licenseCode 2 licenseName 3 licensee 4 licensor 5 renewalTypeCode 6 localLicenseNegotiator 7 endDate 8 eproductTitle 9 eproductIdentifier To remove a field comment it out by inserting a hash sign at the beginning of the line For example E 3 eproductIdentifier E 7 endDate To change the order of the fields
300. ld left blank E Not applicable E Permitted explicit E Permitted interpreted E Prohibited explicit E Prohibited interpreted E Silent These values can be customized in the code table Mandatory Field License Information that qualifies a permissions statement on print copy 297 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Type of Record Field Length Field Type License Description The right of authorized users and or the licensee to transmit a hard copy or an electronic copy of a portion of the licensed materials to a third party for personal scholarly educational scientific or professional use The possible values are E Null Field left blank E Not applicable E Permitted explicit E Permitted interpreted E Prohibited explicit E Prohibited interpreted E Silent These values can be customized in the code table Mandatory Field Scholarly sharing term note 298 License Information that qualifies a permissions statement on Scholarly Sharing Chapter 28 License Input Files Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Description Mandatory Field Type Length Field Distance License The right to use education licensed materials in distance education The possible values are E Null Field left blank E Not applicable
301. led to add locally created e products to SFX Interface entity required when adding target The locally created e package is not connected to the interface Connect the package to the interface using the e product s Belong to e Interface button 503 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 89 Synchronization Task Errors Logged Error Description Recommended Action There is already an Package with the same Remove the duplicate package SFX target with the title is already value lt package title gt connected to the interface 5 After taking action view the log again If the log reports recovered from status ready navigate to the e product record using the e Product 9 or e Standalone buttons in the third column of the Synchronization History page 6 Confirm that the e product has been synchronized or that synchronization is scheduled for the e product 7 If necessary report to your IT department so that they can investigate the Verde SFX communication problems Checking Which e Products Require Synchronization 504 Verde enables you to display a list of e packages and e standalones that currently require synchronization with SFX The set of e products that require synchronization in your instance may include e products managed by another instance or may exclude e products managed in your instance For more information on which e products are included see Updates that Require Synchronizati
302. leting LACOMBE orana ded dosa davon jaca uous einai 108 Printing and E Mailing License Records ossessi 109 License Record Tabs nennen venne neve venenenneneereerenenenenen 109 Description TUD oseraies a 110 TN OPES AD aana N a a A AAA 114 License Review Tab ciicccccccccccssssscccccssssssssceccsssssesscssccssenestsssecscseeestssesesees 114 Locations Tab enn antenne AN AAE Aa 115 BETA A TAD EE A E EE EEE belaandetind 115 Prevailing Term Record emmae 116 License Workflows aaneen eeeneenneneve ven enenneneevevenennenveen 117 Access Records scones vossnenwoasenensscinvonsedehonsdsenves desnvendesntenddaneenddsdrndsseh 119 About Access Records eneen enneene seer venneneeeverenennnenen 119 Access Records List eenen aer a a iraia 119 Access Details E AE EE A AE EEE E andes edere 121 General Access IFOR APOM siririna anne 121 Access Authorization sessesessessssssssssnssrrssesssnnrressenssnnrssesenssnrensssresnnrensne 126 Admin RecordS ssssesssssssssssnsssesssssossssssossssneseesssssosssnesosssnsssess sess sssr 129 About Admin Records aaneen enenneene ener vennenesevereneneeneen 129 Admin Records List eneen eennenevevenenenneneereerenenenenen 129 Admin Details annae aeir iE EAE E E 130 Admin TAD venen anan hens EAA EEA Ai 131 Local Admin TAD ora AA OTEO TER ANARA 137 Incidents Tab orean a AEAT E lea O eae 138 Breaches TAD tis inneni a a aa aa taal 140 Trial Records scsssicccssesevesseszcasesszvescsesessccnst
303. library loan LICENSEDURATION License Duration The period of time covered by the license agreement a number LICENSEDURATIONVAL LICENSEE License Duration Value Licensee The period of time covered by the license agreement a value for example year E One to whom a license is granted E The legal party who signs or otherwise assents to the license LICENSEENOTICEPERIODOFTRMN Licensee Notice Period for Termination Unit of Measure The time interval in which the Licensee Notice Period for Termination by the library is measured LICENSEENOTICEPERIODOFTRMNC ODE Licensee Notice Period for Termination The amount of advance notice required prior to contract termination by the Licensee LICENSEETERMINATIONRIGHTS Licensee Termination Right Indicator The ability of the licensee to terminate an acquisition during a contract period 521 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 92 License Fields LICENSEETRMNCONDITIONCODE Data Element Name Licensee Termination Condition Definition The conditions that would allow a licensee to terminate acquisition during a contract period LICENSENAME License Name The locally assigned name of the license agreement LICENSEURI License Uniform Resource Identifier The URI at which the license agreement is made available LICENSEURITYPE License Uniform Resource Identifier Type The type of
304. license attachment if the user has Create edit license permissions Delete license attachment Allows a user to delete a license attachment if the user has Create edit license permissions Chapter 38 The Users Tab Attribute Access Privilege View access Table 73 KB Manager Module Privileges Description Allows viewing access records Create edit access Allows creating editing duplicating and pasting access records Delete access View access authorization Allows deleting access records Allows viewing access authorization records Create edit access authorization Allows creating and editing access authorization records View admin Allows viewing admin records Create edit admin Allows creating editing pasting and duplicating admin records Delete admin Allows deleting admin records View breach Create edit breach Allows viewing breach records Allows creating editing and duplicating breach records Delete breach Allows deleting breach records View incident Create edit incident Allows viewing incidents Allows creating editing and duplicating incident record Delete incident Allows deleting incidents View trial Create edit trial Allows viewing trial records Allows creating and editing trial records Delete trial Allows deleting trial records Note Only trial records with th
305. link This activates a dialog box for 199 Verde Staff User s Guide opening or saving the output The output is in the format chosen when running the report for example CSV or XML 1 EProduct ainterface ti Package title Constituent title Standalone t Identifier Selection Selection EProduct Acquisition code 2 Interface East View null null null Production null 3 Package East View China Electronics Information Science null Rejected 12 8 2005 Production null 4 Constituent Archives Spacetime 1008 6544 Removed 12 8 2005 Production null 5 Interface Factiva null null null Production null 6 Package Factiva null Removed 11 6 2005 ProductionACQ_1134558598247_8 7 Constituent Teen 0040 2001 Removed 11 6 2005 Production ACQ_1134558598247_8 8 Constituent 21st century fuels 1075 038 Removed 11 6 2005 Production ACQ_1134558598247_8 8 Constituent AACE International transactions 1528 7106 Removed 11 6 2005 ProductionACQ _1134558598247_8 10 Constituent ABA bank marketing 1539 7890 Removed 11 6 2005 Production ACQ_1134558598247_8 11 Constituent AC magazine 1361 3685 Removed 11 6 2005 Production ACQ 1134558595247 5 12 Constituent Accent on living 0001 4508 Removed 11 6 2005 Production ACQ_1134558598247 _8 13 Constituent Access control amp security systems integratio 1084 6425 Removed 11 6 2005 Production ACQ_1134558598247 _8 14 Constituent Accountancy age 0001 4672 Removed 11 6 2005 Production ACQ_1134558598247 5 15 Co
306. local signature Retired Pending final signature by licensor Approved locally Rejected License method Values are Negotiated Click through Online Manifest Assent m Shrinkwrap License start and end dates Can be defined as equal to less than or more than These are the dates on which the license becomes active or expires License execution date Can be defined as equal to less than or more than Date on which the license was executed Licensee Clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the field activates a pop up window of libraries licensees with filter option by role Licensor Clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the field activates a pop up window of organizations licensors with filter option by role Perpetual access rights Options are m Yes m No m Undetermined Archiving rights Options are m Yes No E Undetermined 189 Verde Staff User s Guide m Remote access Options are m Yes m No m Fair use clause yes no ignore After filling in the relevant parameters choose the delivery and scheduling options as described in Delivery and Scheduling Properties on page 178 Report e Products by Selection Status This report retrieves e products by selection status Task properties INST2 Run on instances Selection status Approved Evaluation Selection status update start date Selection status update end date Vendor SI bea Sponsoring
307. logs in to Verde The login name must be unique and cannot be identical to an existing login name even if the login name has been deleted This information is stored in the Verde database Password required The password with which the user logs in to Verde Full name required The user s first and last names E mail required The user s e mail address 388 Chapter 38 The Users Tab Table 72 User Details Description Verde system administrator Y N Determines whether the user has administrator privileges For information on managerial privileges see Introducing the Admin Module on page 385 Department The user s department within the organization Telephone 1 and 2 The telephone number s at which the user can be reached Related library The name of the institute for which the user receives e mail notification of workflow tasks for e products sponsored by the institute If the field is empty the user receives e mails for all institutes Note Workflows and e mail notifications must be configured for this functionality to work properly Note If one of the required fields is left blank and you click Submit the system returns an error message 3 Inthe User s Profiles section of the Users tab click Add profiles The Select Profiles for User window opens enabling you to select one or more using the CTRL key profiles from the Profiles List to associate with the
308. lt VendorCode gt lt VendorCode gt lt VendorNote gt lt VendorNote gt lt ILSSubscriptionId gt lt ILSSubseriptionld gt lt ILSNote gt lt ILSNote gt lt Budgets gt lt Budgets gt lt Status gt lt Status gt lt StatusDate gt lt StatusDate gt lt AcquisitionData gt lt Acquisition gt lt Acquisitions gt Chapter 41 The Initial Tab Localizing Records You use the localization process for input files created by SFX These files are used to update Verde and ensure that SFX and Verde are synchronized The first step in the process is to use the SFX export tool in order to create a localization file The localization file provides the following data from SFX status institute settings locally created targets target services objects and object portfolios For more information refer to the Verde SFX Interoperability Guide The second step optional is to create a file that provides auto activate status for target services The SFX auto activate status matches SFX selective e package types complete or partial to their Verde counterparts To create this file you must run the auto activate script on your SFX server For more information refer to Section 4 14 in the SFX System Administrator Guide After creating the export file s FTP the file s to your Verde server or save the file s on your local PC You are then ready to initiate the localization process from the Admin module s Initial tab
309. ludes m About Verde Tasks on page 219 e Product on page 220 Acquisition on page 220 Trial on page 222 License on page 223 About Verde Tasks The following Verde tasks are available m e Product m SFX Sync B Acquisitions m Subscription renewal m Subscriptions for review m Trial m Trial participant alerts m Trial management process m License m License renewal Verde Staff User s Guide e Product SFX Sync For information about the SFX sync task see Synchronizing e Product Updates with SFX on page 481 Acquisition Subscription Renewal This task retrieves all active acquisition records that are eligible for renewal and renews them Task properties Vendor oo Days before advance notice date 7 Days after advance notice date 7 Update database Vv Figure 193 Acquisition Subscription Renewal An acquisition record is active if it has a status of Active or Renewed an acquisition start date that is less than the current date and an acquisition end date that is greater than the current date This task does the following m Triggers the renewal of licenses Automatic renewal type associated with the renewed acquisition records m Creates a new acquisition record Fields that are inherited from the renewed record are Subscription open date Vendor Budgets Advance notification period Auto renewal Print cancellation restrictions and note Acquisition number 220 Chap
310. lumn s header cannot be modified m When a field is left blank or a column is removed from the input file the field is saved in the database as an empty field or a default value is supplied There are two fields in the admin record that have default values Table 64 Admin Record Fields with Default Values Fields Default Value Statistics standard compliance Counter Usage statistics frequency Annual Admin Input File Fields The following table describes the input file fields for the admin loader Table 65 Admin Input File Fields Field Name Type of Field Field Description Mandatory Length Fields Must be one of the following E Verde e product code E SFX ID of associated e product Note If you choose to use an SFX ID as the unique identifier for each record and you want to edit the file in Excel format the ID column as text If the ID column is in general or number format Excel does not store any digits past the 15th digit and the data is lost 338 Chapter 31 Admin and Local Admin Input Files Field Name Online admin module available Table 65 Admin Input File Fields Type of Field Field Description Mandatory Length Fields Boolean Denotes whether resource attributes can be directly modified online by the subscribing institution Admin URI The URI of the online administration module You can insert the value only if the Online admin module available value
311. m Admin displayed only for user with administrator permissions By default the KB Manager module is displayed when you log in to Verde Leet tele Ss Verde ey McMillan University Managing Products New Search New Work W View Basket Quick Add q Find By fal zj Type Contans Zj Product Type Gat Find Tale e Package Holdings e Intertace Actions Figure 1 KB Manager After logging in to Verde you can do the following m Review basic information about your Verde installation such as the operating system on which Verde is being run the Verde server name and the Verde version service pack version KnowledgeBase level and Oracle version that is installed All of this information appears in a pop up 18 Chapter 1 Introducing Verde window that opens when you click the Verde logo in the upper left corner of the KB Manager module 2 Verde KB Manager KB Too Managing e Proc Title E en ee ne zo OE z x B ZD JO search kad a Find LINUX il verde04 Verde 2 revision 00 copy 1 25 Jun 2008 Oracle 920 Service Pack 561 Service Pack installed on 25 Jun 2008 KnowledgeBase update level January 1 2008 update started on June 16 2008 View changes excel ez ia E Local intranet Figure 2 About Verde Review the Verde release notes by clicking the View Changes Excel link in the Verde information pop up window Change the l
312. m the range If this field is left blank the default No value is saved Internal Vendor Boolean Indicates whether the IP is internal or external Values are 0 or 1 where 0 is Vendor and 1 is Internal If this field is left blank the default value Internal is saved 325 Verde Staff User s Guide 326 30 Organization and Organization Contact Input Files This section includes About Organization Input Files on page 327 Organization Input File Rules on page 327 Organization Input File Fields on page 329 Organization Loader Workflow on page 331 Organization Contact Input Files on page 331 Organization Contact Input File Fields on page 332 Organization Contact Loader Workflow on page 335 About Organization Input Files Verde s organization loader loads the organization input file This input file loads organization records that need to be added to or updated in the Verde database The input file contains columns for the fields in the Verde database and rows for each record being loaded The organization input file s columns are described in Table 62 Organization Input File Rules Before loading your input file ensure that your input file follows these rules m The input file includes mandatory columns When an input file does not contain all mandatory columns the input file is not loaded to Verde and an error is logged in the summary Verde Staff User s Guide 328 m All of the
313. mary is displayed Configuring External Services You can configure parameters for the external applications with which Verde communicates and for the services used by Verde to communicate with these applications Verde can interoperate with the following external applications SFX ALEPH and Voyager Verde Staff User s Guide To configure parameters for external services 1 Inthe left menu of the Admin module s Configuration tab click External Services 2 Click Add New Service A wizard opens displaying the following screen Add new external service gt Select application Select Application SFX ALEPH C VOYAGER Figure 144 Select Application 3 Select the application for which you want to configure parameters and click Next 4 Inthe following step of the wizard select the application services for which you want to configure parameters and click Next By default all services are selected For information on the available SFX services see Verde SFX Interoperability on page 476 Add new external service gt Select service to add Select Service All WW Link to SFX admin center SFX DEEPLINK V Link to SFX resource SFX OPENURL Vv Sync with SFX SFX SYNCHSOAP Vv Update availability in SFX Vv Figure 145 Select Service Note Only one service is available if you selected the ALEPH or Voyager application 5 Inthe following screen enter the server name port and library for the applicatio
314. mat and general delivery settings of the report are defined when setting the input file load settings see Loading Input Files to Verde on page 236 The View Loader Output options and functionality are similar to those of the View Report Output as described in View Report Output on page 197 To view the loader output 1 From the Select a tool drop down list select View Loader Output 2 Select the loader from the list of loaders Verde Staff User s Guide 364 3 Inthe Loader menu select the report you want to view Select a tool View Loader Output z Report date Report name Report summary indAlon 7 T 12i 771 EStandAloneLoader 1 VET 12050689199 EStandAlonet ern T 12050 EStandAloneLoader i VET 12035102710 Report file EStandAloneloader 1 VET 12065340774 Corr Report s ple EStandAloneloader 1 VET 12050689199 Comple EStandAloneLoader 1 WET 12050688456 con EStandA lane padan AVET j2 0351 21443 Comple EStandAloneloader 1 VET 12035103130 Comple EStendAloneLoader i vET 12035102710 EStandAloneLoader t WET 12035102113 EStandAloneloader 1 VET 12035102113 C EStandAloneLoader 1 VET 12014392679 EStandAloneLoader 1 VET 12014392679 Comple EStandAloneLeader L VET 1201438727 EStandAloneLoader 1 VET 12014386408 EStandAloneLoader i VET 12014370360 EStandAloneloader 1 VET 12014387221 Comple EStandAloneloader 1 VET 12014386408 Comple EStandAloneloader
315. meters for the License Renewal task are listed in the table below Note The output file can be customized For details see Customized Report Outputs on page 371 228 Chapter 23 View Task Output Table 33 License Renewal Internal Name LicenseCode Display Name License code LicenseName License name Licensee Licensee Licensor RenewalTypeCode Licensor renewal type LocalLicenseNegotiator Local license negotiator EndDate EproductTitle License end date e Product title Eproductldentifier Identifier 229 Verde Staff User s Guide 230 24 Overview of Loaders This section includes About Verde Loaders on page 231 Loader Workflow on page 234 Creating Input Files on page 235 Loading Input Files to Verde on page 236 Defining Input File and Load Output Settings on page 238 About Verde Loaders Verde s loaders enable you to load e product records e product attribute records such as acquisition and license records library records and organization records to the Verde database Verde supports the following loaders m e Constituent The e constituent loader enables you to create and update e constituent records one package at a time In addition the e constituent loader creates new work records for e constituents that have no corresponding work records The loader also indexes the loaded e constituents and their work records
316. mplementation status of single instance the e product environments only Selection Status The e product s selection status field which describes the stage of the e product in the selection process single instance environments only Actions Contains one of the following buttons E The Add to basket button enables you to add an e product to your basket This button is always displayed 6 The Link to resource button opens an SFX window which takes you to the home page of the journal as it is stored by SFX This button is displayed only if the resource is active E ner The New button is displayed for each work record It is always possible to add a new e product to an existing work record The following table describes the icon buttons and hypertext links used within the search results display Table 2 leon Buttons Hypertext Links Icon Buttons Hypertext Link Description Displays the full work record Indicates that the e product is an e constituent Displays the full e product Indicates that the e product is a selective e package Displays the full e product Chapter 3 Overview of e Product Management Table 2 leon Buttons Hypertext Links Icon Buttons Hypertext Link Description Indicates that the e product is an aggregator e package Displays the full e product lt Package name gt Displays the full e product package Indicates that the e product is an e
317. ms e Product 4 1 Jan 2006 31 Dec 2006 Approved Regular LIC1167034528626_1 2 License Figure 45 License Records List The License Records List displays the following information for each record SN m whether the record is the parent record E or the inherited record m if the record is currently active the name of the license The start date and end date of the license The Start Date column can be sorted so that you can view the list of licenses from latest to earliest or from earliest to latest the status of the license the license s type the license s ID buttons to perform the following actions m edit the license E if you have editing privileges and the license record is not inherited m view the license if the record is inherited and or you do not have editing privileges B duplicate the license which enables you to copy paste the license record to the same e product if you have editing privileges Chapter 10 License Records Note To edit an inherited license click the Open Inherited Record z button that is displayed in the first column of the License Records List The parent license record opens Three function buttons appear above the list of license records New License creates a new license record Link License links the e product to an existing license that it shares with another e product New Prevailing Terms enables you to add a prevailing term rec
318. ms via SOAP services Local notes can be added and edited by users with editing privileges Notes can be deleted by users with delete privileges The Delete button is displayed at the head of the record if the record is expanded or in the summary line if the record is collapsed 4 Summary Description Terms Notes License review Locations Users Back to list xe amp CB e Product Add use note Expand all Collapse all Acquisition License a x AE Local use note type Type1 z Internal Public Local note Admin Trial Creation date By Cost Latest update By Usage Figure 51 License Notes License Review Tab The License Review tab stores notes added by license reviewers Note the plus sign to the left of the one line summary When clicked the entire license review opens In this way library evaluators reviews and opinions can be stored in a single location The following fields are available in the license review record m Reviewer m Review date m Note field Users with editing privileges can create and edit license reviews Reviews can be deleted by users with delete privileges The Delete button is displayed at the head of the record if the record is expanded or in the summary line if the record is collapsed 114 Chapter 10 License Records Locations Tab The Locations tab allows the library to record information about sub units for which
319. n e mail address to which the output report is sent To enter more than one address separate the addresses with semicolons Locally defined output The format of the output report that is displayed in Verde The default value is Verde format For information on the Default format option available for some loaders see About Customizing Report Outputs on page 371 Report name The name of the output report 6 Click Run to run the loader immediately and upload the external input file Note For information on viewing the loader s output file see Viewing Loader Output on page 363 For information on output file customization see Customized Report Outputs on page 371 Defining Input File and Load Output Settings The following fields are available in the Task Properties section for all loaders except the acquisition loader Table 35 Common Task Property Fields Description Update database If this check box is selected the data is loaded to the database If this check box is cleared a report is generated but the data is not actually loaded to the database This process is useful for validating the input file It is recommended that you run the loading the first time as a report Input file Choose one of the following two upload options according to the location of your input file E File Click Browse to locate and select the input file if the input file is located on your machine E Location on
320. n service s you previously selected The values for these fields 434 Chapter 43 The Configuration Tab should be identical for all the SFX services communicating with your Verde instance Add new external service gt Input server data SFX server information Server Name Port Library a Note changing the server details will affect all external services with SFX Figure 146 Input Server Data SFX Note If SFX services are already defined for your Verde instance the fields in this screen will be pre populated with previously defined values If you edit these values the updated values are applied to both the new SFX services you selected as well as the previously defined services Click Next 6 Inthe following screen enter a user name and data for each previously selected service This data is specific for each service Add new external service gt Input service data Server specific data of SFX DEEPLINK User Name Password Server specific data of SFX SYNCHSOAP User Name Password Server specific data of SFX SOAP User Name l Password l Figure 147 Input Service Data SFX Note The Link to SFX resource service does not require these parameters 435 Verde Staff User s Guide 7 Click Finish The wizard closes and the information you entered for each application and service is displayed in tables Each table can be collapsed or expanded Add New Service E
321. nabling you to access the e product and e product attribute records In the upper area of the screen there is a brief summary of the e product and its parent records The right pane contains the work area You can configure Verde to display either the e product details pane or the summary pane by default For more information about this configuration option contact your Implementation or Support representative Left Menu The left menu enables you to navigate between attribute records If an attribute record exists at any level e interface e package or e constituent for the e product displayed a vertical green bar is displayed to the left of the attribute 48 Chapter 6 e Product Attribute Records record name in the left menu In the example below the e product has three attribute records Acquisition License and Access Summary e Product Acquisition License Access Admin Trial Cost Usage Workflow Figure 22 e Product Left Menu Work Area The work area may contain m A summary screen of the e product m One of the related e product attribute records This may be a detailed form screen or a list of records For example the illustration below displays the Acquisition Record List in the work area Managing e Products zl New Search New Work QF view Basket Quick Add E O EBSCOHOST academic Search Alumni Edition EBSCOhost O ar Selection status Final Approved Local Holdi
322. nd selection statuses from both the local active instance and central instance Once the e package and e interface lists have been properly configured contact your Implementation or Support representative for details the Holdings column appears in these lists instead of the Selection Status and e Product Status columns If an e product is managed locally by an active instance the instance name appears with an L and the e product selection statuses following this if presented If an e product is managed by the center for an active instance the instance name appears with a C and the e product selection statuses follow this if presented 471 Verde Staff User s Guide 472 The following illustration shows merged data in the e product list El _ Metapress Baywood Publishing Company Metapress_ hid CP Status Trial e Package type Selective Sync Status Syne required EB Status Production Active 01 Jun 2008 z Jump to Go 1 15 of 24 records Filter by e Product status an z Filter by Selection status All z Display Local Display All Update Title Identifier Holdings Coverage aj 1557 Instance one L Evaluation Abstracts in anthropology Update 5136 Instance one C Trial Approved Uia 0011 Instance one L Trial Ser to oto ts 3255 Instance one C Final Approval Undeter or 276 Empirical studies of the arts nate Instance one C implementation 1 v 1 1 1983 U
323. nd a trial status of Approved has been assigned to the trial record the trial management process updates the trial status to On Trial on the trial start date Trial participants are alerted that the trial has begun The e products that are on trial are all active for the duration of the trial They have an e product status of Trial a selection status of Evaluation and Activation from and Activation to dates that correspond to the trial start and end dates Note Trials that require licenses cannot become active until there is an approved license 149 Verde Staff User s Guide Trial Over A trial is over when access to the e product is no longer available At this point the trial management process updates the trial record to Trial Over The trial decision need not be registered until the purchase decision due date is reached When the trial is over e products become inactive and the trial license is retired Decision Made When the decision is registered trial participants are alerted to the decision If the decision is to purchase the e product the selection status of the e product is updated to Approved If the decision is to defer a purchase decision of Deferred can be assigned At the same time be sure to update the decision due date The decision due date is used to alert you that a decision is due for the trial record 150 14 Cost Records This section includes m About Cost Records on page 151 m Cost Records
324. ndete uy llym in ional journal in nae Instance one L Triel Review peepee 2 Updater 2 illness crisis amp loss aoe Instance one L Trial Rejected 7 1 1999 Updates py a nali res Instance one L Trial Approved v 1 1 1981 Uptet dy The international journal of aging amp human development Gren 3 1 1976 Updeter phy m Lof hi Parte Instance one L Trial v 4 1 1971 Updater 6 Tha Tntarnatinnal ininal af newehintew in madisina 1541 Inchance ana fX Tial vartrarn ater A SI Figure 174 e Package List Merged Data The following illustration shows merged data in the e interface list Managing e Products zj New Search W view Basket Ds Metapress a Jump to Go 1 15 of 60 records Display Local Bispiay AL Title Y Holdings aj Q re f Managem Instance one L Trial Ar P MetaPress Akademiai Kiado Instance one L Production Rejected Arl Gs Metanress American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists r O Metapress American Counseling Association ow Gs Metapress American Mental Health Counselors Association Fer O Metapress American Society for Clinical Pathology Instance one L Review Ar T Metapress Baywood Publishing Company Instance one L Trial arl OQ Metapress Birkhauser Boston wr Qs Metapress Birkhauser verlag AG r Qe ances Brill Academic Publisher SSR ee a metapress Brunner Routledae rl zl Figure 175 e
325. ndicates whether an acquisition falls under a multi party agreement that uses the same license for all parties The number of concurrent users if shared across a consortium rather than within a specific institution concurrentUsersNote A specific explanation of how users are allocated or shared if pooled or platform based Additional information about the number of concurrent users listPrice netPrice The list price for the subscription The net price of the subscription Currency 278 The currency in which the subscription is paid Chapter 27 Acquisition Input Files Acquisition Loader Workflow After Verde verifies that the acquisition input file is in the correct format and that each of the rows contains the mandatory information Verde searches for an e product in the database that matches the ID or title An acquisition record is then created for this e product Verde searches for one of the following types of identifiers in the database m Verde e product code m SFX ID of e product m Title of work If Verde retrieves matches for more than one active e product the acquisition record is not loaded There can be more than one match but only one active match In addition acquisition records are not loaded if there is already an acquisition record with an overlapping subscription period which can be any of the following m The start date of the acquisition record being loaded is
326. newal is set in the license the report either renews the licenses automatically or reports on them Task properties Renewal type Licensor Negotiated Click through Online License method Days before expiration 7 Update database Vv Figure 109 License Renewal Properties The input parameter options are as follows E Renewal type Possible values are m Automatic m Explicit 223 Verde Staff User s Guide 224 Licensor Clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the field activates a pop up window of organizations licensors Local licensing negotiator Clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the field activates a pop up window of contacts License method Possible values are m Negotiated m Click through m Online Days before expiration Update database If this box is not selected the report can be run and the output reviewed before running it again in update database mode 23 View Task Output This section includes B e Product on page 225 Acquisition on page 226 5 m Trial on page 227 E License on page 228 The View Task Output options and functionality are similar to those of the View Report Output as described in View Report Output on page 197 e Product SFX Sync The output file for the SFX Synch task cannot be customized The default output parameters are listed in the table below Table 28 SFX Sync Internal Name Display Name eProduct Code e Pr
327. ng and editing organization and organization contact records Also allows deleting organization contacts The KB Tools module privileges include a list of Verde reports tasks and loaders For most of these there is a separate Run permission that allows running a job and viewing the job output For example a user with Run 398 Chapter 38 The Users Tab general report permissions can run a general report and view its results in KB Tools gt View Report Output The following table contains an explanation of KB Tools module privileges Privilege Run report Table 74 KB Tools Module Privileges Description Allows running a report and viewing the report output Run task Allows running a task and viewing the task output Run loader Allows running a loader and viewing the loader output Run SFX synch Allows running the synchronization process in two modules KB Tools and KB Manager The synchronization process for an individual e product may be triggered by clicking on the Synch with SFX button in the KB Manager module The batch synchronization process that handles all e products that require synchronization is available from the KB Tools module For details on the synchronization process see Performing Synchronization on page 491 Run LKB update reports Allows viewing results of the Verde task that updates the local KnowledgeBase For more information see Viewing KB Reports on page 369
328. ng option enables you to schedule batch synchronization to take place every day week or month at any time of day you specify The optimal choice is usually to schedule a batch synchronization to take place early every day outside users work hours This avoids interfering with users ability to synchronize individual updates and makes sure that Chapter 50 Synchronizing e Product Updates with SFX activations and deactivations scheduled for the current date are pushed to SFX at the beginning of the day When a batch synchronization task is complete you can see if the task was completed successfully and you can view an output report for the task For information about viewing the task output report see Viewing Batch Synchronization Reports on page 497 For information about checking which e products require SFX setup after synchronization and following up on synchronization errors see Monitoring Synchronization History on page 499 To configure and run a scheduled or one time batch synchronization 1 From the Verde menu bar select KB Tools 2 From the Select a tool drop down list select Task The Task menu opens 3 From the Task menu select SFX Sync The Delivery properties dialog box opens Select a tool Tak oF gt Subscription Renewal gt Subscriptions for Review Delivery properties E License gt License Renewal File format gt Trial Participant Alerts gt Trial Management Process
329. nges of volumes and or issues For example for specifying a coverage range for a title with a volume number and month you can enter the volume number range and month range in the same row in the input file For e constituents that have non continuous coverage ranges include a row for each additional range For example when an e constituent has coverage ranges from Volume 1 to Volume 15 and Volume 18 to Volume 20 the e constituent s record contains the first coverage range in the input file record The second coverage range is added in an additional record which includes only the Match field and coverage range fields Table 42 e Constituents with Non Continuous Coverage Ranges Input File Row Match Fields Coverage to Volume m Ifyou add new local coverage records the existing coverage records will be removed e Constituent records that are part of aggregator packages inherit status information and dates from the e constituents parent e packages You should therefore not include e product status or dates when loading e constituent records to an aggregator package 245 Verde Staff User s Guide e Constituent Input File Fields The following table describes the fields of the e constituent loader s input file Table 43 e Constituent Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Type Work e Product 246 Field Length Description The match type can be one of the following Bi
330. ngs embargo v 1 1 2000 v 20 2001 v 2 2000 v 5 5 2009 e Package type Selective Acquisitions Cancelled License New ir Status Production Active 06 Mar 2006 Summary Acquisition Records List e Remdack New ACQ Link acQ_ en Start subscription End subscription ACQ Number Purchase Order Status Actions Acquisition e 01 Mar 2006 07 Mar 2006 1141814603843_11 Cancelled Zj License Access Admin Trial Cost Usage Workflow Figure 23 Work Area 49 Verde Staff User s Guide 50 e Product Summary The brief summary area at the top of the screen contains summary information about the e product and can remain visible as you navigate through the e product attribute records The top line displays the first 25 characters of the e product title and the first 25 characters of the e package and or e interface title Icon buttons are used in the summary to indicate the e product type and can be used for navigation For example in an e constituent brief summary you see information from the e constituent its package and its interface Each record is displayed on its own line Managing e Products NewiSearchy New Work W View Basket Quick Add E the apne journal D EBSCOHOST academic Search Q EBSCOhost OD ar Local Holdings embargo 2002 ISSN 1046 7041 Selection status Final Approved e Packagetype Selective Acquisitions Cancelled license New Status Production Active
331. not contain all of the mandatory fields the input line is rejected and an error is logged in the output report m For new records the following fields are mandatory m Library code m Library name For example the following sample file creates two new libraries with minimal input information Table 55 Two New Libraries Library Code Library Name 555 Art Library Music Library m For updated records the Library code is a mandatory field so that the library can be identified for update The following example illustrates how to update a library record with default library access information Table 56 Update Library Record with Default Library Access Information Library Code Library Name Default Library Access 555 Art Library 1 456 Music Library 0 After loading the default library access will be updated to Include for Art Library and Exclude for Music Library m The input file columns can be rearranged and columns can be removed from the input file The text of the column s header cannot be modified m The columns in the input file may contain any of the fields available for library IP range or contact records E For new records when a field is left blank or a column is removed from the input file the field is saved in the database as an empty field m For records being updated the existing values are left unchanged including blank fields You can clear the value of a non mandatory field by entering
332. ns a brief bibliographic description of an e product Each e product must have a corresponding work expression record which contains standard bibliographic fields such as title imprint ISSN ISBN and other key fields In addition to these standard fields it is possible to define up to ten local fields A single work record can and often is linked to multiple e resources for example an e journal that is offered through multiple providers In this case there is a single work record for the journal and multiple e constituent records one for each provider that offers this title For example the journal Nature is provided by both EBSCOhost Academic Search Elite and Journals Ovid Work records are stored internally in MARC 21 XML format The Verde KnowledgeBase consists of predefined work records It is recommended that you use these work records whenever possible and that you do not create your own work records unless they do not exist in the KnowledgeBase The advantages of KnowledgeBase work records over locally created records are twofold m The KnowledgeBase work records contain links to other Ex Libris products Verde Staff User s Guide m The KnowledgeBase work records are maintained and regularly updated by Ex Libris as part of the KnowledgeBase update process Work records in the KnowledgeBase typically contain the following fields Main title Abbreviated titles ISSN eISSN or ISBN eISBN Publisher Format Fr
333. nsor Original licensor Licensee Licensee licensingA gent Licensing agent Chapter 21 View Report Output Table 19 License Fields Internal Name localLicenseNegotiator Display Name Local license negotiator deliveryRequirements Delivery requirements licenseURI licenseURIType License URI License URI type physicalLocation Physical location fileLocation File location vendorAdvancedNotice Vendor advanced notice vendorAdvancedNoticeVal Vendor advanced notice value noticePeriodCode Notice period code licensingNote Licensing note publicNote Public note replacedBy Replaces Replaced by Replaces linkedLicenseNote Linked license note renewCancMNote renewalDate Renew cancellation method Note Renewal date license createdBy Created by license updatedBy license createdDate Updated by Created date license updateDate Update date generalTermsNote General terms note userRestrictionsNote User restrictions note useRestrictionsNote Use restrictions note authorizesUserDef Authorizes user definition localSuthorizesUserDef Local authorizes user definition fair UseClauseCode Fair use clause allRightsReservedCode dbProtectionOverrideCode All rights reserved code DB protection override code citationRequirementDetails
334. nstituent s abbreviated title Imprint place of publisher The place of publishing Imprint publisher The name of the publisher e Product format The format of the resource 249 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Local category main category Table 43 e Constitvent Input File Fields Field Length Record Type Description The main category of the resource assigned locally Mandatory Field Local category sub category Local field lt number gt The sub category of the resource assigned locally One of the e product s nine local fields Selection status 250 e Product The selection status of the e product The possible values are E Evaluation E Review E Approved E Rejected E Withdrawn by Publisher E Null These values can be customized by editing the code table Chapter 25 e Constituent Input Files Table 43 e Constituent Input File Fields Field Name Type of Record Field Description Mandatory Field Type Length Field e Product e Product Theimplementation status status of the e product The possible values are E Implementation 1 E Implementation 2 E Implementation 3 E Production E Withdrawn E Null These values can be customized by editing the value in the code table If this field contains a value the Activation from date field must contain a value
335. nstituent Accountancy Ireland 0001 4699 Removed 11 6 2005 Production ACQ_1134556598247 5 16 Constituent The Accountant 0001 4710 Removed 11 6 2005 Production ACQ_1134558598247 _8 17 Constituent Accounting amp finance 0810 5391 Removed 11 6 2005 Production ACQ_1134558598247 _8 Figure 107 Report File m Report Status The last column describes the report run status Possible options are m In progress Completed m Failed General Report of e Products 200 The default output parameters of the General Report of e Products are listed in the tables below Note The output file can be customized For details see Customized Report Outputs on page 371 Table 17 e Product Fields Internal Name Display Name eproductType e Product type eproductTitle e Product title eproductldentifier e Product identifier eproductCode e Product code workExpressionCode Work expression code eproduct instanceCode Instance code sourceInstanceCode Source instance code Chapter 21 View Report Output Table 17 e Product Fields Internal Name SFXID Display Name SFX id metaLibID MetaLib id otherID otherSource Other id Other source updateTarget Update target procurementStatus Selection status procurementStatusUpdateDate Selection status update date eproductStatus e Product status eproductStatusUpdateDate e Product status update date act
336. nvention cannot be deleted 401 Verde Staff User s Guide 402 39 The Code Tables Tab This section includes About the Code Tables Tab on page 403 m Updating a Code Table on page 404 About the Code Tables Tab The Code Tables tab in the Admin module offers libraries the option of localizing the various code tables of a Verde instance Using this tab the names of fields can be changed to reflect local practices and terminology The following tables can be localized Cost Organization Access Breach Verde Task Privileges e Product Usage Work Local use terms Acquisition License Incident Verde Staff User s Guide E Admin E Trial Updating a Code Table You use the Code Tables tab to localize the code tables for your Verde instance To update a code table 1 Inthe Admin module s Code Tables tab select the topic whose table you want to modify Users Code tables Default Values Initial Profiles Configuration e Search for Table Select Topic Organization z GI Submit Organizatio a Select Field Cancel Field value Label Figure 131 Code Tables 2 From the Select Field box select the specific field within the table that you want to modify For example if you selected the Cost table in step 1 you can choose to modify the Amount or Type field 404 Chapter 39 The Code Tables Tab 3 Click Submit in the Search for Table section The selec
337. o Address Contact ID Creation date By Street Latest update By City Submit Cancel Figure 83 Library Contacts Only one contact can be defined as the main contact If you try and create more than one record with the Main contact field defined as Yes you receive an error message and the second record is not updated In addition main contact records cannot be deleted To delete such records you must first set the Main contact field to No Contact Name Kathy Letts Job Title Roles Main contact yes Contact Name Jane Brown Job Title Roles Main contact no x Figure 84 Setting Main Contact Field to No Note the option to expand or collapse all contact details If you click Expand All you can edit all of the contact records one after the other Alternatively you can click the plus button to the left of a specific record to edit this record only IP Lists Tab The IP Lists tab stores IP list ranges for use by access management devices and systems Any number of internal ranges and IP ranges can be added for a vendor These ranges can be edited at any time Use the Add Range button to add new ranges IP ranges can be entered in a single column using the and characters IP ranges can be included or excluded By default they are included IP ranges can be added in the following formats a range using the From and To columns 176 168 1 1 176 168 1 100 173
338. ocessing License Nev EB Status Production Active 18 Jun 2008 Summary Acquisitions Local Acquisitions Invoice Kelated N pack to list Q e e Product e Product name e Status Selection status Acquisition LAssociaton of Clinical Endocrinologists Evaluation 55 ademy of Management Trial License anes MetaPress Akademia Kisdo Trial Evaluation Access Figure 44 Acquisition Record Related Tab Note When you delete an acquisition record that is linked to multiple e products the record is deleted from every one of the e products to which it is connected 90 Chapter 9 Acquisition Records Deleting Acquisition Records Acquisition records can be deleted only if m They have a status other than Approved Active Cancelled Renewed or Send for additional processing m They are not linked to an invoice or a local acquisition record m They are not related to a workflow m You have delete acquisition permissions If an acquisition record can be deleted it can be deleted only from the Acquisitions tab using the Delete button that is displayed above the acquisition details The Delete button does not display if you do not have appropriate privileges or if the record cannot be deleted Printing and E Mailing Acquisition Records Individual acquisition records can be printed and e mailed by clicking the Print or E Mail buttons These buttons appear above the acquisition record The
339. ode DB protection override code citationRequirementDetails Citation requirement details digitalCopyCode Digital copy code digital CopyTermNote Digital copy term note printCopy Print copy printCopyTermNote Print copy term note scholarySharing Scholarly sharing scholarySharing Note distanceEducation Scholarly sharing note Distance education or fax code distanceEducationTermNote Distance education term note intrLibPrintOrFaxCode intrLibSecureTransCode Intr lib print Intr lib secure trans code intrLibElectronicCode Intr lib electronic code intrLibKeepingRequiredCode intrLibTermNote Intr lib keeping required code Intr lib term note courseReservePrintCode Course reserve print code courseReserveElcORCashCode Course reserve Electronic or cash code courseReserveTermNote Course reserve term note electronicLinkCode Electronic link code electronicLinkTermNote Electronic link term note coursePackPrintCode Course pack print code coursePackElectronicCode Course pack electronic code coursePackTermNote remoteAccessCode Course pack term note Remote access code 215 Verde Staff User s Guide 216 Table 26 Report of Active e Products Without Licenses Internal Name workinTermUseNote Display name Work in term use note localUsePermission Local use permission
340. ode Level Actions LAD_1142338516061_88 Package reg Figure 60 Admin Records List n Details The admin record contains four tabs m Admin For details see Admin Tab on page 131 m Local Admin For details see Local Admin Tab on page 137 m Incidents For details see Incidents Tab on page 138 m Breaches For details see Breaches Tab on page 140 mmary Local Admin Inadents Breaches Bask to list i e Product a Acquisition Configuration Usage statistics Online admin module C ye CN Usage statistics C Yes C No oons available available Acces Session timeout C ve C ne pn edna counter Admin Logout URI C ves Cn Usage statistics me delivery method ri User e Interface C ve CN sel add M HTML a Usa a brand laag zie Usage Buhact ter randing C ve CN e Submit Cancel Figure 61 Admin Details To the right of the tabs the following four buttons are available 130 Delete Enables you to delete the record if you have the required permissions Copy e Product Admin Enables you to copy the record Print Enables you to print the record Send E Mail Enables you to send the record via e mail Chapter 12 Admin Records Note There are no mandatory fields in the admin record You may define field values as required Each Note field is 500 characters long Admin Tab The Admin tab consists of three sub sections m Configuration This section covers all aspects related to configurati
341. oduct Code eProduct Type e Product Type Processing Date and Processing Date and Time Time Verde Staff User s Guide Acquisition Subscription Renewal The default output parameters for the Subscription Renewal task are listed in the table below Note The output file can be customized For details see Customized Report Outputs on page 371 Table 29 Subscription Renewal Internal Name AcquisitionNumber Display Name Acquisition number AcquisitionCode Acquisition code PurchaseOrderNo VendorCode Purchase order no Vendor VendorSubscriptionCode Vendor subscription code Price OrderDate Price Order date SubscriptionStartDate Subscription p start date 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SubscriptionEndDate EproductTitle Subscription p end date e Product title Eproductldentifier Identifier Subscriptions for Review The default output parameters for the Subscriptions for Review task are listed in the table below Note The output file can be customized For details see Customized Report Outputs on page 371 226 Chapter 23 View Task Output Table 30 Subscriptions for Review Internal Name AcquisitionNumber Display Name Acquisition number AcquisitionCode Acquisition code PurchaseOrderNo Purchase order no VendorCode Vendor VendorSubscriptionCode Vendor subscription code
342. om both the Users List and Verde database To delete a user 1 Inthe Users List click the user s login name U Code tables Default Values Initial Profiles Configuration Users List i Add Login Name Full Name Instance Telephone INST3 administrator Administrator Instance 3 02 555 333 666 joe Joe Instance 3 03 657 958 22 Judy Judy Instance 3 054 7 6874 32 Figure 129 Users List 400 Chapter 38 The Users Tab 2 Inthe screen that opens click the Delete button that appears in the top right corner Verde Welcorne TST administrator Test Instance TST Users WELL m User details e Login name Password Full name Email Verde system administrator User s profiles Add profiles Target Instance Test Instance TST licensor Department L sessesse Telephone 1 02 256 356 456 Licensor Telephone 2 verde task exlibrisgroup com Related Library Music Library s no C yes Created by TST administrator j Profile Profile description Delete Licensor permissions for license all reports related to license run licenses data loader x permission Guest Search basket view e Products view WorkExpressions x Submit Cancel Figure 130 Delete User 3 Click Yes to confirm deletion The user is deleted from the Users List and from the Verde database Note Instance administrators created during installation with the instancename_ administrator naming co
343. om date a emits Expiration date From Trial To Volume Cost Concurrent number of users From Vol Usage k Sponsoring Library os To Volume Workflow Library contact 5 Embargo From up to e Months Public note 2 Local Holdings Submit Cancel Ex Libris 2006 Figure 172 Merged View e Product Brief Summary e Product Summary Tab The merged view in the e product Summary tab is available to you in member instances for all e products The information is shown in the following sections e Product and Work Information e Product Information Libraries Acquisitions Admin Trial and Workflow All of the sections except the first are divided into two parts Local and Center where Local shows the data from the local active instance and Center shows the data from the central instance Most of fields in the first section contain values that cannot be configured and are therefore the same in all instances These are Title Global coverage e Product type Interface and free fields All other sections contain fields from the e product that are configurable and the values can therefore be different in different instances These sections are divided into two columns to show information from the local active instance and from the central instance The Library section displays only active libraries for the local instance The Summary tab includes several data types text icons and links The text is displayed regardl
344. on such as user interface configuration branding and Z39 50 support Note the following m Ifyou select Yes for Online admin module available an additional field is displayed enabling you to input the admin URI m Ifyou select Yes for Session timeout a box opens enabling you to enter the timeout value in minutes m Ifyou select Yes for Logout URI an additional field is displayed enabling you to enter the logout URI value m Usage statistics This section contains fields describing elements related to usage statistics such as availability frequency and format m Support This section lists all the fields pertaining to support such as hard and software requirements training information and user documentation There are three URI fields that contain links m Admin URI Logout URI value E Provider system status URI After you click the Submit button these fields became editable Click the Edit button to edit these fields Summary Local Admin incidents Breaches Back to list e Product Acquisition Configuration Usage statistics Online admin module ve CN Usage statistics C ve C No cens License available available Access Admin URI Edit Statistics standard Counti compliance y Admin Session timeout C ve CN Trial Logout URI ve CN Usage statistics M HTML C Cost Logout URI value http www exlibrisqroup c Edit format 0 ra Us u Workflow Syne History Submit Canc
345. on about linking LOCALLICENSENEGOTIATOR LOCALSUTHORIZESUSERDEF Local License Negotiator Local Authorized User Definition Indicator The name of the local person responsible for negotiating the license The inclusion of an institution specific preferred authorized user definition LOCALUSEPERMISSION Local Use Permission Local use note MAINTENACEWINDOW Maintenance Window The recurring period of time reserved by the product provider for technical maintenance activities during which online access may be unavailable METHODCODE Method Code License method NONRENEWALNOTICECODE Non Renewal Notice Period Unit of Measure The time interval in which the Non Renewal Notice Period is measured 523 Verde Staff User s Guide NONRENEWALNOTICEPERIOD Table 92 License Fields Data Element Name Non Renewal Notice Period Definition The amount of advance notice required prior to license renewal if the licensee does not wish to renew the subscription ORIGINALLICENSOR Original Licensor The original organization granting the license PERFORMANCEWARRENTYIND Performance Warranty Indicator Indicates whether a clause that requires a satisfactory level of online availability and or response time is present PERPETUALACCESSFROM Perpetual Access From The date from which there is perpetual access PERPETUALACCESSRIGHTS PERPETUALACCESS
346. on on page 482 To display e products that require synchronization 1 From the Verde menu bar select KB Tools 2 From the Select a tool drop down list select SFX Sync To Be Synced The SFX To Be Synced list appears SFX To Be Synced Tools Title EBSCOhost BioMedical Collection Corporate P yne sir Metapress Academy of Management Q Sync required Metapress American Counseling Association Q Sync required Figure 191 SFX To Be Synced List The Sync Status column displays the synchronization status Sync required for e products that are in the synchronization queue Chapter 50 Synchronizing e Product Updates with SFX You can use the e Product 9 or e Standalone O gt buttons to view the e products This enables you to synchronize any of the e products immediately as described in Synchronizing per e Product on page 492 If the list is very long and you have a daily batch synchronization that takes place at night you might want to check that the e products on the list were updated during the current day If the e products have been waiting since before the last scheduled batch synchronization check the status of the batch synchronization task see Monitoring Synchronization History on page 499 Checking Which e Products Are Being Synchronized The Verde SFX To be Synced list displays a list of e products currently being synchronized To display a list of the e products currently being synchronized From the Verde m
347. on y Terms Notes License review Locations Users Back to list x a e Product a Type Regular E i Acquisition ype egular License Now status License name License License I E Figure 28 Copying Attribute Details After you have clicked the Copy button the View Clipboard button is displayed on the top line of the e product screen i gt GRD CRD Gan Figure 29 View Clipboard Button Click the View Clipboard button if you want to view the contents of the clipboard View Clipboard License details e Product name EBSCOhost Academic Search Elite e Product code CEP_1123334177030_612019 e Product type Package License ID LIC1142167446062 6 License Type Regular License method Negotiated Physical licence location 1234567890123345534534 Renewal type Automatic License status New License Terms Local authorized user definition Figure 30 View Clipboard 57 Verde Staff User s Guide Pasting Attribute Record Details Locate the e product record in which you want to paste the details that you copied to the clipboard and click the relevant tab in the left menu The Paste button is displayed at the top of the list if the paste function is available New License Link License License name Start date Y End date License status License type ID Actions Figure 31 Pasting Attribute Details Note The paste function is available only if the at
348. onization task as reviewed see Monitoring Synchronization History on page 499 Part 8 Appendixes Part 8 contains the following m Appendix A Indexing on page 509 m Appendix B Explanation of Fields on page 511 Verde Staff User s Guide 508 A Indexing Searching e products in the KB Manager is possible on a number of defined indexes These indexes are built from fields in the e product record Table 90 Indexing Indexes Title index WTI 210 222 240 245 246 249 785 780 Identifier WVI 090 Name WNA 100 110 Category WCT 690 License Code Name WLN 546 969 509 Verde Staff User s Guide 510 Explanation of Fields This section includes B Acquisition Fields on page 511 m License Fields on page 515 Acquisition Fields Table 91 Acquisition Fields Data Element Definition Name ACQUISITIONCODE Acquisition Identifier The identification number assigned to the Acquisition by the electronic resource management system ACQUISITIONMETHOD Method Method of acquisition ACQUISITIONNUMBER Acquisition Number The acquisitions number ACQUISITIONSTATUS The status of the acquisition record ACQUISITIONSTATUSDATE Acquisition Status The date that the acquisition Date status was assigned ADVANCENOTICEDATE Advance Notice Date Calculated by the system based on the advance notification period and the acquisition end date AUTORENEWAL Renewal Ty
349. onstituent from the results screen from the package list and from the e product summary screen It is available for active e products only Tithe 19th century music 0148 2076 1533 8606 2001 20 century British history 0955 2359 1477 4674 v 13 1 2002 v 13 1 2002 2002 12 m ago 7 3 2002 401 k advisor 1080 2142 1998 AACE International o e Package Holdings e Interface Js ProQuest 000 Verde Production Final Approval 0 Verde Production Final Approval 0 Verde Production Approved 0 ProQuest SOC Verde Production Final Approval Go Figure 179 Linking to an Active Resource Proquest verde Production approved OQ EBSCOhost Actions Pd KS e a lO EAS Nev a O 479 Verde Staff User s Guide 480 50 Synchronizing e Product Updates with SFX This section includes Overview of Synchronization on page 481 Synchronizing Updates in Consortia on page 483 Synchronizing Locally Created e Products on page 489 Performing Synchronization on page 491 Monitoring Synchronization History on page 499 Checking Which e Products Require Synchronization on page 504 Performing SFX Setup on page 505 Overview of Synchronization Verde and SFX both manage the activity status libraries and coverage of certain e products Verde enables you to synchronize with SFX from the Verde interface whenever you use Verde to update the activity status
350. ontains the mandatory information Verde searches for a record in the database that matches the ID field as follows m Verde searches the database for a matching e standalone m Ifthe e standalone is found Verde updates the e standalone m Ifthe e standalone is not found Verde searches for a matching e interface m Ifa matching e interface is found Verde creates the e standalone and connects it to the e interface m Ifa matching e interface is not found but work information is provided in the input file Verde creates both a work and an e product record for the e standalone and e interface Otherwise Verde rejects the row in the input file and writes an error to the loader s output file m For new records that include unique identifiers such as ISSN eISSN ISBN eISBN Verde performs duplication checking If the identifier does not exist in the Verde KB Verde creates both work and e product records Otherwise Verde rejects the row in the input file and writes an error to the loader s output file 274 27 Acquisition Input Files This section includes m About Acquisition Input Files on page 275 Acquisition Input File Rules on page 275 o Acquisition Input File Fields on page 276 a Acquisition Loader Workflow on page 279 About Acquisition Input Files Verde s acquisition loader loads the acquisition input file This input file loads acquisition records that need to be added to the Verde database Each
351. or library code Local Admin Local admin user name user name Local Admin Local admin password password Local Admin Local admin password password note note Usage statistics The identifier used for user name online access to the usage statistics file Usage statistics The password used for password online access to the usage statistics management site or dataset 346 Chapter 31 Admin and Local Admin Input Files Table 66 Local Admin Input File Fields Field Name Type of Field Field Description Mandatory Length Fields Usage statistics Text 255 Additional information password note regarding usage statistics Local Admin Loader Workflow After Verde verifies that the local admin input file is in the correct format and includes mandatory columns it examines the Match field m Ifno match is found for this field the line is rejected If Verde retrieves more than one e product the line is rejected Otherwise Verde checks whether an admin record exists for the e product m If an admin record is not found the line is rejected E Ifan admin record is found Verde checks the Library field value in the input file m Ifa match is not found the line is rejected E Ifamatchis found Verde creates the local admin record 347 Verde Staff User s Guide 348 32 Access and Access Authorization Input Files This section includes About Access Input Files on page 349 Acces
352. ord This button is displayed only if there is an active license A license is considered active if it is of the status Approved If there is an active license workflow for an e product the Workflow button is displayed above the License Records List Clicking the button opens the list of tasks for the workflow License Details The license and prevailing term records contain the following tabs Description Terms Notes License Review Locations Users There are approximately 110 licensing fields Sites can set default values for new licenses Default values are set by local administrators in the Admin module Summary ES Terms Notes License review Locations Users Back to list z e Product A FRF Type Regular z License Acquisition status New zl a License name License nn License a 5 status note feel EERE License method Click through z el Admin License TT Trial start date Licensor oo License nT ea end date Original licensor m Usage Date Renewed ig Licensee oo Workflow eetl Fl execution date Licensing agent ven xl Figure 46 License Details 105 Verde Staff User s Guide 106 In the license detail tabs the following actions are possible m return to the License Records List print the license details e mail the license details copy the license paste the license In the Description tab you can add an external license file in any format Note that th
353. orkflow iessscistsesseiess csictensnanidsnsarnisneroueamsaancnaiwradss 279 License Input Files selevcetaadiesloatecrssisdlaiaencaiad 281 About License Input Pes zanden 281 License Input File UGS aenema tetesa ehehe 281 License Input File Vili wonnen 283 License Loader Workflow nanne envensernennennvenseeneenveneenvennenn 313 Library Library Contact and Library IP Input Files 315 About Library Input BG obd eiser aret 315 Library Input File Rules nnen 315 library put Fil PIAS evonet nende 317 Library Loader Workflow seassassuninasucvicomunvcaridunanilecnnsentdnnccnsasnteonnoniwesteh 320 Library Contact Input Files nennen iiis 321 Library Contact Input File Fields smeet 321 Library Contact Loader WorkHlOWi snoeren 324 Library IP oput FES meden 324 Library IP Input File Fields oane mna 325 Organization and Organization Contact Input Files 327 About Organization Input Files states sstaneasdenneniecteioneins 327 Organization Input File Rules opererende nnie 327 Organization Input File PaCS noen ditte 329 Organization Loader Workflow smerende 331 Organization Contact Input Files noren 331 Organization Contact Input File Fields sns neen 332 Organization Contact Loader Workflow aaneen 335 Admin and Local Admin Input Files nen ense senen veeenenenveneneen 337 About Admin Input Files speet 337 Admin Input File BUES nntb 337 Admin baput File FAS VS nente ene ette eneen 338 Table of Contents Admin Loader WorkElOnt annette
354. ory fields Other fields can either be completed or left blank If no role is selected the role Other is assigned by default Details Gontacts Add Contact Expandall Sollapseuall El ContactName Job Title Roles Main contact no x Contact Name Main contact No C Yes Job Title Contact role Accountmanager Consortial contact Email License contact Sales representative Z Phone no met Contact role note z a Alternate phone no Fax no _ Address Contact ID Creation date By Street Latest update By City x Submit Cancel Figure 78 Add Contact Only one contact can be defined as the main contact If you try and create more than one record with the Main contact field defined as Yes you receive an error message and the second record is not updated In addition main contact records cannot be deleted To delete such records you must first set the Main contact field to No Note the option to expand or collapse all contact details If you click Expand All you can edit all of the contact records one after the other Alternatively you can click the plus button to the left of a specific record to edit this record only El Contact Name Peter Brown Job Title Roles Main contact yes El Contact Name John Smith Job Title Roles Main contact no Figure 79 Collapsed Contact Records 167 Verde Staff User s Guide
355. oth the libraries and the consortium level from its package e Product Attributes When an e product is managed centrally the activity status coverage and availability must be set in the central instance for all member instances However other data can be managed centrally or locally depending on the local practice In many consortia trials acquisitions and licensing are performed centrally but access usage and cost are maintained by the local instances Managing Resources Locally Resources that are managed locally are managed in the member instance for the member instance When resources are managed locally the e product and all of its attributes are updated and maintained in the member instance alone An e product can be managed for a member by the center and managed by the member for itself at the same time This can occur when a member purchases additional titles from a package or when they purchase additional coverage e Product Libraries Member instances can have library sub divisions The e product library data can be maintained for resources that are managed locally by the member instance e Product libraries cannot be set in the member instance for resources that are managed in the center 455 Verde Staff User s Guide 456 Consortium Level The consortium level displays in the third tab of the e product record the e product Libraries tab The consortium level is set automatically by the system For records
356. ou would create two libraries for example B_i and C_i to represent these institutes and one library for example A to represent all the other institutes that are a part of the member instance When creating library A you would define the Related instance as the member instance and you would leave the Related value undefined You would then choose e Product gt Libraries and select only libraries B_i and C_i and not library A in the Libraries tab The e product would thus be managed by the center for institutes B and C while the member instance would manage the e product for institute A Synchronization Rules If the central instance is connected to an entire member instance Verde is synchronized with SFX as follows m If an e product is active in the central instance and not active in the local instance the parallel SFX item is activated for the default All libraries in the Libraries tab m If an e product is inactive in the central instance and active in the local instance the parallel SFX item is activated according to the default in the local instance s Libraries tab All the local SFX institutes that correspond to the libraries selected in this tab are also activated m If an e product is active in both the central instance and local instance the parallel SFX item is activated according to the default in the local instance s Libraries tab All the local SFX institutes are also activated m If ane product is inactive
357. ources JBoss Documentation JBoss Wiki e JBoss JIRA e JBoss Forums JBoss JMX Console JBoss Management User name a TST_administrator gt Tomcat status full XML Password eeccccccccccccess e JMX Console e JBoss Web Console J Remember my password cme Figure 118 JBoss JMX Console Login The JMX Agent View page opens Chapter 35 Customized Report Outputs 3 Locate the Verde section at the end of the page and click the Report Customization Manager Service link in this section verde service CAARActionRuleMngr senvice ConfigurationMngr service GeneralConfigurationMngr service InitializationMngr senice RBAMngr service ReportsCustomizationMngr senice stafitingr e service SystemSettingMngr e senice TaskManagerMngr serice Verdelnfo service VerdeProcessMngr Figure 119 JMX Agent View Verde Section The JMX MBean View page opens 4 Locate the refreshCache section and click Invoke The JMX MBean Operation Result page opens with the result of the operation Address a http il verde02 38080 jmx console HtmlAdaptor JMX MBean Operation Result Operation refreshcache Back to Agent View Back to MBean View Reinvoke MBean Operation Operation completed successfully without a return value Figure 120 JMX MBean View Refresh Cache 5 Log in once again to your Verde environment The name of your own properties file is now displ
358. ourses of instruction COURSERESERVETERMNOTE Course Reserve Term Note Information which qualifies a permissions statement on Course Reserves CREATEDBY Created By Verde user CREATEDDATE Created Date Date of creation CUREPERIODFORBREACH CUREPERIODFORBREACHUOMCODE Cure Period for Breach Cure Period for Breach Unit of Measure The cure period for an alleged material breach The time interval that measures the Cure Period for Breach DBPROTECTIONOVERRIDECODE Database Protection Override Clause Indicator A clause that provides fair use protections within the context of assertions of database protection or additional proprietary rights related to database content not currently covered by U S copyright law DELIVERYREQUIREMENTS License Delivery Instructions The required medium in which official communications must be delivered DIGITALCOPY CODE 518 Digitally Copy The right of the licensee and authorized users to download and digitally copy a reasonable portion of the licensed materials Appendix B Explanation of Fields Table 92 License Fields DIGITALCOPYTERMNOTE Data Element Name Digitally Copy Term Note Definition Information which qualifies a permissions statement on digital copy DISTANCEEDUCATION Distance Education The right to use licensed materials in distance education DISTANCEEDUCATIONTERMNOTE Di
359. package is active its e constituents can be activated in one of the following ways m by clicking the Update button in the top right corner of the package list or in the basket m by updating the e Product status field in the constituent s e product screen in batch mode using the Verde e constituent loader For more information about updating e constituents in the package list see e Package List on page 43 For more information on the e constituent loader see e Constituent Input Files on page 243 Table of e Product Updates Table 6 e Product Selection Status Updates Action Is e Is There Results Product an Acq Active Evaluation Standalone update selection status to Interface Evaluation Package I Updates all e constituents to aggregator Evaluation selection status Package Must manually update all selective e constituents to Evaluation selection status using the update function in the package list 78 Chapter 8 Selection Workflows Action Review assign a selection status of Review Table 6 e Product Selection Status Updates Standalone Interface Is e Product Active Is There an Acq Results Constituent Package aggregator Updates all e constituents to review selection status Package selective Must manually update all e constituents to Review selection status using the update function in the package list
360. pe A clause which specifies whether renewal is automatic or explicit 511 Verde Staff User s Guide BUDGETS Table 91 Acquisition Fields Data Element Name Budgets Definition The names of the budgets or funds that is paying for the subscription CONCURRENTUSERSNOTE Concurrent User Note E A specific explanation of how users are allocated or shared if pooled or platform based E Additional information about the number of concurrent users CONSORTIALAGREEMENT Consortial Agreement Indicator Indicates whether an acquisition falls under a multiparty agreement that uses the same license for all parties CREATEEDBY Created By Verde user CREATIONDATE CURRENCY Created Date Currency Date of creation The acquisition payment currency Default value is U S D The default can be changed using the Codes section of the Admin module DISCOUNTONPRICE Discount on Price A discount in price or in pricing formula ID ILSSUBSCRIPTIONNO INFLATIONRATE ILS Subscription No Inflation Rate The Subscription number in the ILS The inflation rate defined in percentage terms INSTANCECODE Instance code The instance code logical identifier of an instance where acquisition record was created LISTPRICE List price Publishers list price MATERIALTYPE Material Type Material Type NETPRICE 512 Net price Net price of t
361. port name 2 header spaces 4 3 header libraryName yes 4 header spaces 4 5 header dateFormat dd mm yyyy at HH mm ss This produces the following header Subscriptions for Review Report Ex Libris University 20 12 2005 at 12 40 22 Choosing a Properties File In the drop down list the system automatically provides a list of all the properties files that exist for the report task being run After modifying the properties files use the JMX console to refresh the drop down list Alternatively you can restart Verde to refresh this list When a new instance is created using the Duplicate function the properties directory is created 375 Verde Staff User s Guide 376 If for some reason the instance is created a different way use the ReportsCustomizationMngr JMX console service to copy the directory for a new instance Enter the new instance name in the window provided To refresh the drop down list using the JMX console 1 Reduce the URL address of your Verde environment in your Web browser so that the address includes only the following http lt server name gt lt port number gt Go to this URL The JBoss page opens 2 Under JBoss Management click JMX Console In the login prompt enter your instance administrator user name and password File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q Or Asen rme OG J 3S Address E http il verde02 38080 Connect to il verde02 A JBoss Online Res
362. pproved Note It is recommended that the final approval rejection of packages be performed after all of the package s e constituents have been approved or rejected Approval and Final Approval Approval can follow evaluation or review The selection status Approval is used to indicate preliminary approval When this status is assigned to a selective package it means that the review of the package e constituents should begin When this status is assigned to any other e product it means that there is preliminary but not final approval 75 Verde Staff User s Guide 76 The selection status Final Approval means that the e product has been approved either for activation or for renewal The status Final Approval can be assigned directly to e products of type e interface e package and e standalone It should not be assigned directly to e constituents e Constituents are updated by the system as a result of an update to their e package record or manually using the Update buttons in the package list The following rules apply to e constituent updates m Aggregator Packages When the package is updated to a selection status of Final Approval the selection status of all e constituents is automatically updated to Final Approval m Selective Packages Use the filter in the package list to filter for approved e constituents Then use the Update buttons to update the selection status of each e constituent and activate it Rej
363. price pricingModel Pricing Model pricingCap Price cap priceCapFrom Price Cap From priceCapTo Price Cap To consortialAgreement Consortial agreement pooledConcurrentUsers Pooled concurrent users autoRenewal subscriptionNotification Auto renewal Subscription notification vendorAdvancedNotice Vendor advanced notice 203 Verde Staff User s Guide 204 Table 18 Acqusition Fields Internal Name noticePeriodCode Display Name Notice period code instituteCode Institute Code campusCode concurrentUsersNote Campus Code Concurrent Users Note acquisition budgets Budget acquisition createdBy Created By acquisition updatedBy Updated By acquisition creationDate Creation Date acquisition updateDate Update Date subscriptionStartDate Subscription p start date subscriptionEndDate Subscription p end date Table 19 License Fields Internal Name licenseCode Display Name License code licenseName License name typeCode methodCode License type License method license startDate License start date license endDate executionDate License end date License execution date licenseDuration License duration license statusCode License status statusNote License status note licensor Licensor originalLice
364. product and then delete the work record Work records that are part of the KnowledgeBase cannot be deleted In consortia installations locally created work records are automatically propagated to other instances 39 Verde Staff User s Guide 40 gt e Product Lists This section includes m e Interface List on page 41 B e Package List on page 43 There are two types of e product lists m e Interface B e Package which contains the following types of lists E Selective Q m Aggregator S Note The e interface and e package lists can be modified in multi instance shared consortium environment For details see Viewing Merged Data in the e Package and e Interface Lists on page 471 e Interface List The e interface list displays the e packages and or e standalone records offered through the interface The e products are sorted alphabetically by Verde Staff User s Guide 42 title The e product status and selection status of each e package or e standalone is displayed in the list Managing e Products 5 EBSCOhost Jump to iE i Go 1 15 of 85 records y Product Status P Ps Praduction s Implementation 1 O Q EBSCOHOST Advanced Placement Source EBSCOhost alt HealthWatch EBSCOHOST American Humanities Index P EBSCOhost American Medical ation Collection OE ost Applied Science amp Technology P SCOhost Art Index Production
365. pushed Standalones that are databases belong in Verde but not in SFX Standalones that are journals but are not part of the KnowledgeBase do belong in SFX For sites that have a lot of locally created journals that are not part of a package we recommend that they create a pseudo package so that the constituents of the package can be transferred automatically to SFX The package should be assigned a name such as Miscellaneous Local Journals and should have SFX as the update target Journals that are constituents of this package will be transferred to SFX as object portfolios of the same target The advantage of creating a pseudo package instead of creating a lot of standalones is that the package and its constituents will be transferred while individual standalones will not be Assigning the SFX ID When the Verde record is transferred to SFX SFX creates the appropriate SFX record or records and assigns SFX IDs These IDs are sent back to Verde where they are inserted in the Verde record as follows Table 87 SFX Verde ID Assignments Verde ID Object portfolio internal ID e Constituent SFX ID Target internal ID e Package SFX ID2 does not display in the UI Target service internal ID e Package SFX ID Interface internal ID e Interface SFX ID Performing Synchronization Verde enables you to synchronize e product updates individually or as a batch task Note Both options are controlled by the Run SFX synch user privil
366. r more search terms Note that Verde supports the following Boolean operators AND OR NOT If one or more terms are entered without a Boolean operator Verde performs a phrase search For each term the and regular expressions are supported From the By drop down list select an index to search Alternatively you can select All to search an index that contains all fields in the work record for information about work records seeAbout Work Records on page 35 and the following fields from the e product and its attribute records e Product status Selection status e Product type e Package type Acquisition status and License status For more information about indexes see Indexing on page 509 From the Type drop down list select one of the following search types m Contains A keyword search for one or more search terms that appear anywhere in a record m Exact Match A search that treats the search term as a phrase and looks for an exact match for the term being searched m Starts With A search for records in which the search term appears at the beginning of the field It is most useful for searching for a record title From the e Product Type drop down list select the default All to search within all the e product types or select one of the five e product types to search within the selected e product type only If you are working in a single instance environment click one of the following options to define the s
367. r one of the e products then click Link ACQ to link the remaining e products to the existing acquisition record Note that you do not have to link e constituents to their e package acquisition record The system automatically links active e constituents to their e package acquisitions When you click Link ACQ a pop up window opens enabling you to enter the acquisition number or purchase order number of the acquisition record to which you want to link your e product If there are multiple acquisition records 89 Verde Staff User s Guide with the same acquisition number or purchase order number ensure that you specify the appropriate year e Yerde Popup Microsoft Internet Explorer Link Acquisitions acquisitions No C Purchase Order No Latest C Previous OK Cancel Figure 43 Link Acquisitions When an acquisition record is connected to multiple e products you can open it for editing from the Acquisition Records List of each of the e products to which it is connected Once an acquisition record is linked to an e product the Related tab is displayed This tab displays the e product title e product status and selection status of each e product that is connected to the acquisition record You can navigate to an e product by clicking the e product name link El Q Metapress Allerton Press D Metapress ar OD e Package type Selective Acquisitions Sent for additional pr
368. r s Guide 442 Local institutes are relevant only for the asymmetrical synchronization model For details see Synchronizing Updates in Consortia on page 483 Consortium level sometimes referred to as tier Three consortium levels are supported managed for all managed for some and managed locally Active instance the instance you are logged into Local an e product is local if it has a member instance level e product status or selection status or an attribute record license acquisitions trial etc Search KB flag for searching If selected non local records from the KnowledgeBase are included in the search results Managed for If an e product is managed for an instance the center controls the e product but makes it available to the local instance Managed by If an e product is managed by an instance it is controlled in the member instance Active an e product is active if it has an e status and if the current date is larger than the activation from date and less than the expiration date 45 Setting Up a Shared Consortium Environment This section includes Setting Up the System Configuration Parameters on page 443 Configuring Institutes on page 444 Selecting Instance Abbreviations on page 446 Working with Users on page 447 A shared consortium environment is always a multi instance environment Of the multiple instances one and only one instance can be designated as the cen
369. ranted The legal party that signs or otherwise assents to the license Licensing agent License An organization such as a subscription agent or individual that facilitates a licensing transaction on behalf of one or more parties Local licensing negotiator License The name of the local person responsible for negotiating the license Licensee delivery requirements 290 License The required medium in which official communications must be delivered Chapter 28 License Input Files Field Name Licensing note Table 53 License Input File Fields Record Field Length Type License Description Additional information regarding the license the negotiation of the license the product and so on Mandatory Field Public note License Additional information regarding the resource that is intended for public use License replaced by License The new license License replaces License The previous license License history note General terms note License License Additional information about accessing the licenses Notes about the terms in the business agreement of the license as a whole User restriction note License Additional information about other user restrictions not adequately described elsewhere For example restrictions on users located outside the United States or the country in w
370. raries tab is read only until you click the Add button verde Tasks RETESPREREREL Ke Tools Admin wennen anna ss Verde De INST1 history P EBSCOhost Academic P EBSCOhost Academic Managing Products z New Search New Work W View Basket Quick Add Ll P EBSCOhost Academic Search Premier EBSCOhost o fw PJ Status Trial Active 18 Dec 2007 e Package type Aggregator status Production Active 07 Aug 2007 Summary General Information Interoperability 5 Ged a e Product a d Consort Acquisition Submit Cancel Figure 161 e Product Libraries Chapter 46 Working in a Shared Consortium Environment Consortium Level The consortium level field displays in shared consortium environments only It displays from the third tab of the e product the e product Libraries tab The consortium level field is set automatically by the system based on the library settings of the e product If the e product is managed centrally and all libraries are selected the consortium level is Managed for all If the e product is managed centrally and one or more but not all libraries are selected the consortium level is Managed for some The consortium level displays in the Libraries tab and in the result screen The consortium level is always managed at the same level as the e product library This means that if an e constituent has its own library settings it will also have its own consortium level Otherwise it will inherit b
371. rator NST1 university sevective OP EBSCOHOST Academic Managing e Products z New Search New Work W view Basket Quick Add E Q EBSCOHOST academic Search Alumni Edition D EBSCOhost O ae Status Implementation 1 Active 20 Dec 2006 e Package type Selective License Approved EP Status Production Active 20 Dec 2006 Summary AE Records Lif caterer een Sen EEA New Co cor arne ev Cost Record Acquisitions ES Payment date Y Credit Debit Amount Actions Expected 25 Dec 2006 Debit 123 56 2 Se Leens Invoiced 22 Dec 2006 Debit 2 En ole Vendor MRE j 5 06 Apr 2006 Debit 659 32 2 ee penre Spreadshee l Trial Cost Usage Workflow Figure 71 Cost Records List To create a new cost record click the New Cost Record button The Details tab opens enabling you to define values for the cost record fields After you click Submit the record is displayed in the Cost Records List 152 Chapter 14 Cost Records Cost Record Fields The following table describes the fields in the cost record s Details tab Field Name Cost type Table 14 Details Tab Fields COSTTYPE Description The possible values are E Expected E Invoiced E List E Print E Vendor Spreadsheet These fields can be customized by modifying the code table Vendor name VENDORNAME Organization name Points to the Name field of the Organizationame table Credit Debit AMOUNTUNITTYPE There
372. rce To be used when the primary URI is compromised or unavailable Examples include URLs for mirror sites URLs that provide access to a resource via a different provider and so forth Alternate access URI type WWW_ ALTERNATE URITYPE The type of alternate URI being used The possible values are E URL E URN E Undetermined These fields can be customized by modifying the code table Chapter 11 Access Records Local persistent URI Local persistent URI type Table 11 Data Tab Fields WWW_LOC PERSISTENT URI WWW_LOC PERSISTENT URITYPE Relevant Access Type Description A persistent URI that is created locally to access the product The type of locally created URI The possible values are E URL E URN B Undetermined These fields can be customized by modifying the code table Persistent name WWW_ PERSISTENT NAME Persistent name Z39 50 address Z39 50 port Z39 ADDRESS Z39 PORT Address used to provide Z39 50 access Port used to provide Z39 50 access Z39 50 version supported Z39 VERSION SUPPORTED Z39 50 version supported Z39 50 use attributes Z39 50 information from vendor Z39_ ATTRIBUTES Z39_URLINFO Attributes necessary to activate Z39 50 access Z39 50 information from vendor Z39 50 database name long Z39_Z39DB LONGNAME Long database name necessary to enable Z39 50 access Z39
373. rces in accordance with the library s business and license terms The Verde KnowledgeBase Central Global and Local Ex Libris maintains a Central KnowledgeBase CKB that contains a broad range of the electronic resources available in the global e market The CKB includes e interfaces e standalones e packages and e constituents as well as their linked work records It is continually updated to reflect changes in the global e market Your Verde installation includes a Global KnowledgeBase GKB that is a copy of the CKB The GKB facilitates collection management decisions by helping you locate resources and serves as the basis for the creation of the local Verde KnowledgeBase LKB for your Verde instance Through regular updates from the CKB known as KB Updates the GKB also provides you with information about new resources When Verde is first installed the LKB is created from the GKB As you begin working with the Verde system the LKB is localized Specific e products are activated and attribute records such as local acquisition license and access records are linked to the activated e products New e products and work records known as locally created e products and work records may also be Verde Staff User s Guide created in the LKB Periodically through the KB Updates changes in the CKB are transferred via the GKB to the LKB Verde Modules Verde has four modules m Verde Tasks m KB Manager KB Tools
374. rched Search results for biotechnology Found 239 e Products Figure 6 Search Results Single Instance Environment Search results for history at Members INST1 TST Found 1 334 e Products Figure 7 Search Results Multi Instance Non Shared Environment The columns displayed in the table differ depending on whether you are working in a single instance environment or a multi instance non shared environment The following table describes the columns displayed Table 1 Table Columns Description The work e product record title found as a result of the search Note that the search argument may not be visible It may be in a record field that is not displayed e Product Type Displays the relevant e product type icon e Package If the search result is an e constituent this column displays the package name that contains this e constituent Holdings Displays the searched instances in which the e product is local It includes the selection status and the e product multi instance status for each searched instance in which the e product is environments only active 29 Verde Staff User s Guide 30 Table 1 Table Columns Description e Interface If the search result is an e constituent e package or e standalone this column displays the e interface to which the e product belongs Status The e product s status field from the e product This field provides information about the i
375. rd If the interface is not active then activate Use the current date as the Activation from date can be overwritten If the interface is not active then activate Interface Take the Activation from date from the Subscription start date of the active acquisition record Constituent of selective package Use the current date as the Activation from date Activate online by clicking the update button in the package list Assign an e product status and an Activation from date If no Activation from date is assigned takes the Activation from date from the Subscription start date Package aggregator Updates all e constituents The e constituents get the package e product status and the package Activation from date Takes the Subscription start date as the default Activation from date If the interface is not active then activate Updates all e constituents The e constituents get the package e product status and the package Activation from date Take the current date as the default Activation from date If the interface is not active then activate 81 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 6 e Product Selection Status Updates Action Is e Is There Results Product an Acq Active Package Updates all e constituents selective that have a selection status of Final Approval These e constituents get the package e product status and the package Activation from d
376. rds except e interface records It is used to list libraries that hold the e product In addition to marking a library as active you can enter library specific coverage data e Products can be activated for B Individual libraries m All libraries select All m All libraries except specific ones select All and then clear the check boxes for the libraries that should not be active General Information Interoperability Libraries Consortial purchase Managed for all All libraries INST1 Art Library Exlibris University Institute 1 Institute 2 Institute 3 Music Library SHH NH LEE Science library Figure 35 Libraries An e constituent inherits the library settings of its e package To activate additional libraries for the e constituent click the Add button in the e 61 Verde Staff User s Guide 62 constituent record s Libraries tab and select the additional libraries that hold the e constituent Summary General Information Interoperability Libraries js m e Product t Consortial purchase Managed locally Acquisitions il License All libraries v TST university m HEEE Art Library v 4 Admin Music Library vl aja d Physics library Trial Figure 36 Selecting Libraries that Hold the e Constituent The consortium purchase level of the e product is set automatically by the system based on the library settings If the e product is active for all librari
377. reation date by Latest update by 139 Verde Staff User s Guide 140 Breaches Tab In the Breaches tab you can view breach records which are incidents that a vendor reports to the site library if the site has not complied with license terms As with the incident records any number of breach records can be defined Once a record has been created you can edit view update or delete the record New breach records can be created by clicking the New button in the Breaches tab Alternatively you can create a new breach record by copying and modifying another record Breach type Status and Organization are mandatory fields If you click the ellipsis to the right of the Organization field the List of Organizations window opens displaying a list of defined organizations that you can filter by role Note If an organization is missing from the List of Organizations window you can add the organization by clicking the New button entering the appropriate details in the Create New Organization pop up window and clicking Submit If you click the ellipsis to the right of the Contact field the List of Contacts window opens displaying a list of defined contacts that you can filter by role If there is more than one breach record the records can be sorted by date title status and type Breach records can be linked to only one e product The e product can be of any type except e print An e product however can have more
378. records Title main title The title of the Yes For work e standalone being records added to the Verde associated with database new e standalone records Title sub title The sub title of the e standalone being added to the Verde database 261 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Title number of part Table 49 e Standalone Input File Fields Field Length Type of Record Field Type Description The part number included in the title of the e constituent being added to the Verde database Mandatory Field e Product type 262 The type of resource E database E conference E citation E dissertation For a full list of the work record e product types see the table Work Record e Product Types on page 63 The International Standard Serial Number is a unique bibliographic identifier Since data from the matching column is not used when creating a new work or e product record this field ensures that new work records have a bibliographic identifier Yes For work records associated with new e standalone records Chapter 26 e Standalone Input Files Table 49 e Standalone Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Description Mandatory Field Type Length Field The International Standard Serial Number for the electronic version of a Serial title This is a unique bibliographic identifier Sin
379. records that are not localized will be included in the search Include KB can be selected only in conjunction with another instance It cannot be used alone If you select the Managed locally check box records that are managed by the center are filtered out for the instances being searched i Verde Tasks MECHELETELS KB Tools Admin ___ Languages Logout Help A EEN nen mn 2 Verde Popup Microsoft Internet Explorer IE ms Wel ga me El I Member 2 New Search New Work W View Basket Quick Add Type Contains e Product Type X al Find wet gt Member V MEMB2 M MEMB1 Title Holdings e Interface Actions I searchKB I Managed Locally Find Cancel Figure 164 Search Member Instances Display The display behavior in the member instances is similar to that of the center There is a column for holdings and this column displays the instance name plus the e product and selection status of the e product in the instance Instances that are included in the search display in the Holdings column only if the e product has a status or selection status in the instance The active instance is always included in the Holdings column The center is never included explicitly in the Holdings column If an e product is managed locally by one of the instances searched the instance name appears with a L If an e product is managed in the center for an instance that is included in the search t
380. ree can be entered separated by a semicolon The size of each language value is limited to three characters Usage statistics available Statistics standa rd compliance Boolean The availability of usage statistics for the resource The official standard to which the statistics conform The possible values are E Counter E ICOLC 1998 These fields can be customized in the code table Usage statistics delivery method The manner in which statistics are made available 341 Verde Staff User s Guide Field Name Usage statistics format Table 65 Admin Input File Fields Type of Field Field Length Description The formats in which statistics are made available Multiple formats can be entered separated by a semicolon The possible values are E HTML E Delimited E Excel E PDF E CSV E ASCII E Other Mandatory Fields Usage statistics frequency The frequency with which statistics are made available The possible values are E Annual E Bi annual E Monthly E Quarterly E User selectable These fields can be customized in the code table Usage statistics online location The online location at which statistics can be accessed such as a URL or file path Usage statistics delivery addressee 342 Library contact name Chapter 31 Admin and Local Admin Input Files Field Name Usage statistics note
381. requirements and restrictions internal Hardware requirements public HARDWAREREQUIRE MENTSPUBLIC Information about hardware requirements and restrictions public Software requirements internal SOFTWAREREQUIRE MENTSPRIVATE Information about software requirements internal Software requirements public SOFTWAREREQUIRE MENTSPUBLIC Information about software requirements public Maintenance window value MAINTENANCE WINDOWVALUE The provider s regularly scheduled downtime window for this product The recurring period of time reserved by the product provider for technical maintenance activities during which online access may be unavailable Provider system status URI Provider system status URI type PROVIDERSYSTEM STATUSURI PROVIDERSYSTEM STATUSURITYPE The URI at which the provider posts system status information The type of URI used to post system status information The following options are available E URL E URN Local performance monitoring note LOCALPERFORMANCE MONITORINGNOTE Information concerning Web sites or programs that carry out local performance monitoring Incident log 136 INCIDENTLOG A log of downtime and problem reports and their resolution Chapter 12 Admin Records Field Name Training information Table 12 Admin Tab Fields TRAININGINFORMATION Description Informat
382. roduct status to Withdrawn based on the Activation to date of the e product record using a process that is regularly run For more information see e Product on page 220 Chapter 8 Selection Workflows Activation Activation typically occurs after the evaluation process is run However e products can be activated without conducting an evaluation process Activation can be performed online or by using the Verde e constituent loader In Verde e products are considered active when they have an e product status and an Activation from date Online you can assign an e product status and then submit the e product If there is an acquisition record with the status Active the system uses the Subscription start date as the e product Activation from date If there is no acquisition record the current date is used Activating e Standalones e Interfaces and Aggregator Packages To activate e standalones e interfaces and aggregator packages activate the e product itself When an e standalone or e package is activated the system automatically activates the related e interface if it is not already active The e interface is always assigned an e product status of Production The Activation from date is the date entered in the related e product When you activate an aggregator package its e constituents are assigned the same e product status and Activation from date as the e package Activating Selective Packages This process is somew
383. roduct or group of e products However in many cases the cost of an electronic resource needs to be divided among sub units within the library Local acquisition records are used to record such information They provide information on how the cost is allocated between contributing libraries or sub units A local acquisition record is linked to specific subscription periods that is it is linked to a specific acquisition record Invoice Records The invoice record is used to store invoice information Verde itself does not have an invoicing system but it is possible to load invoices that are managed in other systems using the Acquisitions Data Loader or enter the information online Managing e Products x New Search New Work W View Basket Quick Add El EBSCOHOST MeqaFILE EBSCOhost Da Status Production Pending Active 05 Nov 2006 e Package type Aggregator Acquisitions Approved License Approved Status Implementation 1 Selection status Approved Active 06 Mar 2006 14 Mar 2006 Summary SCA koca cg Back to list update amp GH e Product a Acquisition Acquisition Subscription License Start date ACQ Number 1141900486375_154 Purchase order number Access End date vendor subscription ID Admin Acquisition status Approved zl Material type z Trial Acquisition status date 12 Mar 2006 Subscription type Electronic Cost Subscription open date m Subscription typ
384. ronment one of the Verde instances serves as the central instance while the other instances function as member instances For information on working in a shared consortium environment see The Shared Consortium Environment on page 441 In addition you can use Verde as a single point of maintenance for e resource data that is shared by your library s suite of automation tools For information on working with Verde in conjunction with SFX ALEPH or Voyager see Introducing Verde Interoperability on page 475 20 Part 2 KB Manager Module Part 2 contains the following Section 2 Introducing the KB Manager Module on page 23 Section 3 Overview of e Product Management on page 25 Section 4 Work Records on page 35 Section 5 e Product Lists on page 41 Section 6 e Product Attribute Records on page 47 Section 7 e Product Records on page 59 Section 8 Selection Workflows on page 73 Section 9 Acquisition Records on page 85 Section 10 License Records on page 103 Section 11 Access Records on page 119 Section 12 Admin Records on page 129 Section 13 Trial Records on page 143 Section 14 Cost Records on page 151 Section 15 Usage Records on page 155 Section 16 Workflows on page 159 Section 17 Organization Management on page 163 Section 18 Library Management on page 169 Verde Staff User s Guide 22 2 Introducing the KB Manager Module The KB Manager module supports the management of key Verde entities suc
385. rovider reference linking available Boolean Boolean The activation of a link to library holdings The availability of links to external content created by the provider of the resource Inbound linking indicator Boolean The availability of a link to internal stable locations within a product Inbound linking activation status OpenURL compliant Boolean Boolean Indicates the activation of a link to internal stable locations within a product The ability for the electronic product and its content to be Open URL compliant OpenURL activation status Boolean The activation of external links Linking note 340 Information about external linking for example implementation details or other notes Chapter 31 Admin and Local Admin Input Files Field Name MARC record availability Table 65 Admin Input File Fields Type of Field Field Description Length Boolean The availability of MARC records for the resource Mandatory Fields MARC record note Further information regarding the availability of MARC record sets for example free or purchased acquisition and implementation status and so forth Interface languages availability Boolean The availability of multiple languages for the interface Interface languages implemented The activation of one or more interface languages Multiple languages up to th
386. ry both for new and updated licenses When an input file does not contain a Match column the file is not loaded to Verde and an error is logged in the summary m All of the fields in the mandatory columns contain values When an input line does not contain all of the mandatory fields and no default values are defined the input line is rejected and an error is logged in the output report Verde Staff User s Guide m For new licenses the matching field is either a bibliographic or Verde identifier used to identify the e product associated with the license For example the following sample file creates four new licenses with minimal input information The e product for the first license is identified by e product code the second e product by SFX ID the third by workexpression code the fourth by title Table 51 Four New Licenses License License License License Licensed Licensor Licensee Method Status Start End Execution Date Date Date CEP_1123340540 Manifest In 10 12 2008 31 12 2008 31 12 2008 Art Library 996_952680 assent negotiation 111089394066000 Online Under 10 12 2008 10 12 2009 review CWE_112333416 Negotiated New 7035_611274 Advanced Click New Multivariate through Statistics with Matrices m Foran updated license the matching field is a license code used to identify the license to be updated The following example illustrates how to update a license with perpetual co
387. s Verde en e Admi tor Ex Libris University Tasks Ad n Task Role Owner Workflow Start date End date e Product aj e cataloging enen 5 ERN 3 inform the cataloc ina ee Acquisitions 01 Jun Metapress American Association of Clinical partme e E ot p jeno Workflow 2006 Endocrinologists acquisition Link the e product to the Licensor Administrator License Workflow Bree Ovid CINAHL Start the workflow for Acquisitions 01 Jun Metapress American Association of Clinical Start the workflow for a reviewing e products Lmmmmm Renewal Workflow 2006 Endocrinologists Review the e product Selector Administrator EERE MetaPress Akademiai Kiado Workflow 2006 Start the workflow for g Acquisitions 04 Jun near z m RES User_test1 Mien GaleGroup General Reference Center Review the e product Selector v ORE GaleGroup General Reference Center Workflow Update the ILS Acquisitions 4 uicitions Acquisitions oe system Renewal Workflow tifyina t s Notifying the vendor of PEEPI z Acquisitions ET changes Renewal Workflow Start the workflow for el acauitonsy EBSCOhost Electronic Journals Service reviewing e products ___ renewal Workflow Review the e product Selector v Regew s Protect EBSCOhost Electronic Journals Service _____ Workflow s e first e product 5 a ae a See Is this the first e product Selector v License Workflow The Archaeolagical journal
388. s Vendor advance notification Renewal type Note The end date is not mandatory for perpetual renewal licenses 109 Verde Staff User s Guide Description Tab The following table describes the fields in the license record s Description tab Field Name License type Table 10 Description Tab Fields TYPECODE Description Type of license Once this field is defined it cannot be modified The following types are available E Regular E Trial E Supplemental License name LICENSENAME Unique name for the license License method METHODCODE License method The following options are available E Negotiated E Click Through E Online E Manifest Assent E Shrink Wrap License start and end dates Date renewed STARTDATE ENDDATE RENEWAL DATE Date on which the license becomes ceases to be active Date on which the license was renewed License execution date EXECUTION DATE Date on which the license was executed Standard duration LICENSE DURATION LICENSE DURATIONVAL Used when licenses are renewed Can be defined in weeks months or years Vendor advance notice 110 VENDOR ADVANCED NOTICE Amount of time before the license expires that you need to cancel your subscription Can be defined in days weeks or months Chapter 10 License Records Field Name Renewal type Table 10 Description Tab Fields RENEWALTYPEC
389. s before the library name 1 header reportName running report name 2 header spaces 4 3 header libraryName yes The following can be included in the header m Report name the name you assign to the report for example 1 header reportName My Library s report Note that the number in this example 1 is the order in which the parameter appears in the report The value Running report name uses the system name for the report This name cannot be changed but it can be replaced by any other value that appears in the report instead of the report name for example 1 header reportName My Library s report Chapter 35 Customized Report Outputs m Library name The name of the instance in which the report was run for example n header libraryName yes Values can be yes or no m Staff user name For example n header staffName yes This includes the name of the staff user that ran the report m Date for example n_ header dateFormat string format of execution date dd mm yyyy at HH mm ss translates to 20 07 2005 at 12 08 56 EEE d MMM yyyy HH mm ss translates to Wed 20 Jul 2005 12 08 56 m n_header_spaces number This defines the number of spaces between elements of the header E n_header_return number This defines the number of returns that is line breaks The following is an example of the header section for the Subscriptions for Review Report 1 header reportName running re
390. s Guide 84 9 Acquisition Records This section includes About Acquisition Records on page 85 Acquisition Records List on page 86 Acquisition Details on page 88 Acquisitions Tab on page 91 Local Acquisitions Tab on page 97 Invoice Tab on page 98 Acquisition Workflows on page 100 About Acquisition Records Verde does not offer a fully configured acquisition system The actual payment of money and fiscal transaction takes place in your ILS Verde s acquisition and invoice data only reflects transactional activity that took place in the library s automated management system The acquisition record tracks the acquisition process for one or more e products It stores all of the information needed to order renew and cancel a subscription to these e products An e product can be linked to only one active acquisition record per subscription period A separate acquisition record in Verde is required for each subscription period Only the first acquisition record is created manually or loaded All subsequent acquisition records are created by the system as part of the renewal process Typically acquisition records are managed at the level of e packages and e standalone resources However it is also possible to create an acquisition record for an e interface or e constituent if it is acquired separately Verde Staff User s Guide Local Acquisition Records In Verde there is a single active acquisition record per e p
391. s Input File Rules on page 350 Access Input File Fields on page 352 Access Loader Workflow on page 356 About Access Authorization Input Files on page 357 Access Authorization Input File Rules on page 357 Access Authorization Input File Fields on page 358 Access Authorization Loader Workflow on page 361 About Access Input Files Verde s access loader loads the access input file This input file loads access records that must be added to or updated in the Verde database The input file contains columns for the fields in the Verde database and rows for each record being loaded The access input file s columns are described in Table 69 Verde Staff User s Guide Access Input File Rules 350 Before loading your input file ensure that the file follows these rules The input file includes the mandatory Match and Access Type columns When an input file does not contain the mandatory columns it is not loaded to Verde and an error is logged in the summary The mandatory columns contain values When an input line does not contain a value for a mandatory field the input line is rejected and an error is logged in the output report There are four possible access types in Verde WWW Web interface Z39 50 XML and SRW SRU It is possible to attach up to four access records with different access types to a single e product If you want to load access records with different access types it is recommended that you use the Acc
392. s for each of the following loaders are described in the following sections B e Constituent See e Constituent Input Files on page 243 E e Standalone See e Standalone Input Files on page 257 Acquisitions See Acquisition Input Files on page 275 Licenses See License Input Files on page 281 Libraries See About Library Input Files on page 315 Library Contacts See Library Contact Input Files on page 321 Library IPs See Library IP Input Files on page 324 235 Verde Staff User s Guide 236 Organizations See About Organization Input Files on page 327 Organization Contacts See Organization Contact Input Files on page 331 Admin See About Admin Input Files on page 337 Local Admin See About Local Admin Input Files on page 345 Access See About Access Input Files on page 349 Access Authorization See About Access Authorization Input Files on page 357 The ALEPH Vendor Converter is described in the ALEPH Verde Interoperability Guide Loading Input Files to Verde The following steps describe how to load input files to Verde To load input files to Verde 1 Create an input file for the type of loader that you are loading You can base the input file on Verde s input file templates which are located in the following directory exlibris verde lt v2_1 gt verde examples_ and templates where v2 is Verde s current version number and 1 is the specific port on which
393. s included in a search appear in the navigation menu The active instance displays first and all other instances display in alphabetical order The center appears in the navigation menu unless the search uses the Managed locally filter When you navigate to a record in a different instance a pop up window informs you that the instance you are working in has changed The window can be de activated for the remainder of the session SS Verde ED gene dE Proquert biology Ju YY P Proquest Biology In f Managing e Products _New Search _ New Work z Bl proQuest Biology Journals proquest o E e Package type Aggregator Status Production Active 20 Mar 2006 Summary e Product Acquisition License Access Admin Trial Cost Usage Workflow 466 il Information Belongs to Interface e Package type Selection status e Product status Activation from date Expiration date Availability From To Availability note Concurrent Number of Users Sponsoring Library Library contact Public note Internal note Interoperability Libraries Global coverage Aggregator Verde Popup Microsoft Internet Explorer current instance was changed to UCLA me T Do not show this message again Close Holdings note ILS Holdings ID Cancel Figure 170 Navigation PEE Wid Update 8 CA OUD
394. s to indemnify the licensor against a legal claim usually for a breach of agreement by the licensee INDEMNIFICATIONCODE Indemnification by Licensor Clause A clause by which the licensor agrees to indemnify the licensee against a legal claim INTELLECTUALPROPWARRENTY INTRLIBELECTRONICCODE Intellectual Property Warranty Indicator Interlibrary Loan Electronic A clause in which the licensor warrants that making the licensed materials available does not infringe upon the intellectual property rights of any third parties The right to provide the licensed materials via interlibrary loan by way of electronic copies INTRLIBKEEPINGREQUIREDCODE 520 Interlibrary Loan Record Keeping Required Indicator The requirement to keep records of interlibrary loan activity and provide reports to the licensor at periodic intervals or upon request Appendix B Explanation of Fields Table 92 License Fields INTRLIBPRINTORFAXCODE Data Element Name Interlibrary Loan Print Or Fax Definition The right to provide the licensed materials via interlibrary loan by way of print copies or facsimile transmission INTRLIBSECURETRANSCODE Interlibrary Loan Secure Electronic Transmission The right to provide the licensed materials via interlibrary loan by way of secure electronic transmission INTRLIBTERMNOTE Interlibrary Loan Term Note Additional information related to inter
395. screen If these values are defined they are saved in the database m If values are not defined in the Task Properties screen Verde checks whether the license parameters defined in Admin gt Default Values are saved in the database For more information see The Default Values Tab on page 417 Note The input file value always overwrites a default value E Ifthe Match column value is the license code Verde searches for an updated license If no match is found the line is rejected If a match found the program goes to the next stage m For new and updated licenses Verde performs a dependency check Some license fields may be mandatory depending on license status For details see the following table Table 54 Mandatory Fields for License Statuses License Status Mandatory Fields New Approved License start date License end date License execution date Vendor advance notice Licensor Licensee Retired License start date License execution date Vendor advance notice Licensor Licensee 313 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 54 Mandatory Fields for License Statuses License Status Mandatory Fields Active or Inactive for License start date License end date prevailing license only Other statuses Licensor Licensee m Foran updated license Verde updates the license with the following exceptions m Licenses with Approved and Retired statuses cannot be updated m You cannot change the licens
396. se the single and double arrows lt that appear at the bottom of the screen to navigate through the search results The single backward and forward arrows navigate backward and forward by a single screen while the double arrows navigate to the beginning or end of the results list The following four buttons appear above the search boxes Figure 9 Search Results Four Buttons m New Search Clears the current search results and navigation crumbs m New Work Opens a new work record For details on defining new work records see Adding New Work Records on page 36 m View Basket Displays the e products that are in your basket For details see Viewing Your Basket on page 33 Quick Add Opens a wizard that enables you to add a new e package or e standalone For details on this wizard see The Quick Add Wizard on page 64 Working with Navigation Crumbs When you perform a new search a navigation crumb is created for the search As you select work and e product records navigation crumbs are created for each record that you view The navigation crumbs are displayed at the top of each screen that you view within the KB Manager module You use these crumbs to navigate back to previous screens crisis GQ Addressing the hum Books24x7 Business Books 24x7 Managing e Products z New Search New Work W View Basket Quick Add E Books 24x7 O ar z Figure 10 Search Results Nav
397. sed by the Verde tasks Subscription Renewal and Subscription Review Renewed Acquisition Records The status Renewed is assigned to acquisition records for past years These records are no longer active but they were renewed so an active acquisition record was created The system automatically assigns the status Renewed to records when they are renewed using the Renew online or batch function Cancelled Acquisition Records The status Cancelled is assigned manually to acquisition records that are to be cancelled When acquisition records are cancelled linked e product records must be manually updated and an expiration date assigned to the e product Local Acquisitions Tab Local acquisition records can be added to acquisition records using the Local Acquisitions tab The Add Local ACQ button does not display in this tab until a general acquisition record exists Local acquisition records can be deleted by clicking the Delete x button that is displayed next to the local acquisition record To delete local acquisition records you must have delete privileges Records can be accessed and edited by clicking the Expand All button or the plus sign next to a specific record The following table describes the fields in the Local Acquisitions tab 97 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 8 Local Acquisitions Tab Fields Description Institution The institution paying for sharing the costs of the e product No of concurrent
398. ser s Guide Table 7 Acquisitions Tab Fields Section Field Name Description Net price NETPRICE Net price from the SUBSCRIPTION PERIOD Oracle table Currency CURRENCY Currency from the SUBSCRIPTION PERIOD Oracle table New Acquisition Records When an acquisition record is new it is at the beginning of the acquisition workflow There are no mandatory fields and any information added is saved Sites that have set up interaction with ALEPH can push new acquisition records to their ALEPH database This option is available for the following e product types e package e standalone and e interface For more information refer to the ALEPH Verde Interoperability Guide Interim Acquisition Statuses The following acquisition statuses all reflect stages in the local acquisition workflow In Process 1 2 Ready to be approved Approved Review Denied Sent for Additional Processing m On Hold You can remove statuses that are not in use or change the names of statuses to better reflect your own local workflows Changes to display names are made in the Admin module 96 Chapter 9 Acquisition Records Active Acquisition Records The statuses Active and Review both indicate that an acquisition record is in use Both statuses have the following mandatory fields Start and end date Acquisition status Vendor Auto renewal m Subscription type Only acquisition records that are active are proces
399. server Enter the path to the file without browsing Note You cannot upload files that are larger than 400 MB 238 Chapter 24 Overview of Loaders The organization contact and library contact loaders contain the following additional field Table 36 Contacts Match Field Description Contacts match Determines whether Verde attempts to match contacts The following options are available E Match input Verde attempts to match contacts with existing contacts in the database If a match is found for the normalized contact name Verde updates the contact information Otherwise Verde adds the contact as a new contact in the database E Add all as new Verde adds the contacts to the database as new contact records In addition the organization contact loader contains the following field which is similar to the additional field that appears for the library IP loader Table 37 Delete Existing Contacts IPs Field Description Delete existing If this check box is selected the list of contacts IPs is removed contacts IPs and the list of records in the input file replaces this list If this check box is cleared the list of contacts IPs is added to the existing list The e constituent loader contains the following additional fields Table 38 e Constituent Loader Fields Description Update package If this check box is selected the selected e package record is updated and the e constituent val
400. should be run over weekends m Range of recurrence the start and end dates of recurring runs for example if you want to run a task report daily for the next two weeks Scheduling properties Run Time Start hh mm Recurrence pattern G Daily o C weekly Include weekends C monthly Range of recurrence Start date E End date E Figure 89 Scheduling Properties 179 Verde Staff User s Guide 180 20 Reports This section includes General Report of e Products on page 181 Report e Products by Selection Status on page 190 Report on e Packages with Acquisitions on page 191 Report on Locally Created e Products on page 192 Report on e Product with Usage Statistics on page 193 Report of Active e Products without Licenses on page 194 Report of IP Ranges by Licensor on page 195 General Report of e Products This is a generic report that includes most of the fields related to e products The first part of this report offers the option of filtering the output by m Instances available in consortium environments only Note that only the instances in which the user was granted permission to run the report are displayed in the report form m View Full Package Content If the user selects this option the output file includes packages that match the retrieval parameters and all the e constituents that belong to the package even if the e constituents do not match the retrieval parameters If View Ful
401. splayed e Product Sync status a Show all 7 Gl co Done no update to SFX A ti Done no update to SFX x quisition License Reviewed Sync status Syne date User name Actions Done SFX updated 6 09 2007 23 09 09 SYSTEM Ac r D SYSTEM 5 gt Admi r Done update to SFX 6 09 2007 23 09 04 SYSTEM Trial Cost Usa Workflow Synch History Figure 127 SFX Sync History per e Product This screen displays all synchronization tasks that were triggered for the e product To view the synchronization history for all e products From the Verde menu bar select KB Tools 2 From the Select a tool drop down list select SFX Sync History The SFX Sync History screen is displayed Savas SFX Sync History nen Sync status show all Voo ocus Done no update to SFX 7 Done no update to SFX z quisition Licen Reviewed Sync date v User name Actions TEM Acces r TEM Admin r F TEM Trial Cost Usa Workflow i Synch History Figure 188 SFX Sync History All e Products This screen displays a history of the synchronization tasks that were triggered for all e products You can perform the following tasks in this screen m Filter tasks by synchronization status using the Sync status drop down list This makes it easy for you to work through the list of e products that require SFX setup or to investigate all errors m Filter tasks by date using the From and To filter fields Chapter 50 Synchroni
402. ssccnsteacsvetesscostesscnsvesssbesvsseseveastse 143 About Trial Records nennen eennenenevenenenneneereerenenenneen 143 Trial Records List eenen eennenrvevenenennenvereeeenenenenen 144 Table of Contents DN i toca hc gh a eee nna EE E 144 Creating a New Trial Rec rd si icsscshiscnspsvanidteagndasaantdinsanttandaaniavsatetaiatin 147 Editing DME Rec rd vaarden antari gedane 147 DER gd Trial RECOTA oasoe armata sana adenine tanden 148 Trial NOPE eneen reset 148 Starting a Trial sacs seeping basin a eas tee tala ene 149 DPT OOP ananda deter 150 Decision Made neten bete nende 150 Chapterl4 Cost Retordsanmanmmonmmenenntngngernntni 151 About Cost RecordSunssosarendparednssseiedengereskernpsnsnptinevaneendnkdin 151 Cost Rec rds Lis nternet deedeetee 151 Cost Record BIeldS nnn eenen en eee 153 Chapter15 Usage Reeords ssssnssteneosdinndddndeed indi decousn wensen oatvsereans ede dede 155 About Usage Recor dBm deventer venen 155 Usape Records SE cbetta nb enn 155 Usage Record Fields aonnnenenneennenneneeeeddend 156 Chapter 1G War tlw Sia nrden riskeerde dias etkacet a 159 About Verde WetkLlbWs om anesnkatetdatnnntebumentertn eit 159 Permissions rine neren nde daneen 159 License and Acquisitions Workflows aansneed annie 160 Renew Acquisitions and Review e Product Workflows 161 Chapter17 Organization Management senen nvenenserenensenenseneneeneneerenensenene 163 About Organization
403. stance Code einterfaceTitle e Interface title epackageTitle e Package title econstituentTitle e Constituent title estandaloneTitle e Standalone title eproductldentifier Identifier procurementStatus Selection status O o NIAJ NN procurementStatusUpdateDate Selection status update date eproductStatus e Product status ji acquisitionCode Acquisition code Report on e Packages with Acquisitions The default output parameters of the Report on e Packages with Acquisitions are listed in the table below Note The output file can be customized For details see Customized Report Outputs on page 371 Table 23 Report on e Packages with Acquisitions Internal Name Display Name acquisitionNumber Acquisition number acquisitionCode Acquisition code purchaseOrderNo Purchase order no vendorCode Vendor vendorSubscriptionCode Vendor subscription code Price Price orderDate Order Date 209 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 23 Report on e Packages with Acquisitions Internal Name Display Name subscriptionStartDate Subscription p start date subscriptionEndDate Subscription p end date eproductTitle e Product title eproductldentifier e Product identifier instanceCode Instance code Report on Locally Created e Products The default output parameters of the Report on Locally Created e Products are listed
404. stance Education Term Note Information which qualifies a permissions statement on distance education ELECTRONICLINKCODE Electronic Link The right to link to the licensed material ELECTRONICLINKTERMNOTE ENDDATE Electronic Link Term Note End Date Information which qualifies a permissions statement on Electronic Links The end date of the license EXECUTIONDATE License execution date Date on which the license was executed FAIRUSECLAUSECODE Fair Use Clause Indicator A clause that affirms statutory fair use rights under U S copyright law 17 USC Section 107 or that the agreement does not restrict or abrogate the rights of the licensee or its user community under copyright law FILELOCATION Electronic File Location The path where electronic version of license is stored GENERALTERMSNOTE Terms Note Notes about the terms in the business agreement of the license as a whole 519 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 92 License Fields GOVERNINGJURISDICTION Data Element Name Governing Jurisdiction Definition The venue or jurisdiction to be used in the event of an alleged breach of the agreement GOVERNINGLAW Governing Law A clause specifying the governing law to be used in the event of an alleged breach of the agreement INDEMNIFICATION Indemnification by Licensee Clause Indicator A clause by which the licensee agree
405. stances available in consortium environment only Note that only instances in which the user was granted permission to run the report are displayed in the report form m e Product type m e Package m e Standalone B e Interface 194 Chapter 20 Reports m e Product status Possible values are Trial Implementation 1 Implementation 2 Implementation 3 Production Withdrawn m Sponsoring library The library that sponsored the e product Note that clicking on the ellipsis on the right hand side of the field activates a pop up window displaying a list of defined libraries with filter option by role m Library contact Note that clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the field activates a pop up window which displays a list of defined contacts with filter option by role m Activation from date Date from which the e product is active Include constituents If the user selects this option the output file includes packages that match the selected filters and all the constituents that belong to this package even if the constituents do not match the filters and other conditions If the Include Constituents check box is not selected only the constituents that match filters are included in the output together with their parent package Report of IP Ranges by Licensor This is a report of IPs that are valid per active license A license is active if it has the status Approved and if the current date is between or equal to th
406. t view Loader Output gt General Re iew KB Reports View Scheduled Tasks Figure 87 Select a KB Tool Verde Staff User s Guide All the KB Tools module menus can be collapsed or expanded by clicking the plus or minus signs next to the relevant header The menus are expanded by default El Acquisition El Acquisition gt Subscription Renewal Subscriptions for Review gt Trial Participant Alerts gt Trial Management Process gt License Renewal gt SFX Sync Figure 88 Expanded and Collapsed KB Tools Menu Delivery and Scheduling Properties The following table describes the available KB tool delivery output options Table 16 Delivery Output Properties Propert Description Explanation p File format The following options are available m CSV E PRN E XML The output can be sent by e mail as well To define multiple recipients use semicolons between e mail addresses Locally defined output You can select a customized format Note that the default is Verde format Report name The name of the report Note that this field is not mandatory 178 Chapter 19 Introducing the KB Tools Module Reports and tasks can be scheduled The following scheduling options are available E Start time hh mm m Recurrence pattern daily weekly or monthly with the additional option of defining whether tasks reports
407. t File Fields Field Name Type of Record Field Field Type Length Description The International Standard Serial Number is a unique bibliographic identifier Since data from the matching column is not used when creating a new work or e product record this field ensures that new work records have a bibliographic identifier Mandatory Field 248 The International Standard Serial Number for the electronic version of a Serial title This is a unique bibliographic identifier Since data from the matching column is not used when creating a new work or e product record this field ensures that new work records have a bibliographic identifier Chapter 25 e Constituent Input Files Table 43 e Constituent Input File Fields Field Name Type of Record Field Field Type Length Description The International Standard Book Number is a unique bibliographic identifier Since data from the matching column is not used when creating a new work or e product record this field ensures that new work records have a bibliographic identifier Mandatory Field The International Standard Book Number for the electronic version of a book This is a unique bibliographic identifier Since data from the matching column is not used when creating a new work or e product record this field ensures that new work records have a bibliographic identifier Abbreviated title The e co
408. t is usually the result of exporting acquisition data from ALEPH and converting it to XML format as described in Converting Acquisitions on page 420 However any input file that is in the required XML format see Acquisition Input File Structure on page 422 can be loaded into the Verde database using the batch process described below Load acquisition data that is in a tab delimited file Tab delimited files can be loaded from the KB Tools module For details see Overview of Loaders on page 231 Chapter 41 The Initial Tab Note Make sure that ALEPH sub libraries are defined as libraries in Verde Codes identical to those in ALEPH must be used During acquisition loading the system checks whether the ALEPH and Verde codes match If a library code that appears in the lt Organization gt field in the acqToStandard xml file does not exist as Verde the acquisition record is rejected To load acquisitions that are in XML format 1 In the Admin module s Initial tab click Load Acquisitions The process assumes that there is an acqToStandard xml file in the data import directory Click Submit to run the batch process and load the file into the Verde database Z Verde Popup Microsoft Internet Explorer ME Acquisitions Load Acquisitions from file Acquisition input file name fexlibris verde v2_1 verde home data import acqToStandard xml Into instance Instance 1 Submit
409. t update it ao Across languages and cultu Q MetaPress Akademiai Kiado 0 Metapress D a oe Status Trial Selection status Evaluation Active 24 Jun 2008 Local Holdings embargo v 2 1 2001 ISSN 1585 1923 eISSN 1589 2519 Status Trial Selection status Evaluation Active 24 Jun 2008 e Package type Selective Acquisitions Nev License New o Status Production Active 19 Jun 2008 Summary Weense Records List Nev License Link Licens i e Product ae nn pe License iy Acquisition License name Start date End date License status License type ID Actions 5 New Regular L1C1214824867093_4 Ea License Access Figure 48 Editing License Records Note Separate permissions are required for approving and extending licenses Linking Licenses To link an e product record to an existing license record click Link License This option should be used when multiple e product records are acquired through a single license In such cases you should first create a new license record for one of the e products then click Link License to link the remaining e products to the existing license record When you click Link License a pop up window opens enabling you to enter the license code or license name of the license record to which you want to link your e product Verde Popup Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 xi Link License License code License name Cancel Figure 49 Link License When a li
410. taff User s Guide Table 69 Access Input File Fields Field Name Field Description Related Length Access Type URL to XML URL to XML information from XML SRW information vendor from vendor XML gateway XML gateway note XML note SRW SRU Possible values are SRW SRU mandatory E SRW field for SRW SRU access SRE type SRW Base URL SRW Base URL SRW SRU mandatory field for SRW SRU access type SRW SRU port Integer SRW SRU port SRW SRU SRW SRU Text SRW SRU version supported SRW SRU version supported SRW SRU SRW SRU attributes SRW SRU attributes SRW SRU note SRW SRU note SRW SRU Access Loader Workflow After Verde checks whether the access input file is in the correct format and includes the mandatory Match and Access Type columns Verde examines the Match field value m If no match is found for this field value the line is rejected m If Verde retrieves matches for more than one e product the line is rejected m _lfonly one related e product is found Verde examines the Access type field value m Ifan access record with the defined access type exists for the e product Verde updates the access record 356 Chapter 32 Access and Access Authorization Input Files m Otherwise Verde checks the values of the mandatory fields for the defined access type m If values do not exist the line is rejected m If values do exist Verde verifies the val
411. tatus issssscscessccssssscestssnceonersesssesveestsiees 208 Report on e Packages with Acquisitions nennen ennen 209 Report on Locally Created e Products onser enen onenversnonen onee 210 Report on e Products with Usage Statistics nennen 211 Report of Active e Products Without Licenses eneen 211 Report of IP Ranges by Licensor anserina iens 217 TABI Ss sarren EENE EERE en nn 219 About Verde TaSkBu senteerd ennen 219 Dn 220 SEX SYNG veen as i eon ai asa aoa eases 220 ANGUS eten tea certata seaside tau T 220 Subs riphion Renewal natens 220 Subscriptions for Review tendensen 221 Table of Contents Eeen tenen neden 222 Trial Participant Alerts a cutis saacins suneaqsstaatiaannaiiapaceddapsacnanpaanedepaoeebayaaen 222 Trial Mangement PrOCeSS cccudicneGinkinndGnhniniuaadesian 222 ICES E E E O E ET 223 License Renewal meneren needed 223 Chapter23 View Task Output cineninennananucinnnnneninwannmen icin 225 PLO CE aeneis canna aaa eten 225 SEX SYNC edn a enb tases no Raden eons 225 PCG INSTI stasis deedeetee eneen ne 226 S bscription Renewal s cssnsasitesnianaisapriqennadateseniacntianesiasinks agendas 226 S bscripti ns Jor BEDE senen 226 Cesareo E esas owes 227 Trial Participant Alerts scxcsassnsstassinsasnsssasturowssavntaiiienddashssicssnsaversnsnaiiaind 227 Trial Management EV OCESE onver 228 BICEns nanskate e ea else eee 228 License Renewal sisinio o ina EAE dri 228 Chapter24 Overview of Loaders nennen terne 231
412. te RenewCancDate See Acquisition Input File Fields on page 276 for a description of this field Default Acquisitions AcquisitionStatus See Acquisition Input File Fields Status on page 276 for a description of this field Default Subscription SubscriptionType See Acquisition Input File Fields Type on page 276 for a description of this field 240 Chapter 24 Overview of Loaders Table 39 Acquisition Loader Fields Corresponding Description Input File Field Default Vendor VendorCode See Acquisition Input File Fields on page 276 for a description of this field Default Auto Renewal AutoRenewal See Acquisition Input File Fields on page 276 for a description of this field Note For information on the ALEPH Vendor Converter settings refer to the ALEPH Verde Interoperability Guide 241 Verde Staff User s Guide 242 25 e Constituent Input Files This section includes About e Constituent Input Files on page 243 e Constituent Input File Rules on page 243 e Constituent Input File Fields on page 246 e Constituent Loader Workflow on page 255 About e Constituent Input Files Verde s e constituent loader loads the e constituent input file This input file loads e constituent records that need to be added to or updated in the Verde database The e constituent records in the input file must belong to the same e package The input file contains columns for the fields in the e constitu
413. te of the record Managing e Products z New Search New Work W view Basket Quick Add E O EBSCOhost art Index New Y Code TST SFX ID Metalib ID Createdby O1 Jan 2005 Select fields _ Hield details S ocal 1 Field Details Title EBSCO Actions Figure 13 Edit Work Record Note The title bar can be collapsed and expanded using the Collapse Expand El el buttons From the Select Fields list select the fields that you want to add to the work record The fields are added to the Field Details table on the right Note that if a field does not appear in the Select Fields list it is either already included in the work record or it is not available for use in the current record Click the New button in the top right corner to select an e product type that you want to associate with the new work record For information on e product types see e Product Types on page 25 37 Verde Staff User s Guide Editing a Work Record You can edit existing work records by adding new local fields or by updating or deleting existing local fields Note Records that have been derived from the KnowledgeBase are protected Only local fields can be modified or added E To add afield click the field s Add button m To edit an existing field click the field s Edit 2 button m To view an existing field click the field s View button Note that the field cannot be updated in view mode m To delete a fi
414. ted field s values and default names labels are displayed A Note column in which you can record notes applicable to each field value is also displayed Users CRS Cm Default Values Inibal Profiles Configuration Search for Table Select Topic Work z a Submit Select Field MARC SUB FIELD Cancel Field MARC SUB FIELD Value Label Note 3308 CODEN BE a fcontinuedBy gt 249a Display Title EN 122a ISSN f Submit Cancel Figure 132 Field s Values and Default Names 4 Enter changes to each field value as required Note Values can only be modified not deleted 5 Click Submit to save your changes The following message is displayed A Message Re login might be required in order to reflect the changes Operation ended successfully Figure 133 Code Table Message Note Ifa change is made to an indexed field in a site that has local data indexes should be rerun so that they contain the new labels The following fields are indexed e Product status e Product selection status e Product package type e Product type Acquisition status Trial status and License status Updating Functional Fields Certain fields have functional aspects to them When you change the related labels of such fields you must ensure that the new labels match the functionality of these fields The following tables include functional fields e Product Work License Acquisition Trial Privileges Verde Task and
415. ted institute field should be defined as the local institute as described in Configuring Institutes on page 444 To enable the central instance to manage an e product for a specific local institute you select the library that represents this institute in e Product gt Libraries Example If for an e product certain local institutes are being managed by the central instance and other local institutes are being managed by member instances it is recommended that you create the following in the central instance m library records for the local institutes that are to be managed by the center with the Related instance defined as the member instance and the Related institute defined as the local institute Chapter 50 Synchronizing e Product Updates with SFX m asingle library record with the Related instance defined as the member instance and the Related institute value left undefined In the center choose e Product gt Libraries and select the libraries representing the local institutes that are to be managed by the center for this e product The center then manages the e product only for those local institutes for which library records were defined in the center 1 All other local institutes in the member instance are managed by the member instance for this e product For example if there are 50 local institutes in a member instance and for a specific e product only institutes B and C are to be managed by the central instance y
416. ter 22 Tasks Purchase order number Vendor subscription ID Subscription type Subscription type note Note for ILS Note for vendor Price Method of acquisition Material type Discount Pricing model Price cap Price cap period from and to Consortial agreement Pooled concurrent users Concurrent users note Create a new subscription record Create new local acquisition records based on existing local acquisitions Link the same e products to the new acquisition record Input parameters for this task are Vendor Clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the field activates a pop up window with a list of organizations vendors Number of days before after advance notice date Update database If this box is not selected the report can be run and the output reviewed before running it again in update database mode Subscriptions for Review This process retrieves all active acquisition records that are eligible for renewal but are not renewed automatically renewal type is not Automatic and initiates a review process on them The task parameters are the same as for Subscription Renewal For details of these parameters see Subscription Renewal on page 220 221 Verde Staff User s Guide Trial Trial Participant Alerts Alerts are sent at the following intervals 1 When the trial starts On the trial action date 2 3 When the trial decision is due 4 When the trial is over 5 When
417. termined E Yes These values can be customized in the code table Mandatory Field Perpetual coverage from Perpetual coverage to License License The date from which there is perpetual access The date until which there is perpetual access Perpetual coverage note License Note about perpetual holdings Archiving rights License The right to permanently retain an electronic copy of the licensed materials The possible values are E Null Field left blank E No E Undetermined E Yes These values can be customized in the code table 305 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Type of Record Field Length Field Type License Description The format of the archival content The possible values are E Null Field left blank E CDROM E Remote E Tape E Unspecified tangible format These values can be customized in the code table Mandatory Field Archiving note Accessibility compliance Boolean License License Additional information related to archiving rights product and format An agreement that the data is provided in a form compliant with relevant accessibility disabilities legislation Completeness of content clause 306 License The presence of a provision in the contract stating that the licensed electronic materials shall in
418. than one breach record When adding a new breach record note the following m The Occurred date and Reported date fields are populated with the current date These dates may be modified as necessary m Breach type Status and Organization code fields are mandatory fields The first two can be pre defined to contain a library defined value by default Chapter 12 Admin Records m Once the record has been submitted the following fields are automatically updated as well m Breach code Creation date by Latest update by Configuration Local Admin statistics Incidents B Sait Description Title Breach 1 Date occurred i4 Dec 2006 Date reported ts Dec 2006 Action taken Date closed 20 Dec 2006 E Breach type Type 3 F Contact EB Status Closed Breach code BR_1166708998189_15 Organization ORG 1 Creation date 21 Dec 2006 By INST1 administrator Latest update 21 Dec 2006 By INST1 administrator E F 4 Submit me Cancel Figure 67 Breach Record 141 Verde Staff User s Guide 142 13 Trial Records This section includes m About Trial Records on page 143 Trial Records List on page 144 u m Trial Details on page 144 u Trial Workflow on page 148 About Trial Records The trial record stores the information necessary to manage a trial for an e product including the length of the trial
419. the same as or after the end date of any existing subscription records m The acquisition record dates are as follows m The start date of the acquisition record being loaded is before or on the same date as an existing subscription record m The end date of the subscription record is after any existing subscription start dates m The end date of the subscription is before the existing start date 279 Verde Staff User s Guide 280 28 License Input Files This section includes m About License Input Files on page 281 License Input File Rules on page 281 o m License Input File Fields on page 283 a License Loader Workflow on page 313 About License Input Files Verde s license loader loads the license input file This input file loads license records which need to be added to or updated in the Verde database The input file contains columns for the license fields for each record being loaded A new license record must be associated with a single e product that should be identified in the Match column An updated license must be identified in the Match column with a license code The input file contains columns for the fields in the Verde database and rows for each record being loaded The license input file s columns are described in Table 53 License Input File Rules Before loading your input file ensure that it follows these rules m The input file includes the Match column The Match field is mandato
420. the system is installed For more information consult your system administrator For more information on creating input files see Creating Input Files on page 235 Chapter 24 Overview of Loaders 2 From the Select a tool drop down list in the KB Tools module select Loader The Loader menu appears ee Select a tool Loader z gt ALEPH Vendors Converter gt Organizations gt Arganization Ce gota cts gt Libraries gt Library Contacts gt Library IPs gt e Standalone gt e Constituent gt Acquisitions gt Licenses Figure 111 Loader Menu 3 From the Loader menu select the type of loader that you want to use to load records A screen displaying the loader s Task Properties and Delivery Properties appears Note You can view this screen only if you have permissions to use the loader you selected 4 Under Task Properties enter the required values For details on the fields that appear in this section see Defining Input File and Load Output Settings on page 238 5 Under Delivery Properties specify the properties of the output report as described in the following table Table 34 Delivery Property Values Field Values File format The format of the output report that is sent The possible formats are CSV PRN or XML files 237 Verde Staff User s Guide Table 34 Delivery Property Values Values A
421. the trial decision is made Note The decision may be registered before the trial is over The task requires no input parameters Trial Management Process The trial management task is designed to perform changes according to the trial start and end dates Task properties Update database O Create report O Report on open trials only v Trial statuses to be included in the report Decision due Decision over due 5O Figure 108 Trial Management Process Properties This task performs the following changes m When the start date is reached changes the status Approved to the status On hold or On trial m When the end date is reached changes the status On trial to the status Trial Over All other changes should to be conducted manually Input parameters are m Update database If this check box is not selected the report can be run and the output reviewed before running it again in update database mode 222 Chapter 22 Tasks m Create a report If the box is not selected the report will be run but the output file will be empty Report on open trials only m Trial statuses to be included in the report One or many status options may be highlighted m Requested Approved On trial On hold Trial over E Decision due E Decision overdue License License Renewal This report allows for the selection of licenses that are eligible for renewal and depending on the way in which re
422. the trial participants to whom the resource is available during the trial whether the trial is licensed and the trial decision Typically trial records are created for an e package However it is also possible to create trial records for e interfaces and e standalones The trial workflow includes both online and batch processes There are two Verde tasks sending alerts to trial participants and managing trials that relate only to trials Trials can be conducted on active or inactive e products If the trial is conducted on an e product that is already active the only field in the e product that is automatically updated is the Selection status If the trial is conducted on an e product that is not active data from the trial is automatically updated by the e product The trial start and end dates are taken from to the e product s Active from and Active to dates and the license s start and end dates When a trial is over if the decision is not to buy the e product the e product is rejected and the license retired Verde Staff User s Guide Note The trial record contains information necessary to manage the trial only Access information is managed in the access record e product definitions are set in the e product record and if a license is required the license terms are stored in the license record Trial Records List The Trial Records List displays the list of trials that have been run on a particular e product
423. times regardless of your user privileges The summary line is displayed only if an e product is managed in the center for the instance itself A single line has been added to the brief summary It includes the following fields from the e product in the center E e Product status m Selection status Active from date Expiration date if present Coverage text coverage embargo if present Availability if present Acquisition status Verde Staff User s Guide B License status J hein teers penne en mn gen paama KB Manager B Logout Help pd mn ale Ss Verde tt TEE Member 2 urrently working Member 2 senetics GQ American journal o Managing e Products z New Search New Work W View Basket Quick Add american journal of human EBSCOHOST Megarite EBSCOhost O ar e Status Implementation 1 Active 30 Aug 2006 Local Holdings embargo 1999 6 m ago Local Holdings embargo 1999 6 m ago ISSN 0002 9297 eISSN 1537 6605 LPJ e Package type Aggregator Status Production Active 24 Aug 2006 Acquisitions Ready to be approved f z Summary BG CU Interoperability Libraries a B m e Product Acquisitions Belongs to e Package EBSCOHOST MegaFILE Global coverage T Selection status felis Fram 1999 Volume Issue e Product status Access To Activation fr
424. to package Removed from package Table 18 Acqusition Fields Internal Name acquisitionCode Display Name Acquisition code acquisitionNumber Acquisition number subscriptionPeriodCode Subscription period code vendorCode Vendor vendorSubscriptionCode Vendor subscription code purchaseOrderNo Purchase order no ILSSubscriptionNo ILS subscription no acquisitionStatus acquisitionStatusDate Acquisition status Acquisition status date Chapter 21 View Report Output Table 18 Acqusition Fields Internal Name orderDate Display Name Order date subscriptionType Subscription type subscriptionTypeNote printPurchaseOrderNo Subscription type note Print purchase order no numberOfCopies Number of copies orderSendMethod Order send method orderForm Order form noteForILS Note for ILS noteForVendor Note for vendor advanceNoticeDate Advance notice date renewCancDate Renew cancellation date renewCancDescisionNote renewCancNotelLS Renew cancellation decision note Renew cancellation note ILS renewCancNoteVendor Renew cancellation note vendor printCancelRestriction printCancelNote Print cancellation restriction Print cancel note acquisitionMethod Acquisition method materialType Price Material type Price discountOnPrice Discount on
425. tral instance or center All other instances are consortium members The center cannot be a member Member instances that have access to shared resources must be configured as institutes of the central instance This enables the center to manage e products for the member instances Setting Up the System Configuration Parameters The file global properties contains the following two system configuration parameters that must be configured if you are working in a shared consortium environment verde share mode defines the mode in which you are working Possible values are E separate enables multi instance searching but no cooperative acquisitions activation or licensing E share the model described in this section shared instance defines the central instance Verde Staff User s Guide The following is an example configuration lt category name system gt lt property name verde share mode value SHARE gt lt property name Shared instance value INST1 gt lt property name global properties value exlibris verde v2_1 verde home profile global properties gt lt property name verde initialization value true gt lt category gt For more information on customizing system configuration parameters contact your Implementation or Support representative Configuring Institutes 444 Verde supports the following two types of consortium members m Full members also referred
426. trial consideration The user s role is a label or status that identifies the user as part of a functional group for alerts and searches within the library database Note that the user s role is associated with but not directly tied to the permissions assigned to the user see the following step for details on defining these To accommodate the large array of workflows in libraries the role to permissions relationship is flexible For example a user can have the role of license negotiator but not have the authority to approve a license Click the Privileges tab and select the KB Manager for details see KB Manager Module Privileges on page 392 and KB Tools for details see KB Tools Module Privileges on page 398 module permissions you want to assign the user you are creating Note that if you are creating a staff user the permissions defined for the profile s with which the user is associated are read only and displayed in red Users PRIVIeges Clear Select all KB Manager privileges KB Tools privileges 4 Clear Select all Search basket view Work view e Product VW Run general report of e products Create edit Work Oo Run report of e products by selection status Delete Work Ci Run report on e packages with acquisitions Create interface O Run report of IP ranges by licensor Create e package D Run report on locally created e products Create e constituent r Run report on e products with usage statistics Create
427. tribute record can be added The paste function is always available for license records but is available for access and admin records only if there are no access or admin records for the e product and you have create edit permissions for access admin Paste functionality is available in multi instance environments as well as in a single instance environment For information about the copy paste functionality in multi instance environments see Copy Paste Attribute Profiles on page 450 58 7 e Product Records This section includes Overview of the e Product Tab Overview of the e Product Tab on page 59 Adding New e Product Records on page 62 Creating e Product Sets on page 64 Editing e Product Records on page 66 Deleting e Product Records on page 67 List of e Product Fields on page 68 When you click the e Product tab in the left menu of the e product screen the e product details pane is displayed The pane contains the following three tabs E General Information m Interoperability m Libraries General Information This tab covers areas relating to Status Activation and expiry dates Availability Concurrent number of users Global coverage for all e products except e interface Local holdings and so forth for all e products except e interface Verde Staff User s Guide m Sponsoring library Note that clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the field activates a pop up window which displays a list of
428. ues for the e Package status Selection status and Activation from date fields are assigned to the e package Select package Enables you to select an e package from the list of Verde e packages Note that this is a mandatory field Other fields See e Constituent Input File Fields on page 246 for an explanation of the other fields in this screen Note that you should define values for these fields only if you want to activate the e package and e interface during the loading process 239 Verde Staff User s Guide For an explanation of the additional fields displayed for the license loader see the descriptions for the following fields in License Input File Fields on page 283 License start date License end date License status Licensee Licensor Renewal type The acquisition loader s Task Properties section contains the following fields Table 39 Acquisition Loader Fields Corresponding Description Input File Field Match Type ID See Acquisition Input File Fields on page 276 for a description of this field Input File Format Select one of the following formats E Excel XLS m CSV Input File Path Enter the full path of the location from which the input file should be loaded Default Start Date The date on which the acquisition becomes active Enter a date or click the Pick a Date button to right of the text box to select a date from the calendar Default End Da
429. updated By UPDATEDBY Verde user Contains the ID of the staff person who updated the cost record 15 Usage Records This section includes About Usage Records on page 155 m Usage Records List on page 155 m Usage Record Fields on page 156 About Usage Records Usage records store usage statistics that have been generated by other systems such as vendor systems linking software and IT departments Verde itself does not produce usage statistics The usage record is based on the COUNTER schema Usage records can be linked to any type of e product Usage Records List The Usage Records List displays the usage records for a particular e product The usage records are displayed in chronological order The Usage Records List displays the following information for each record m the usage record number m the type of usage report generated m the start sortable and end periods of the usage report E the library from which the statistics were gathered Verde Staff User s Guide m abutton in the Actions column that enables you to edit the record if you have editing privileges and the record is not inherited cb heh eee EST EL TTY SSH RES OTE EET ESE New Usage Record Report type Period from 4 Period to Library Actions 1 Abstracts 01 Mar 2005 14 Mar 2006 christine2 2 Figure 72 Usage Records List To create a new usage record click the New Usage Record button The Details tab opens
430. user password note 360 Electronic resource local user identifier Electronic resource user password note Chapter 32 Access and Access Authorization Input Files Access Authorization Loader Workflow After Verde verifies that the access authorization input file is in the correct format and includes mandatory columns Verde examines the Match field value m Ifno match is found for this field value the line is rejected m If Verde retrieves matches for more than one e product the line is rejected m If only one related e product is found Verde examines the Access type field value m If an access record with the defined access type does not exist for the e product the line is rejected m If an access record with the defined access type does exist for the e product Verde proceeds to search for a record in the database that matches the value in the Library field m Ifno match is found the line is rejected m Ifa double match is found the line is rejected m If only one match is found Verde removes the existing access authorization record and creates a new one 361 Verde Staff User s Guide 362 33 View Loader Output This section includes m Viewing Loader Output on page 363 m Viewing the Report Summary on page 365 m Viewing the Report File on page 366 Viewing Loader Output When you load an input file an output file containing report summary information is created The for
431. using the organization and organization contact loaders Note Although the relationships between the various loaders vary the general workflow remains the same Differences between the loaders are specified throughout the following sections where relevant 233 Verde Staff User s Guide Loader Workflow The general workflow when using the loaders is described in the following figure Create an input file Set the input file settings mandatory default values and delivery settings Run the loader View the loader output Figure 110 Loader Workflow Using the loaders you can upload an input file containing e constituent e standalone acquisition license library organization admin or access records Verde then does the following m Checks that the input file is in the correct format including the heading names For the detailed input file rules see Creating Input Files on page 235 m Verifies that each row contains the mandatory information and ensures that the dates and codes are in the correct format m Checks if a record matching the ID field exists in the database This is discussed in more detail for each loader in Creating Input Files on page 235 Records that are validated are loaded into Verde s database When a record is not validated an error appears in the loader s log file For more information on error possibilities see View Loader Output on page 363 234 Chapter 24 Overview
432. utputs All Verde report outputs can be customized by the instance In the Delivery Properties screen you have the option of choosing a defined report output Delivery properties File format Email Locally defined output Verde format Verde format Report name Default format Figure 117 Customized Report Outputs By default the Locally defined output drop down list contains two options Verde format and Default format The Verde format is a fixed format and cannot be customized by users The default format is editable for and accessible to users Verde Staff User s Guide When creating a customized output you can configure the following m the fields included in the report output and the order in which these fields appear m the column names m the header for the report Creating Your Own Properties File Customization is accomplished through a properties file All properties files are on the server in the following directory exlibris verde VERDE BASE home profile reportsCustomization There is a subdirectory for each instance For example exlibris verde home data reportsCustomization INST1 For each report task and loader there is a default file that matches the report name For example E EProductGeneralReportOutputFormat properties for the e product general report E EProductsUpdateLoaderOutputFormat properties for the e product update loader report E LicenseRenewa
433. utton enabling you to open the organization record m the organization s code m the organization s role m the Contacts button opens the organization record s Contacts tab To create a new organization click the New button in the top right hand corner of the screen To edit the details of an existing organization click the Open Organization button of the record you want to edit The organization record s Details tab opens Note Organizations cannot be deleted They can only be marked as inactive Organizations that are inactive continue to display in the organization list but do not display in the e product attribute record organization lists Organization Details The organization details screen consists of two tabs m Details B Contacts Details Contacts SINICA Organization code Organization role External code Organization name Academia Sinica Press Alternate name 1 Alternate name 2 Alternate name 3 Active Street O No Yes No 1 Beijing City L Consortial member Consortium Interface provider Licensing agent Gi oa Licensor xI vendor Role note Le le Submit Cancel Figure 77 Organization Details 165 Verde Staff User s Guide 166 Details Tab When creating a new organization record the following fields are mandatory Organization code The following characters
434. ve by or ignore this flag Availability from date Date from which the e product is available Availability to date Date until which the e product are available Sponsoring library The library that sponsored the e product Note that clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the field activates a pop up window displaying a list of defined libraries with filter option by role Verde Popup Microsoft Internet Explorer i lof x E List of Libraries Jump to Role an z Go New All Library name Code INST2 NST2 LD S SFX22 SFX23 Clear Close Figure 93 Reports Sponsoring Libraries Library contact Note that clicking the ellipsis on the right side of the field activates a pop up window which displays a list of defined contacts with filter option by role Package type aggregator or selective Free is the resource available free of charge or is it a paid subscription Suppress yes no ignore Flag that indicates if the e product is hidden from Public View Cross ref enabled yes no ignore 184 Chapter 20 Reports The next part of the report input deals with parameters related to acquisitions Acquisition Include all local acquisitions Include all invoices Filters on active records Acquisitions status endor Budgets Final price Consortial agreement Auto renewal Print cancellation restriction Pooled concurrent users Price cap
435. verage information The license to be updated is identified by license code Table 52 Updating a License with Perpetual Coverage Information Match Pepetual Coverage Perpetual Coverage From Ke LIC1187856352455 20 10 12 2007 10 06 2008 m The following fields are mandatory for a new license License status License renewal type and License type If these values columns are missing in the input file default values are assigned to the new license m Some fields are mandatory for several license statuses For a full list of mandatory fields for each license status see the license dependencies table m The input file columns can be rearranged and non mandatory columns can be removed from the input file The text of the column s header cannot be modified 282 Chapter 28 License Input Files m For records being updated the existing values are left unchanged including blank fields You can clear the value of a non mandatory field by entering lt NULL gt in the appropriate column in the input file License Input File Fields The following table describes the input file fields of the license loader Table 53 License Input File Fields Field Name Typeof Record Field Description Mandatory Field Type Length Field Work e For a new license product must be one of the license following E title E workexpression code E Verde e product code E SFX ID of associated e product E For updated license it must
436. vironment active instance in this case the center which is always included in the navigation menu and in the Holdings column z EES EEn Ss Verde Center B rms Managing e Products z New Search New Work W View Basket Quick Add Find genebes By fan Sl Type Contains S e Product Type a GA roe search results for genetics at Managed for all Managed for some Members HEMI MEMBZ Found 79 Products Tele e Package Moldings e Interfsce Actions a ABC of Clevical Genetics 0 7279 oO tev 1627 0 Academic comple CNTR F Implementation 3 sbrace Acadmic Complete aw Abraham Uncoln s ONA And Other Adventures in New Genetics 0 87969 500 3 5 CNTR F Implementation 3 ry Q cag emd Rejected Oe seac Acadn or Advances in genetics 0065 2660 Ee zi gt CNTR F ese et vaxz001 Gr Qe 2 MEMBI Production Ti saver science lt ar vaa 2001 Or Os CHTR P Production Final Approval De Elsevier ScienceDirect w O e CNTR P Production TE Pubmed from ner W Amencan journal of human g ucs 0002 9297 1537 WD ad 6605 1999 6m ego Ps g CNTR P implementation 1 Bi micos w AEE F RA SPR CHTR F Withdraven Rejected 3 2001 SeteGroun InfoTrac 0 sem Implementation 2 OD Salearesn r Ex Ubris 2008 Figure 163 Display Center In a consortium environment the Verde result screen includes a Holdings column which does not display
437. w only licensors select the Licensor role from the drop down list and click Submit Click the Open Organization button Jr next to an organization to select it Once an organization has been selected and the license record has been submitted click the hyperlinked licensor to view a list of contacts for the organization If a licensor is missing from the list of organizations you add the licensor to the list by clicking the New button entering the appropriate details in the Create New Organization pop up window and clicking Submit The original organization granting the license See the note for the previous field name Licensee 112 LICENSEE The library licensing the e product Chapter 10 License Records Field Name Licensing agent Local licensing negotiator Table 10 Description Tab Fields LICENSING AGENT LOCAL LICENSING NEGOTIATOR Description The organization licensing the e product Note To open the list of organizations click the Browse button Although you can select any organization from this list it is likely that you will want to select an organization with the role of Licensing Agent To view only licensing agents select the Licensing Agent role from the drop down list and click Submit Click the Open Organization button gt next to an organization to select it Once an organization has been selected and the license record has been submitted click the hyperlink
438. wing fields are mandatory E Start date and End date m Available to public E License required Decision date Click Submit The new trial record is displayed in the Trial Records List Editing a Trial Record To edit an existing trial record from the Actions column of the Trial Records List click the Edit button Only users with editing privileges can edit an existing trial record Once a trial record has a status of On Trial it cannot be edited 147 Verde Staff User s Guide Deleting a Trial Record Trial records can be deleted only when the trial status is Requested or On Hold Other trial statuses prevent the trial record from being deleted Trial Workflow 148 When a request is made to run a trial on a particular e resource you should create a trial record and assign the status Requested to the record Negotiations begin at this point and the trial record gets completed as the process progresses Note Trials cannot be run on e constituents They can be run on e packages e standalones and e interfaces only When a trial is run on an e package or e interface all lower level records are automatically included in the trial By the time a trial has been approved the following information must be completed in the trial record m Start date and End date m Available to public m License required E Decision date In addition it is recommended that you add trial participants Trial participants are notifi
439. ws contains the mandatory information Verde searches for a record in the database that matches the ID field as follows If the Match field is an e product Verde searches the database for a matching e product If the e product is found and is part of the package being loaded Verde updates the e product record If no e product record is found and work information is provided in the input file Verde creates both work and e product records Otherwise Verde rejects the row in the input file and writes an error to the loader s output file If the Match field is a work record Verde searches for a matching work record If the work is found and one of the associated e constituents is an e constituent of the package being loaded Verde updates the e constituent record If no matching e constituent is found for the work record Verde creates a new e constituent record linked to the work record If no work record is found Verde creates both the work records and its linked e constituent record 255 Verde Staff User s Guide m For new records that include unique identifiers such as ISSN eISSN ISBN and eISBN Verde performs duplication checking If the identifier does not exist in Verde s KB Verde creates both work and e product records Otherwise Verde rejects the row in the input file and writes an error to the loader s output file 256 26 e Standalone Input Files This section includes m About e Standalone Input Files on
440. y ed 1 6 4 2005 Updater py Figure 17 Updated e Products Message m Individual e constituent update available only for selective e package lists When you click an individual e constituent s Update button updater 44 Chapter 5 e Product Lists in the column on the right a drop down list appears displaying the options relevant to the e constituent s selection status Selection Stas Coverage Review Updater Li mz l Approved Update Rejected Deactivate Figure 18 e Constituent Update In the above example the e constituent has a selection status of Review so the only update options are Approved Rejected and Deactivate If the Activate option is available and you select this option the Activation pop up window opens prompting you to enter the data required to activate the e constituent The values entered in these fields are used to update the e constituent in the e package list Note that there is a section in which you can enter the local holdings In addition the global coverage for the e constituent is displayed KB Manager KB Too Z Verde 2 Yerde Popup Microsoft Internet Explorer l o a selective Q asc crf ooo Managing e Products El ap scitation e Package type Selective license New e Product status z Global coverage v 190 1 2000 Selection status z Local holdings Activation from date 25 Dec 20
441. you build the appropriate links 63 Verde Staff User s Guide between the e product and its parent record by selecting the relevant e package or e interface in the Belong to e Package or Belong to e Interface field o 5 Verde Popup Microsoft Internet Explorer Ss lol xd J b f ann ump to Belongs to e Interface Accountancy Select The Accountant Select e Package type wer ACI materials journal Select Selective e Package type C Complet Pa ACI structural journal Select Acta bio medica de L Ateneo parmense Select Acta dermato venereologica Select Selection status z Acta medica Austriaca Select e Product status Action Select Ee Actualit s du droit de l information Select Activation from date El Acupuncture in medicine Select addall com Select Evniration date Fel AdisOnline Select Figure 37 Belong to e Interface Creating e Product Sets You can create an e product set using the Quick Add wizard or a manual procedure This section describes both ways of creating an e product set The Quick Add Wizard The Quick Add wizard contains five steps that allow for the quick creation of an e package e interface or of an e standalone e interface To create an e product set using the Quick Add wizard 1 Inthe e product search result screen or e product screen click the Quick Add button in the top right corner to launch the wizard In the first screen select e Package or e Standalone from the T
442. ype drop down list and click Next 2 In Step 2 enter the e package or e standalone basic bibliographic details Note that the e package Title field is mandatory as are the e standalone Title and Type fields Click Next to continue 3 In Step 3 enter the e package or e standalone status details Note the following m For e package The e package type fields are mandatory If the Activation from field is filled in e Product status is mandatory If the e Product status field is filled in but the Activation from field is left empty the current date is registered 64 Chapter 7 e Product Records E For e standalone If the Activation from field is filled in the e Product status field is mandatory If the e Product status field is filled in but the Activation from field is left empty the current date is registered Click Next to continue 4 InStep 4 choose Select e Interface to access a list of existing e interfaces When the list is displayed you can browse alphabetically through the list or search for an e interface by entering a search string in the search box Once the e interface has been found click the Select e Interface button to add it to the record Click Next If an e interface does not exist select Create new e Interface enter the e interface name in the Title box and click A new e interface work record is automatically created with the title that you previously entered in the Title box
443. zing e Product Updates with SFX m Mark an entry as reviewed by clicking the Reviewed check box when you have handled SFX setup or resolved an error m Show or hide entries marked as reviewed By default when you mark an entry as reviewed it is hidden When you click Show all all entries are shown including those marked as reviewed m Display a log of a task by clicking in the Action column The report contains two tabs One contains a report of updated records the second contains a report of new records Both provide links to SFX which enables you to perform SFX setup for the e product if necessary m Differentiate between scheduled and manual synchronization tasks If the task was triggered by the scheduler the User name column displays SYSTEM If the task was triggered by a user the User name column displays the name of the user who triggered the task m Navigate to the record of the e product synchronized by a task by clicking for an e package or amp for an e standalone m Sort tasks by title synch status synch date or user name Using Synchronization History to Manage SFX Setup Requirements The Synchronization History enables you to easily view which e products require SFX setup after synchronization to link to SFX and perform the setup and to mark off the SFX setups you have completed To manage SFX setup requirements 1 From the Sync status drop down list select Done SFX setup required

Verde Staff User's Guide - University of Calgary Libraries

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents